II  ■  •  ■  . 


VIELE 


ON 


FIELD  FOBTIFICATTONS 


f 


AN1> 


ARTILLERl 


"W^  I T  H    P  I.  ^  T  E  S  . 


I :  .1.  Av.  i;andqlph, 

IJI   Main  ISireet.. Richmond,  ViROiNt*. 


^ 


TREASUR    KQQfcd 


COL.  GEORGE  WASHINGTON  FLOWERS 
MEMORIAL  COLLECTION 


DUKE  UNIVERSITY  LIBRARY 
DURHAM,  N.  C. 


PRESENTED  BY 

W.  W.  FLOWERS 


^  sjr"^* 


>  \?  I 


¥~ 


-^^si-a-^ 


^004    '^.lo^ci 


cJf7  vvC  t^ 


Profile  and  Outline  of  a  Bastion  Front  Field  Work. 


HAND-BOOK 


OP 


FIELD  FORTIFICATIONS 


AND 


JLEyTIXjLEI^"^; 


ALSO 


MANUAL 


FOR 


LIGHT  AND  HEAYY  ARTILLEIY. 


WITH   ILLUSTRATIONS. 


BY 

EGBERT    L.    VIELE, 

LATE  U.  S.  A. 
<3APTAIN   ENQINBERS,  SEVENTH   REGIMENT,  N.  G, 


J.  W.  RANDOLPH, 

121  MAIN  ST.,  RICHMOND,  VA- 

1861. 


E  R0WE1?S  COLLECTION  ^^ 

1    ■ 


CHAPTER  I. 

FIELD  FORTIFICATIONS. 

Field  works  are  any  constructions  which  have  for  their  object 
to  impede  the  advance  of  an  enemy,  or  to  enable  an  inferior  force 
to  maintain  their  position  against  the   attack  of  a  supe  ior  number. 

The  name  of  field  forticatlon  is  applied  to  a  work  which  is  com- 
posed of  an  embankment  of  earth  called  a  "parapet,"  and  an  ex- 
cavation called  a  "ditch,"  on  the  exterior  side  which  last  furnishes 
the  earth  for  the  embankment. 

The  outline  or  form  of  the  work  varies  with  the  character  of  the 
ground,  the  circumstances  under  which  it  is  constructed,  the 
strength  of  the  force,  and  particular  character  of  the  defence.  The 
profile  or  shape  of  the  embankment  or  parapet  is  usually  the  same 
in  all  cases- 

When  the  ground  about  a  work  within  effective  range  of  the  fire- 
arms of  the  attacking  party  is  quite  flat,  the  height,  called  the 
"  command"  of  the  work,  must  be  at  least  7  feefc  6  inches,  in  order 
that  the  defenders  may  be  covered  from  the  fire  of  men  on  horse- 
back— that  class  of  troops  being  able  to  discharge  their  arms  at  7 
feet  6  inches  above  the  ground.  - 

Unimportant  works,  or  such  as  arc  situated  on  higher  ground 
than  that  within  effective  artillery  range,  may  have  their  parapets 
as  low  as  6  feet,  or  even  5  feet. 

Fig-.  1, — Plate  2  shows  the  ordinary  form  of  the  profile  of  an  in- 
trench men  t,  in  soils  of  which  the  natural  slope  is  one  perpendicular 
to  one  base. 

A  B  C  D  E  F  is  the  profile  of  the  Parapet. 

G  H  I  K  tlie  profile  of  the  Ditch. 

L  M  N  the  profile  of  tlie  Glacis. 

A  B  the  Banquette  Slopes. 

B  C  Tread  of  the  Banquette. 

C  D  the  Interior  Slope. 

D  E  the  Superior  Slope. 

E  F  tlie  Exterior  Slope. 

F  G  the  Berm. 

G  H  the  Scarp. 


268114 


4  FIELD    FORTIFICATIONS. 

H  I  the  Bottom  of  the  Ditch. 

I  K  the  Counterscarp. 

A  tUte  Foot  of  the  Banquette  Slope. 

B  the  Crest  of  the  Banquette. 

C  the  Foot  of  the  Interior  Slope. 

D  the  Interior  Crest. 

E  the  Exterior  Crest. 

F  the  Foot  of  the  Exterior  Slope. 

G  the  Crest  of  the  Scarp. 

H  the  Foot  of  the  Scarp. 

I  the  Foot  of  the  Counterscarp. 

K  the  Crest  of  the  Counterscarp. 

M  the  Crest  of  the  Glacis. 

N  the  Foot  of  the  Glacis. 

Fig.  2  shows  the  general  plan  of  intrenchments  with  flanking  ar- 
rangements. 

O  A  B  and  E  F  P  are  the  Advanced  Parts. 

B  C  D  E  are  the  Retired  Parts. 

A  0,  A  B,  E  F,  and  F  P  are  the  Faces. 

B  C  and  D  E  are  the  Flanks. 

C  D  the   Curtains. 

A  D  and  C  F  the  Lines  of  Defence. 

O  A  B  and  E  F  P  are  the  Salient  Angles. 

BCD  and  C  D  E  the  Re-entering  Angles. 

A  D  F  and  B  C  F  the  Angles  of  Defence. 

b  A  c  and  e  F  g  the  Sectors  without  Fire, 

L  M  and  N  R  the  Capitals. 

Sometimes  the  parapet*  is  formed  of  earth  taken  from  an  excava- 
tion or  trench  inside  of  it;  in  this  case  a  parapet  may  be  as  low  as 
B  feet,  because,  then,  the  defenders  standing  in  the  trench  of  equal 
depth,  and  close  behind  the  parapet,  are  sufficiently  covered   by  it. 

Should  there  be  ground  near  the  position  to  be  fortified,  higher 
than  that  on  which  the  parapet  stands,  the  latter  must  then  have  a 
greater  command  than  7  feet  6  inches,  but  in  the  more  simple  kind  of 
field  works  the  command  does  not  exceed  12  feet;  for  as  soldiers 
cannot  easily  throw  earth  with  a  shovel  to  a  greater  heisjht  than  6 
feet^  and  as  other  means  are  generally  wanting  in  the  field,  it  is  evi- 
dent that  the  height  of  a  parapet  for  such  a  work,  must  be  limited 
by  the  capability  of  executing  it  with  shovels  and  pickaxes  by  two 
parties  of  men,  one  standing  on  a  level  6  feet  above  the  other.  The 
game  reason  determines  the  greatest  depth  of  ditch  to  be  12  feet,  a 

*  In  this  manner  cover  for  troops  may  be  very  quickly  obtained,  with 
the  advantage  of  having  the  power  to  advance  over  the  parapet  in  order 
of  battle  when  occasion  offers. 


FIELD    FORTIFICATIONS.  5 

scaffolding  being  necessary  at  6  feet  above  the  bottom  of  the  ditch 
to  receive  the  earth  which  is  thrown  from  tlience ;  the  earth  is  then 
thrown  up  to  the  level  of  the  ground,  by  other  laborers  placed  on 
the  scaffolding. 

In  the  construction  of  field  works  it  should  always  be  recollected 
that  a  great  command  of  parapet  not  only  requires  additional  means, 
trouble,  and  time  to  throw  up  the  earth,  but  also  renders  necessary 
an  increased  mass  of  earth  for  the  banquette,  which  may  thus  en- 
cumber the  interior  of  the  work. 

To  obviate,  as  much  as  possible,  the  latter  evil,  it  is  usual  to 
mount  the  banquette,  by  steps,  when  the  parapet  has  a  greater  com- 
mand than  8  feet. 

The  thickness  of  the  parapets  of  field  works  must  be  regulated 
by  the  description  of  arms  likely  to  be  employed  a^jainst  them;  in 
order,  therefore,  that  they  may  afford  a  reasonable  degree  of  resis- 
tance to  repeated  firing,  the  thickness  of  parapets  must  somewhat 
exceed  the  penetration  of  the  shot  which  may  be  used  in  the  at- 
tack. 

Penetration  of  shot.  Thickness  of  parapet. 
MusUet  ball,  10  to  18  inches,  3  fen&t. 

6 — pounder,  3^  to  4  feet.  6  feet. 

9 — pounder,  6^  to  7  feet.  8  or  9  feet. 

12— pounder,  8|  to  10  feet.  10  or  12  feet. 

It  is  found  by  experiment  that  loose  earth  resists  the  penetration 
of  shot  just  as  well  as  that  which  has  been  rammed  together. 

Although  a  musket  ball  penetrates,  at  most,  only  18  inches  into 
earth,  musketry  parapets  require  to  be  made  3  feet  thick,  in  order 
that  they  may  be  sufficiently  substantial  to  preserve  the  requisite 
height,  notwithstanding  the  action  of  the  weather. 

Heavier  guns  than  12-pounders  are  rarely  brought  into  the  field, 
consequently  12  feet  may  be  considered  as  the  greatest  thickness  of 
a  parapet;  and  it  has  been  shown  that,  for  the  simpler  works,  12 
feet  is  the  greatest  command  of  a  parapet,  and  likewise  the  greatest 
depth  of  a  ditch. 

The  exterior  side  of  a  parapet  is  formed  with  a  slope  which  has 
a  base  equal  to  its  height,  that  being  the  inclination  which  (ordina- 
ry) earth  assumes  when  thrown  up  loosely ;  and,  therefore,  it  is  the 
most  advantageous  form  for  a  mass  of  earth  whose  sides  are  unsup- 
ported. 

The  interior  slope  of  a  parapet  has  a  base  not  greater  than  one- 
third  or  one-fourth  of  its  height,  in  order  to  allow  the  men  to  ap- 
proach near  the  crest,  and  to  fire  over  the  parapet  with  ease. 


9.  R  Pi  1  1  A 


6  FIELD    FORTIFICATIONS. 

As  newly  Tnoved  enrth  will  not  remain  at  such  a  steep. slope  with- 
out support,  it  must  be  retained  in  that  state  by  a  revetment. 

The  KEVETMENT  is  commonlj  made  with  gabions,  fascines,  sand- 
bags, or  sods  of  turf;  or  again  with  hurdles,  casks,  trunks  of  trees, 
and  occasionally  with  doors,  shutters,  &c.,  from  any  neighboring- 
houses.  Trunks  of  trees  are  objectionable  as  a  revetment  for  the 
interior  slope,  on  account  of  the  splinters  that  fly  from  them  when 
struck  by  shot;  and  large  trees^  laid  horizontally  to  revet  the  escarp 
or  counterscarp,  are  defective,  because  they  serve  as  steps  for  the 
assailants. 

Gabions  are  strong  cylindrical  baskets  without  top  or  bottom,  2 
feet  in  diameter,  and  2  feet  9  inches  in  height.  These  are  placed 
in  rows  along  the  line  of  work  at  an  inclination  corresponding  to 
the  required  slope,  and  then  filled  with  earth.  To  make  a  gabion, 
from  eight  to  fourteen  pickets,  S  feet  6  inches  long,  are  fixed  up- 
right in  the  ground,  at  equal  distaHCcs,  in  the  circumference  of  a 
circle,  1  foot  11  inches  in  diameter;  flexible  twigs  (or  rods)  are 
then  interwoven  with  the  upright  pickets,  commencing  with  three 
rods  at  the  bottom,  and  weaving  each  in  succession  outside  of  two 
pickets  and  inside  of  one;  as  the  twigs  (or  rods)  are  expended, 
others  are  added,  and  the  basket  work  continued  to  the  height  of  2 
feet  9  inches ;  this  work  (which  is  called  the  web)  is  sewn  in  three  or 
four  parts,  from  top  to  bottom ;  withes,  (called  gads,)  or  spun-yarn 
being  used  for  that  purpose,  in  order  to  keep  it  from  coming  off  the 
pickets;  the  ends  of  these  are  then  cut  off,  about  an  inch  from  the 
web.  A  gabion,  thus  made,  stands  3  feet  higla  in  the  revetment, 
and  weighs  from  36  to  40  lbs.  The  best  wood  for  the  web,  and 
particularly  for  the  gads,  is  willow  and  hazel. 

Fascines  are  military  faggots,  18  feet  long  and  9  inches  in 
diameter :  they  can  be  sawed  into  shorter  length,  and  are  sometimes 
made  only  G  feet  long. 

To  make  a  fascine,  two  trestles  (like  a  St.  Andrew's  cross)  are 
fixed  in  the  ground  at  16  feet  apart  ^  then  three  or  four  other  tres- 
tles (according  to  the  length  and  thickness  of  the  brushwood)  are 
placed  at  equal  distances  between  the  two  first  trestles;  and  in  a 
direct  line  with  them ;  brushwood  is  next  laid  along  the  trestles, 
(the  smallest  inside,)  so  as  to  project  17  or  18  inches  beyond  the 
extreme  trestles,  and  is  compressed  to  a  diameter  of  9  inches  by 
means  of  an  instrument  called  a  choker;*  the  brushwood  is  bound 

*  Tlie  choicer  consists  of  4  feet  of  chain,  with  a  wooden  lever  at  each 
eiul.  On  the  chain  is  marked,  by  rings  a  length  of  28  inches,  being  a  cir- 
cumference equivalent,  nearly,  to  a  diameter  of  9  inches. 


FIELD    FORTIFICATIONS.  7 

with  gads,  (before  the  choker  is  relaxed,)  at  6  inches  beyond  the 
extreme  trestles,  and  at  intermediate  intervals  of  15 i  inches,  and 
the  ends  of  the  fascine  are  sawed  off  square,  at  1  foot  beyond  the 
extreme  trestles. 

Fascine  gads  are  tough  and  flexible  twigs,  5  feet  long,  very 
much  twisted  to  render  them  lit  for  tying.  A  squad  of  five  men 
can,  in  an  hour,  make  a  fascine  which  weighs  (when  tolerably  dry 
material)  from  140  to  IGO  lbs.  If,  however,  the  bruvshwood  is  green 
and  much  thicker  than  a  man's  thumb,  it  will  weigh  200  lbs.  The 
fascines  forming  a  revetment  are  fastened  in  their  position,  (one 
above  another,)  by  picket^  3^  or  4  feet  long,  which  are  driven 
obliquely  downwards  through  the  fascine  so  as  to  form  an  angle  cf 
45°  with  the  slope.  The  pickets  should  be  in  the  proportion  of  6 
to  an  18-inch  fascine,  of  which  two  are  driven  vertically,  in  order 
to  fasten  each  fascine  to  that  which  is  beneath  it. 

Two  gabions  make  nearly  the  same  quantity  of  revetment  as  an 
18-inch  fascine,  and  consume  but  half  the  quantity  of  materials  j 
moreover,  they  require  only  common  laborers  to  form  them  into  a 
revetment,  and  stand  in  their  positions  without  pickets  or  other 
fastening;  they  also  make  a  more  durable  revetment  than  fascines 
or  sand-bags. 

As  fascines  are  heavy,  require  pickets  to  fasten  them,  and  expe- 
rienced men  to  build  them  in  revetment;  as,  moreover,. each  fascine 
takes  twice  as  much  material  as  two  gabions,  which,  together,  will 
make  a  revetment  of  equal  supcrfices,  it  is  evident  that  fjiscines  are 
inferior  to  gabions  for  the  formation  of  revetments,  although  they 
support  the  earth  at  the  same  slope,  viz.,  with  a  base  equal  to  one- 
quarter  of  its  height. 

Sang-bags  are  bags  of  coarse  canvas,  measuring,  when  empty 
and  laid  flat,  2  feet  8  inches  by  1  foot  4  inches;  they  contain,  when 
quite  full,  a  bushel  of  earth ;  but  when  tied  and  placed  in  revet- 
ment, only  three-quarters  of  a  bushel.  In  building  a  revetment 
with  them  they  are  arranged  with  their  ends  and  sides  presented  al- 
ternately to  the  front  in  each  course,  and  with  the  joints  in  the  suc- 
cessive couises  broken,  like  brickwork.  Sixteen  sand-bags  build  10 
square  feet  of  revetment;  they  ought  to  be  tarred,  if  the  vevet-^, 
ments  are  to  last  a  considerable  time ;  if  not  tarred,  they  rot  in  two 
months.  An  empty  sand-bag  weighs  1  lb.  2  oz.,  and  when  tarred  1 
lb.  12  oz. 

Filled  sand-bags  are  musket-shot  proof,  and  are  frequently  placed 
on  a  parapet,  one  across  two  others,  the  latter  being  a  short  distance 
asunder,  in  order  that  the  intervals  may  serve  as  loopholes. 


8  FIELD   FORTIFICATIONS. 

Gun  batteries  are  sometimes  made  entirely  of  sand-bags,  which 
are  filled  at  a  distance  and  brought  to  the  place ;  this  may  be  done 
either  to  save  time,  or  when  earth  cannot  be  procured  on  the  spot, 
in  consequence  of  the  soil  being  rocky  or  marshy. 

On  naval  expeditions  sand-bags  are  very  serviceable,  as  there  is 
no  other  way  in  which  a  battery  can  be  promptly  formed  on  a 
shore. 

When  sand-bags  or  gabions  are  made  use  of  to  revet  the  cheeks 
of  embrasures,  they  should  be  covered  with  raw  hides,  to  prevent 
them  from  being  damaged  by  the  flash  and  the  concussion  caused 
by  the  discharge  of  the  gun. 

Sods  or  turf,  being  generally  procurable  on  the  spot,  are  much 
used  in  the  revetments  of  the  slopes  of  field  works;  but  there  are 
strong  objections  to  sod  revetments,  particularly  as  they  take  three 
times  as  long  to  build  as  a  brick  wall. 

Good  sods  ought  to  be  cut  16  inches  long,  8  inches  wide,  and  4 
inches  thick;  they  are  built  up  in  the  same  manner  as  bricks,  and 
with  the  grass  downwards,  and  are  fastened  with  pickets  long 
enough  to  penetrate  three  courses.  Six  sods  build  2  square  feet  of 
revetment.  A  sod  revetment  requires  most  labor;  revetments  of 
sand-bags,  fascines,  and  gabions,  require  successively  less;  the  last 
is  the  best  in  all  respects;  a  sod  revetment  retains  the  earth  at  a 
slope  of  one-third  only,  the  three  others  at  a  slope  of  one-fourth. 

The  parapet  is  bounded  on  its  upper  surface  by  a  plane  called  the 
'^superior  slope;"  this  declines  towards  the  counterscarp,  in  order 
to  enable  the  defenders  to  see  and  fire  on  the  assailants  (directly) 
until  they  descend  into  the  ditch.  The  amount  of  this  slope  is 
called  the  "  plongee,"  and  this  varies  from  one-sixth  to  one-fourth  of 
the  thickness  of  the  parapet,  but  it  must  not  exceed  one-fourth  in 
order  that  the  crest*  of  the  parapet  may  not  become  too  weak. 

It  is  of  great  importance  that  the  superior  slope  should  be  di- 
rected to  the  counterscarp,  as  it  then  enables  the  defenders,  not- 
withstanding the  smoke  and  confusion  consequent  on  an  attack, 
to  direct  their  fire  with  certainty  to  a  spot  where  the  assailants'  col- 
umns must  be,  more  or  less,  detained  by  the  ditch  and  the  obstacles 
in.it, 

•  If  the  superior  slope  cannot  be  directed  to  the  edge  of  the  coun- 

*  It  has  been  found  by  experience  that  a  soldier  cannot  depress  his 
musket,  when  firing,  more  than  15°  below  a  horizontal  plane,  and  a  plon- 
g^e  of  one-fourtli  of  the  thickness  of  the  parapet  gives  a  depression  of 
15°;  this  is  an  additional  reason  for  limiting  the  pIong6e  to  one-fourth  of 
the  thickness  of  the  parapet. 


FIELD    FORTIFICATIONS.  9 

terscarp  without  making  the  plongee  more  than  one-fourth  of  the 
thickness  of  the  parapet,  the  counterscarp  must  be  raised  by  means 
of  a  small  glacis.  The  crest  of  this  glacis,  however,  should  be  kept 
at  least  4  feet  below  the  crest  of  the  parapet  of  the  work,  that  the 
assailants,  when  on  the  glacis,  may  not  have  the  power  of  firing  into 
the  work. 

The  outer  edge  of  the  superior  slope  is  called  the  "exterior 
crest,"  whilst  the  inner  (and  upper)  edge  of  the  same  slope  is  called 
the  "interior  crest,"  or  the  "crest"  of  the  parapet. 

A  step,  called  a  "banquette,"  is  placed  at  the  foot  of  the  interior 
slope,  and  from  4  feet  3  inches  to  4  feet  6  inches  below  the  crest, 
in  order  to  enable  the  defenders  to  fire  with  ease  over  the  parapet, 
and  in  the  direction  of  its  superior  slope. 

The  terreplein,  or  tread  of  the  banquette,  is  made  8  feet 
wide  for  one  rank  of  men,  and  4  feet  wide  if  intended  for  two 
ranks.  In  order  that  the  men  on  it  may  descend  backwards  with 
ease,  there  is  a  gentle*  slope  for  that  purpose,  having  a  base  equal 
to  t\^ice  the  height  of  the  banquette. 

The  ditch  is  not  excavated  immediately  at  the  foot  of  the  exterior 
slope  of  the  parapet,  but  at  a  distance  from  it,  varying  from  1  to  4 
feet,  according  to  the  adhesiveness  of  the  soil.  This  space  of  un- 
moved earth  is  called  the  berme,  and  it  is  requisite  both  to  remove 
the  pressure  of  the  parapet  from  the  immediate  edge  of  the  ditch, 
and  to  facilitate 'the  construction  and  repair  of  the  parapet.  A 
berme  has  the  defect  of  afi"ording  an  intermediate  landing-place  on 
which  the  assailants  may  form;  and  although  it  may  be  occupied 
by  obstacles,  these  require  additional  labor,  and  may  be  destroyed 
by  cannon;  yet  a  berme  can  scarcely  be  dispensed  with  unless  the 
earth  is  very  adhesive,  and  that  the  parapet  is  not  more  than  8  feet 

'The  berme,  in  most  cases,  may  be  cut  away  after  the  parapet  has 
had  two  or  three  days  to  settle. 

The  ditch  will  not  be  an  eff'ective  obstacle  if  less  than  6  feet  m 
depth,  and  for  the  reason  given,  it  is  not  made  deeper  than  12  feet. 

The  sides  of  the  ditch  being  of  unmoved  earth,  they  will  support 
themselves,  without  revetment,  at  a  steeper  slope  than  those  of  the 
parapet;  and  as  the  counterscarp  has  not  the  weight  of  the  parapet  to 
resist,  and  is  not  exposed  to  fire,  it  may,  generally,  be  made  steeper 
than  the  escarp. 

^  If  the  parapet  has  a  greater  command  than  8  feet,  this  convenience 
is  rehnquished  on  account  of  the  great  space  occupied  by  it,  and  the  ban- 
(juette  is  ascended  by  steps. 


10  FIELD   FORTIFICATIONS. 

The  slopes  of  both  vary  from  a  base  equal  to  the  height  to  a  base 
of  one-quarter  of  the  height. 

To  find  the  breadth  of  the  ditch,  (of  the  usifal  shape,)  divide  the 
area  of  a  profile  of  the  parapet  by  the  intended*  depth  of  the  ditch, 
and  the  quotient  is  the  mean  breadth  of  the  latter;  to  this,  add  half 
the  sum  of  the  bases  of  the  escarp  and  counterscarp  slopes  for  the 
breadth  at  top,  and  deduct  the  same  half  sum  for  the  breadth  at 
bottom. 

The  best  shape  for  an  unflanked  ditch  is  one  having  a  triangular 
section,  as  it  does  not  permit  the  assailants  to  form  at  the  bottom; 
and  moreover,  with  an  equal  depth  and  area  of  section,  it  may  be 
made  wider  at  top  than  a  trapezoid  would  be;  by  which  means  the 
superior  slope  of  the  parapet  can  be  directed  to  the  counterscarp 
without  too  much  increasing  the  plongee,  or  without  raising  the 
counterscarp  by  a  glacis. 

To  find  the  breadth  of  a  ditch  having  a  triangular  section,  divide 
the  area  of  a  profile  of  the  parapet  by  half  the  given  depth  of 
ditch,  and  the  quotient  is  the  required  breadth  at  top ;  the  sides 
may  evidently  have  any  given  inclinations  to  the  horizon  consistently 
with  the  given  breadth,  depth,  and  area  of  a  transverse  section. 

THE    OUTLINES    OF   FIELD   WORKS. 

The  direction  which  a  parapet  is  made  to  assume  in  order  to  en- 
close, or  partially  enclose,  the  ground  to  be  fortified,  is  called  the 
outline  of  a  work. 

The  following  are  general  principles  to  be  observed  in  determin- 
ing the  outlines  of  field  works  : 

1st.  There  should  be  a  reciprocal  defence  between  all  the  parts  of 
works,  so  that  the  ground  over  which  an  enemy  must  pass  to  the 
attack  should,  if  possible,  be  seen  both  in  front  and  in  flank. 

2dly.  The  "lines  of  defence'^  must  not  exceed  the  eff"ective  range 
of  muskets,  viz. :  about  160  yards. 

3dly.  Re-entering"]"  angles  (viz. :  flanking  angles,)  ought-never  to 
be  less  than  90°  and  seldom  more  than  100° ;  for,  if  less  than  90°, 
the  men  on  the  flanking  parts  would  fire  against  each  other;  and  if 
more  than  100°,  the  fire  of  the  flanking  parts  would  diverge  too  far 
from  the  salient  to  be  flanked. 

*  This  is  determined  chiefly  by  the  natnre  of  the  soil  and  the  size  of 
the  parapet. 

"I"  In  both  these  cases  it  is  presumed  that  the  soldier  fiies  (as  he  gene- 
rally does)  at  right  angles  to  the  parapet  behind  which  he  stands. 


Page  10. 


FIELD    FORTIFICATIONS.  11 

4thly.  The  salient  angles  of  works  should  be  as  obtuse  as  possi- 
ble, and  never  less  than  60°,  otherwise  the  interior  space  might  be- 
come too  contracted;  the  angle  would  be  so  sharp  as  to  be  quickly 
worn  away  by  the  weather,  and  would  be  easily  battered  down;  also 
the*  undefended  sectoral  space  in  front  of  the  salient  angle  (which 
is  the  supplement  of  the  angel)  would  become  very  great;  and 

5thly.  The  outline  of  a  field  work  should  be  proportioned  in 
length  to  the  number  of  men  and  guns  intended  for  its  defence. 
One  man  occupies  a  space  of  three  feet. 

The  names  of  the  works  most  commonly  employed  in  field  forti- 
fication are  redans,  single,  double,  and  triple;  redans  with  auxiliary 
flanks;  lunettes,  redoubts,  star  forts,  bastioned  and  demi-bastioned 
forts,  block-houses,  and  works  used  mostly  for  lines  of  intrench- 
ment,  such  as  tenaillcs  and  cremailleres. 

The  REDAN  is  a  work  consisting  of  two  faces,  which  form  with 
each  other  a  salient  angle,  the  rear  being  open.  When  the  faces 
are  not  more  than  about  20  yards  in  length,  the  work  is  sometimes 
called  a  fleche. 

The  redan  is  in  the  most  advantageous  position  when  the  ground 
before  the  salient  angle,  and  approaches  to  the  gorge,  are  inaccessi- 
ble, or  when  the  work  can  be  supported  by  troops;  for  example, 
when,  with  obstacles  in  its  front,  it  is  employed  as  an  advanced 
work  to  defend  hollow  ground  which  cannot  be  seen  from  the  prin- 
cipal work — to  protect  a  bridge,  a  dam,  a  road,  a  defile,  or  to  cover 
a  guard,  an  advanced  post,  &c. 

The  weak  points  of  this  work  are :  that  it  has  an  open  gorge,  and 
that  its  ditch,  and  the  ground  in  front  of  the  salLent  angle,  are  un- 
defended either  by  direct  or  flanking  fire. 

On  account  of  its  having  an  open  gorge,  it  is  seldom  advisable  to 
construct  a  redan  as  an  isolated  work;  its  rear  should  be  exposed  to 
the  fire  of  some  collateral  work,  or  have  free  communication  with  a 
body  of  troops  in  its  rear,  to  whom  it  may  form  an  advanced  post, 
or  outwork;  or  otherwise  the  faces  should  terminate  on  a  river,  a 
marsh,  or  any  inaccessible  ground,  which  would  prevent  it  from  be- 
ing turned. 

The  first  defect,  viz, :  that  of  having  an  open  gorge,  may  be  reme- 
died in  a  sHght  degree  by  placing  along  the  gorge  abatis,  trous  de 


*  Undefended  by  direct  fire.  To  prevent  the  enemy  from  approaching 
the  work  on  these  undefended  sectors  the  salients  shouhl  be  directed  to- 
wards some  natural  obstacle,  such  as  a  marsh,  &c.;  or  if  this  cannot  be 
done,  then  artificial  obstacles  should  be  disposetl  in  their  front. 


12  FIELD   FORTIFICATIONS, 

loup,  &c.,  (or  palisades,  if  time  and  materials  abound;)  as  for  the 
second  defect,  a  direct  fire  may  be  brought  in  front  of  the  salient 
either  by  rounding  the  latter,  or  by  cutting  off  the  angle  by  a  short 
face  not  less  than  6  yards  long. 

A  flanking  fire  may  be  procured  for  the  ditch  and  salients,  by 
forming  auxiliary  flanks,  which  may  be  placed  either  towards  the 
middle  or  at  the  extremities  of  the  faces;  such  a  flank  ought  not  to 
be  less  than  than  12  yards  long,  that  there  may  be,  at  least,  12  men 
firing  from  it. 

Double  redans  consist  of  two  redans  joined  together,  their  ex- 
terior faces  being  generally  longer  than  the  others:  the  French  call 
a  work  of  this  kind  a  queue  d'  hyronde. 

A  TRIPLE  REDAN  consists  of  three  redans  joined  together,  the 
exterior  faces  of  these  are  also,  in  general,  longer  than  the  others. 

A  LUNETTE  is  a  large  redan  with  flanks  parallel  or  nearly  parallel 
to  the  capital;  as  a  general  rule,  the  flanks  are  traced  perpendicu- 
larly to  the  intended  line  of  fire,  for  the  purpose  of  bringing  on 
certain  spots  a  more  direct  fire  than  could  be  made  from  the  faces 
of  the  work. 

It  is  often  desirable  to  secure  the  gorges  of  these  works  against 
surprise;  this  may  be  done  by  disposing  across  the  gorge  a  single  or 
double  row  of  palisades,  or  a  stockade-work,  in  the  form  of  a  front 
fortification  or  of  a  tenaille :  there  should  be  a  banquette  to  it,  that 
the  defenders  may  have  a  command  over  the* assailants,  and  a  ditch 
to  prevent  the  enemy  from  getting  close,  and  cutting,  burning,  or 
blowing  down  the  obstacle.  Trous  de  loup,  abatis,  and  chevaux-de- 
frise  are  sometimes  disposed  across  the  gorge  for  the  same  purpose. 

A  REDOUBT  is  a  closed  work,  the  parapet  of  which  does  not  form 
re-entering  angles;  it  may  be  quadrilateral,  polygonal,  or  circular. 

Circular  redoubts,  although  they  have  no  undefended  sectors,  and 
enclose  a  greater  space  than  any  other  redoubt  with  an  equal  length 
of  parapet,  are  seldom  formed  on  account  of  the  difficulty  of  their 
construction,  and  also  because  their  ditches  are  incapable  of  any 
flanking  defence;  the  lines  of  flre  diverging  from  the  parapet,  any 
one  spot  on  the  ground  is  very  imperfectly  defended. 

A  four-sided  figure  is  the  best  and  most  usual  form  for  a  redoubt, 
because  it  is  of  simple  construction;  the  ditches  are  more  easily 
flanked,  and  there  are  not  so  many  points  of  attack  as  in  a  redoubt 
of  a  greater  number  of  angles.  Redoubts,  being  closed  works,  are 
better  calculated  to  stand  detached  than  redans  or  lunettes,  and  are, 
therefore,  constructed  when  a  small  work  is  required  without  any 
immediate  protection  from  the  gorge — the  armed  party  being  strong 


FIELD   FORTIFICATIONS.  13 

enough  to  complete  and  man  a  four-sided  redoubt,  eacli  side  of 
which  is  not  less  than  15  yards  long. 

The  size  depends  on  the  number  of  men  who  are  to  garrison  -it, 
and  upon  the  number  of  guns  which  it  is  to  contain;  also  upon  the 
length  of  time  during  which  it  is  to  be  occupied:  this  may  be  for  a 
few  hours  only,  (as  on  a  field  of  battle,)  or  for  a  period  of  weeks  or 
months. 

If  wanted  only  for  a  few  hours,  it  will  be  sufficient  to  allow  3  feet 
in  length  of  parapet  for  every  man  of  the  detachment;  or  for  every 
two  men,  if  they  are  to  be  formed  in  double  rank.  If  guns  are  to 
be  placed  in  the  work,  15  feet  of  parapet  must  be  given  to  each,  in 
order  that  the  gunners  may  have  sufficient  room  on  each  side  to 
work  it. 

But  when  the  redoubt  is  destined  to  contain  a  body  of  men  for  a 
constderable  length  of  time,  it  becomes  necessary  to  have  room  for 
them  to  lie  down  within  the  banquette  with  their  arms  and  packs; 
supposing  one-third  to  be  on  guard,  patrolling,  &c.,  two  square  yards, 
in  addition  to  the  slope  of  the  banquette,  are  sufficient  for  each 
man,  and  36  square  yards  for  each  gun  with  its  appointments. 

The  rule,  consequently,  for  a  square  redoubt  is:  to  multiply  the 
given  number  of  men  by  2,  and  number  of  guns  by  36,  for  the 
numbei'  of  square  yards  which  the  work  ought  to  contain  within  the 
foot  of  its  banquette,  the  square  root  of  the  product  will  be  the 
length  in  yards  of  the  side  of  the  square  forming  that  area;  adding 
to  this  result  the  breadth  of  two  interior  slopes,  and  of  2  banquettes 
with  their  slopes,  (about  7  yards  altogether,)  we  shall  have  the  side 
of  the  square  formed  by  the  crest  of  the  parapet. 

A  square  redoubt  ought  not  to  be  traced  with  less  extent  of  side 
than  15  yards;  for,  by  employing  the  calculation  explained  above, 
it  will  be  found  that  such  a  work  is  only  just  sufficient  to  contain 
the  men  necessary  for  its  defence :  on  the  other  hand,  it  is  unusual 
to  make  a  square  redoubt  with  a  longer  side  than  40  yards,  because 
it  would  require  a  garrison  more  suitable  to  u  work  of  a  stronger 
outline. 

The  imperfections  of  redoubts  are,  that  they  are  entirely  without 
a  flanking  fire  for  the  defence  of  the  ground  in  front  of  their  faces, 
also  that  their  ditches  and  the  sectoral  spaces  before  the  angles  are 
without  any  fire  whatever  for  their  defence. 

A  flanking  defence  for  the  ditches  may  be  obtained  by  placing 
palisade  or  stockade  caponnieres  in  them,  either  at  the  angles  or  in 
the  middle  of  the  faces;  by  tambours  in  a  like  position,  or  by  loop- 
holed  galleries  under  the  counterscarp  at  the  salients  of  the  work. 


14  FIELD   FORTIFICATIONS. 

The  want  of  a  fire  in  the  directions  of  the  capitals  may  be  reme- 
died, as  in  the  redan,  by  cutting  off  an  angle  by  a  short  face,  by 
making  it  curved,  or  by  tracing  a  portion  of  the  line  of  parapet  en 
cremailUre;  viz, :  by  disposing  it  in  a  succession  of  salient  and  re- 
entering angles,  the  sides  of  which  are  alternately  parallel  to  the 
capital :  this  construction  is,  however,  very  difficult,  and  causes  in- 
convenient variations  in  the  thickness  and  height  of  the  parapet. 

A  ditch  caponniere  is  an  oblong  structure  formed  with  palisades, 
or  with  stockade  work,  loop-holed,  and  roofed  over  with  planks  and 
earth  to  secure^ the  men  from  the  effects  of  shell,  and  a  plunging 
fire  from  the  counterscarp.  It  ought,  if  possible,  to  be  flanked  with 
musketry,  to  prevent  an  enemy  from  closing  on  it,  and  getting  un- 
der cover. 

The  best  position  for  a  caponniere  in  the  ditch  of  a  redoubt  is  at 
the  salient  angle,  as  then  one  caponniere  flanks  two  branches  of  the 
ditch.  It  should  be  separated  from  the  counterscarp  by  an  enlarge- 
ment of  the  ditch,  to  prevent  an  enemy  from  using  it  as  a  bridge  to 
cross  the  ditch,  and  it  ought  to  have  a  wicket  to  allow  of  sallies  into 
the  ditch. 

The  bottom  or  sole  of  the  caponniere  may,  sometimes  with  advan- 
tage, be  sunk  3  or  4  feet  below  the  bottom  of  the  ditch,  in  order 
that  the  fire  from  the  loopholes  may  graze  along  it,  and  prevent  an 
enemy  from  closing  on  them;  by  this  construction;  and  by  making 
the  roof  convex,  it  becomes  more  difficult  for  him  to  use  the  capon- 
niere as  a  bridge  to  pass  the  ditch. 

To  lessen  the  destructive  eff'ect  of  shell,  traverses  should  be  placed 
in  all  closed  works  when  those  missiles  are  likely  to  be  employed 
against  them. 

From  the  interior  to  the  exterior  of  closed  works  there  must  be  a 
passage  through  the  parapet,  protected  by  a  traverse  or  by  stockade 
work,  and  the  traverse  should  extend  far  enough  on  each  side  of 
the  passage  to  intercept  shot  which  might  enter  it  obliquely.  The 
ditch  is  crossed  by  a  bridge  which  is  conveniently  formed  of  loose 
planks  and  beams,  because,  in  case  of  attack,  they  can  be  quickly 
taken  up  and  used  to  barricade  the  passage.  When  the  ditch  is 
more  than  twelve  feet  wide,  a  trestle  must  be  placed  in  the  middle 
to  support  the  beams  or  sleepers. 

When  rough  timber  only  can  be  procured,  stout  straight  limbs  of 
trees  must  be. selected  for  the  sleepers,  which  may  be  covered  with 
strong  hurdles,  (or  brushwood,)  over  which  a  layer  of  sods  and  then 
a  small  quantity  of  gravel  may  be  laid. 

A  STAR  FORT  is  a  closed  work,  the  parapet  of  which  forms  seve- 


FIELD   FORTIFICATIONS.  15 

ral  acute  salient  angles  and  obtuse  re-entering  angles,  giving  it  a 
form  like  the  usual  representation  of  a  star. 

It  has  been  seen  that  redoubts  are  defended  only  by  direct  fire, 
and  that  without  some  contrivance  for  affording  flanking  fire,  the 
sectors  at  the  salients,  as  well  as  the  ditches,  are  absolutely  unde- 
fended. Star  forts,  consisting  of  re-entering  as  well  as  salient  an- 
gles, are  intended  to  obviate  that  defect  in  some  degree.  They  may 
be  constructed  either  upon  an  exterior  or  interior  polygon.  [f 
ground  is  to  be  fortified  which  does  not  admit  the  possibility  of  work- 
ing outwards,  as  an  island  for  instance,  a  polygon  is  traced  to  suit 
the  form  of  the  ground;  the  sides  of  the  polygon  are  bisected  by 
perpendiculars  drawn  inwards,  and  the  fac3s  of  the  star  fort  are 
drawn  from  the  angles  of  the  polygon  to  the  inner  extremities  of 
the  perpendiculars:  this  is  called  fortifying  upon  the  exterior  poly- 
gon. 

The  length  of  the  perpendicular*  in  a  square,  pentagon,  hexa- 
gon, and  octagon,  should  be  respectively  one-eighth,  one-fifth, 
one-fourth,  and  one-third  of  the  side,  in  order  that  the  flank- 
ing angles  may  approach  as  near  as  possible  to  right  angles,  without 
making  the  salient  angles  less  than  60°.  "When  the  polygon  is  ir- 
regular, the  length  of  the  perpendiculars  must  be  determined  by 
the  an<z:les  nearest  to  them. 

Again,  it  may  be  required  to  surround  a  building  witl\,a  star  fort 
in  such  a  position  that  the  work  could  not  be  traced  inwards  •  then, 
a  polygon  surrounding  the  building  must  be  laid  down,  and  on  each 
of  its'  sides  an  equilateral  triangle  must  be  formed  towards  the  ex- 
terior. 

If  this  construction  be  applied  to  a  dodecagon,  it  will  be  found 
that  the  re-entering  angles  are  exactly  right  angles;  in  an  octa- 
eonal  fort  the  re-enterino;  or  flankinq;  an";les  are  each  equal  to. 
105°.  _ 

The  necessity  for  employing  a  polygon  superior  to  an  octagon  will 
rarely  occur ;  yet  with  irregular  figures  it  may  happen  that  some  of 
the  angles,  are  equal,  or  nearly  so,  to  those  of  regular  polygons  of 
more  than  twelve  sides. 

It  is  necessary  to  fix  some  limit  as  a  minimum  to  the  length  of 
face  for  these  works;  this  depends   on  the  distance  at  which  a  shot 
fired  from  the   parapet  of  a  face  would    reach   the  level   of  the  • 
ground;  for  it  is  evident  that  if  the  face  be  made  less  than  that  dis- 

*  The  lengths  given  are  merely  approximations  in  the  form  of  the  near- 
est simple  fraction  of  the  side. 


16  FIELD    FORTIFICATIONS. 

tance,  the  enemy,  arrived  at  the  rounding  of  the  counterscarp,  will 
be  more  or  less  secure  from  the  fire  of  the  adjoining  face.  If  we 
suppose  a  man  to  fire  along  the  superior  slope  of  a  parapet  with  a 
plongee  of  one-sixth,  and  that  the  work  has  a  command  of  seven 
and  a  half  feet,  we  have  by  similar  triangles, 

1  :  6  :  :  7i  (the  command)  :  45; 

the  distance,  in  feet,  at  which  the  shot  would  reach  the  level  of  the 
ground. 

The  face  should,  therefore,  not  be  less  than  45  feet,  viz.,  15 
yards.  If  the  bottom  of  the  ditch  on  any  face  is  to  be  defended 
by  the  fire  of  the  next  face,  a  still  greater  length  is  required:  to 
find  this,  we  have  the  proportion  1:6::  the  relief  (the  height  of 
the  crest  of  the  parapet  above  the  bottom  of  the  ditch)  :  the  dis- 
tance at  which  a  shot  would  reach  the  bottom  of  the  ditch;  this 
distance  is  30  yards  when  the  command  of  the  work  and  depth  of 
its  ditch  are  both  seven  and  a  half  feet.  The  length  of  the  faces 
depends  also  upon  the  number  of  guns  to  be  placed  behind  the 
parapet,  and  upon  the  strength  of  the  garrison;  but  35  yards  may 
be  considered  as  the  greatest  length  of  face,  for  the  troops  required 
to  defend  a  star  fort  having  a  longer  face  would  be  sufficient  to  con- 
struct and  defend  a  fort  of  a  better  tracing. 

The  construction  of  star  forts  is  attended  with  some  trouble,  par- 
ticularly if  the  ground  is  uneven :  such  works  present  at  their  acute 
salient  angels  numerous  points  of  attack:  the  faces  and  sahents  are 
without  flanking  defence  when  the  polygon  is  inferior  to  an  octagon, 
and  even  in  this  case  such  defence  is  imperfect;  the  ditches  are  un- 
defended, unless  the  faces  are  made  unreasonably  long;  the  line  of 
parapet  to  be  manned  is  very  great,  when  compared  with  the  inte- 
rior space,  and  is  exposed  to  be  enfiladed  in  all  directions. 

CONSTRUCTIONS. 

The  following  are  convenient  methods  of  tracing  on  the  ground 
the  most  useful  polygonal  redoubts  and  star  forts: 

For  a  pentagonal  redouht :  on  a  base  equal  to  one  fifth  of  the 
perimeter,  or  length  of  the  parapet,  form  an  isosceles  triangle,  of 
which  each  of  the  equal  sides  is  one-third  of  the  perimeter,  and  on 
each  side  of  this  triangle  as  a  base  form  another  isosceles  triangle 
with  its  (equal)  side,  each  equal  to  the  side  of  the  pentagon,  or  first 
base. 


FIELD   FORTIFICATIONS*  17 

For  a  hexagonal  redoubt :  trace  an  equilateral  triangle,  the  side 
of  which  is  in  length  three  times  that  of  the  redoubt;  trisect  each 
side,  and  join  the  nearest  outer  extremities  of  the  centre  portions : 
these  lines,  with  those  which  join  their  extremities,  will  constitute 
the  hexagonal  redoubt  required. 

For  a  hexagonal  star  fort:  trace  an  equilateral -triangle  on  a 
base  equal  to  one-fourth  of  the  whole  length  of  the  parapet;  trisect 
each  side,  and  form  equilateral  triangles  on  the  three  centre  por- 
tions.    These  will  complete  the  figure. 

For  an  octagonal  redoubt:  trace  a  square  on  aside  equal  to 
three-tenths  of  the  whole  length  of  parapet  of  the  redoubt ;  and 
from  the  angles  of  the  square  measure  on  each  side  half  the  diago- 
nal; the  points  being  joined,  the  magistral  line  is  traced. 
.  For  an  octagonal  star  fort:  trace  a  square  on  a  base  equal  to 
three-twentieths  of  the  whole  length  of  the  parapet  of  the  star  fort; 
with  this  square  form  an  octagon  as  before,  and  on  each  of  its  sides 
trace  an  equilateral  triangle. 

Forts  with  bastions  are  the  most  perfect  of  closed  field  works, 
as  it  is  evident  that  they  possess  all  the  advantages  of  mutual  de- 
fence afforded  by  the  corresponding  works  in  permanent  fortifica- 
tions; they  are  traced  similarly  to  these  last,  although  rarely  on  a 
polygon  superior  to  a  pentagon;  as,  however,  their  defence  mainly 
depends  on  the  fire  of  common  muskets,  their  lines  of  defence  must 
not  exceed  the  efi'ective  range  of  such  arms,  or  about  160  yards, 
and  therefore  the  side  of  the  polygon  on  which  they  are  constructed 
must  not  exceed  200  yards  in  length. 

On  the  other  hand,  the  side  of  the  polygon  should  not  be  less 
than  120  yards  in  length;  since,  if  it  were  so,  the  bastions  would 
be  too  small,  and  the  flanks  and  curtain  too  short  for  the  defence  re- 
quired from  them. 

Bastioned  forts  should  have  within  them  a  good  reduit,  in  order 
to  give  confidence  to  the  garrison,  and  secure  its  retreat:  such  a  re- 
duit should  have  a  command  of  four  or  five  feet  over  every  part  of 
the  main  work,  in  order  that  the  enemy,  having  gained  the  parapet 
of  the  latter,  may  not  fire  from  thence  into  the  reduit. 

The  reduit  may  either  conform  to  the  outline  of  the  fort,  or  it 
may  be  a  simple  redoubt,  a  blockhouse,  or  a  tower  of  brick  or  stone, 
so  traced  that  the  defenders  may  fire  into  the  bastions  of  the  fort, 
these  being  the  points  at  which  an  enerfty  is  most  likely  to  force  an 
entrance. 

As  "bastioned  forts  require  a  strong  garrison,  they  are  constructed 
when  it  is  intended   to  occupy  a  point  of  importance  for  a  conside- 


18  FIELD    FORTIFICATIONS. 

rable  time,  and,  tlierefore,  the  reduit  often  forms^  at  the  same  time, 
the  barrack  of  the  o;arrison. 

In  order  to  throw  an  additional  fire  towards  the  direction  of  the 
sahents,  the  curtain  is  sometimes  broken  in  the  prolongation  of  the 
lines  of  defence;  but  in  order  that  some  fire  may  be  directed  imme- 
diately in  front,  a  portion  may  be  formed  in  a  line  parallel  to  the 
original  curtain,  and  equal  to  about  one-third  of  its  length-  the 
two  brisures  should  form  with  each  other  a  re-entering  rather  than 
a  salient  angle,  in  order  that  tliere  may  be  no  dead  spaces  in  the 
ditch. 

The  counterscarp  of  the  ditch  may  be  di\awn  either  to  the  shoulder 
angles  of  the  bastions,  as  in  permanent  fortification,  or  parallel  to 
the  faces,  flanks, and  curtain;  the  latter  method  is  generally  prefer- 
able, as  it  saves  time  and  labor;  in  this  case,  however,  the  counter- 
scarp of  one  flank  would  conceal  the  ditch  of  the  nearest  face  from 
the  fire  of  the  opposite  flank;  this  counterscarp  ought,  therefore,  in 
part,  to  be  cut  away  in  an  inclined  plane,  or  ramp,  parallel  to,  or 
coincidina;  with,  the  line  of  fire  from  that  flank. 

CD  ^  • 

Demi-bastioned  forts,  like  those  with  bastionss,  are  traced  by 
letting  fall  a  perpendicular  from  the  middle  of  each  exterior  side, 
and  drawing  lines  of  defence;  but  each  front  has  only  one  flank, 
every  alternate  face  extending  from  the  angle  of  Ihe  polygon  to 
the  inner  extremity  of  that  flank,  and  coinciding  with  the  line  of 
defence  throughout  its  entire  length;  such  works  have  the  defect  of 
aff'ording  a  regular  flanking  defence  only  to  every  alternate  face;  as 
the  short  face  of  each  front  receives  a  very  oblique  and  imperfect 
flanking  defence  from  the  collateral  long  face. 

Loopholes  are  narrow  rectangular  openings  made  in  walls  of 
masonry  or  wood,  through  which  to  direct  a  fire  of  musketry.  In 
walls  of  two  feet  or  two  and  a  half  feet  thiok  they  are  about  nine 
inches  high  by  fifteen  inches  wide  on  the  inside,  and  twenty  inches 
high  by  four  inches  wide  on  the  outside.  In  timber  six  or  eight 
inches  thick  they  are  eight  inches  wide  inside  and  three  inches  out- 
side, the  height  being  twelve  inches. 

They  are'  made  wider  on  the  inside  than  on  the  outside,  because, 
thus  formed,  they  afford  better  cover  for  the  men  behind  them; 
they  are  placed  at  not  less  than  three  feet  asunder,  that  the  wall 
may  not  be  too  much  weake'ned,  and  that  the  men  firing  through 
them  may  not  be  crowded;  they  are  made  from  four  feet  t9  four 
and  a  quarter  feet  above  the.  banquette  or  ground  on  which  the  men 
stand  to  fire  through  them. 


y* 


FIELD    FORTIFICATIONS.  19 

Stockade  'w6Rk  is  a  wall  composed  of  trunks  of  trees,  or 
rout;h  pieces  of  timber  placed  upright  in  the  ground;  they  are 
made  to  touch  each  other,  and  loopholes  are  cut  through  them;  if 
composed  of  tre«s,  they  ought  to  be  squared,  that  the  parts  in  con- 
tact may  be  of  the  same  thickness  as  the  rest  of  the  "wall. 

A  TAMBOUR  is  an  enclosure  of  palisadts  or  stockade  work,  some- 
times with  a  ditch  and  banquette,  and  of  any  form  that  may  be  ne- 
cessary to  afford  the  defence  required. 

Blockhouses  are  covered  field  worl  s,  generally  rectangular; 
the  walls  are  formed  of  trunks  of  trees,  a:id  above  the  timbers  of 
the  roof  there  is,  usually,  a  bed  of  earth,  Aree  or  four  feet  thick. 

In  mountainous  and  well-wooded  coui  tries  blockhouses  are  the 
best  description  of 'field  works,  because  ihe  enemy  cannot  easily 
bring  cannon  to  destroy  them.  It  is  verj  difiicult  in  mountainous 
countries  to  find  ground  where  works  ma}  be  constructed  free  from 
the  defect  of  being  commanded,  and  cons  iquently  open  works  are 
there  comparatively  useless. 

Blockhouses  are  of  great  advantage  as  .  eduits  in  situations  where 
it  is  difficult  to  defilade  the  interiors  of  works  from  commanding 
heights,  more  especially  since  they  may  serve  as  barracks  for  the 
troops;  in  such  a  case  the  b'edsteads,  arr  mged  on  each  side,  are 
used  as  banquettes,  and  the  loopholes  a  -e  made  four  feet  above 
them. 

A  blockhouse  to  resist  musketry  shou  d  be  composed  of  trees, 
squared  so  that  the  parts  in  contact  may  1  e  at  least  six  inches  thick, 
that  being  the  depth  to  which  a  musket  ball  will  penetrate  in  fir. 
In  order  to  resist  artillery,  two  rows  of  ti  ees  (or  -of  stockades)  are 
placed  vertically  in  the  ground,  with  an  interval  between  them  from 
three  to  six  feet  wide,  which  is  filled  with  earth  well  rammed.  The 
trees  or  logs  should  be  eleven  or  twelve  feet  long,  so  that  they  may 
be  planted  at  least  three  feet  in  the  ground,  and  allow  the  interior 
of  the  blockhouse  to  be  eight  or  nine  fSot  high;  it  should  also  be 
from  eighteen  to  twenty-four  feet  wide  in  the  interior. 

The  earth  used  to  render  the  covering  ^ hell-proof  may  be  shaped 
like  a  small  parapet,  and  from  this  an  additional  fire(of  musketr3'^)may 
be  obtained;  the  access  to  this  upper  parapet  is  through  a  trap-door 
in  the  roof  To  prevent  the  blockhouse  from  being  set  on  fire,  a 
ditch  should  be  dug  round  it,  leaving  a  berme  of  eight  or  ten  feet, 
and  on  this  the  earth  is  piled  up  against  the  wood  as  high  as  the 
loopholes. 

Sometimes  blockhouses  are  constructed  in  the  form  of  a  cross, 
when  the  flanking  fire  thus  obtained   on  their  faces  renders  them 


20  FIELD    FORTIFICATIONS. 

much  more  powerful;  they  are  also,  occasionally,  built  with  an  up- 
per story,  the  angles  of  which  should  project  over  the  sides  of  the 
lower  story;  the  foot  of  the  lower  walls  may  thus  be  defended  by 
the  fire  from  above. 

An  ordinary  dwelling-house,  with  thick  masonry  walls,  may  be 
formed  into  a  blockhouse  by  pulling  down  the  upper  stories,  and 
heaping  a  mass  of  materials,  three  or  four  feet  in  thickness,  over 
the  ceiling  of  the  lower  rooms;  earth  or  rubbish  should  also  be 
placed  about  the  house  as  high  as  the  loopholes. 


DEFILADING   OF   FIELD    WORKS. 


To  DEFILADE  a  work  from  a  height  is  so  to  regulate  the  direction 
and  elevation  of  the  parapets  or  covering  masses,  that  its  interior 
may  be  screened  from  the  view  of  an  enemy  on  the  heights. 

A  PLANE  OF  SIGHT  is  an  imaginary  plane  supposed  to  pass 
through  the  summit  of  the  height  from  which  the  work  is  to  be  de- 
filaded, and  the  terreplein  of  the  work. 

A  PLANE  OF  DEFILADE  is  a  plane  supposed  to  pass  through  the 
crest  of  the  parapet  of  the  work  parallel  to  the  plane  of  sight. 

In  many  situations  it  is  practicable  (and  then  it  is  the  easier 
method)  to  defilade  the  i.ices  or  longest  branches  of  a  work  by 
the  tracing;  viz.,  by  directing  them  on  marshes,  rivers,  lakes,  pre- 
cipices, hollows,  &c.,  where  batteries  cannot  be  erected,  or  at  worst, 
on  points  of  the  height  not  nearer  than  8U0*  yards  to  the  work. 
Also  the  choice  of  the  outline  of  the  work  should  be  attended  to ; 
for  among  the  dilFcrent  tracings  by  which  the  same  object  may  be 
attained,  some  will  be  more  easy  to  defilade  than  others. 

When  a  work  is  thrown  up  in  front  of  a  height,  it  is  the  more 
difl&cult  to  defilade  in  proportion  to  its  depth;  it  should,  therefore, 
have  an  oblong  form,  and  its  longest  faces  should  be  traced  parallel 
to  the  hieght.  If,  for  instance,  the  work  were  a  rectangular  redoubt, 
the  long  faces  should  be  traced  parallel  to  the  height,  and  the  short 
ones  be  directed  on  it. 

An  open  work  will  be  defiladed  when  the  plane  of  defilement 
passes  through  a  line  8  feet  above  the  ground  at  its  gorge,  and  at  a 

*  ArtJUeiy  on  a  heigl)t,  even  of  120  feet,  at  800  yards  distance  from  a 
work,  has  no  more  advantage,  in  respect  of  a  plunging  fire,  than  if  it  were 
on  a  level  witlr  the  rock  ;  for  in  both  cases  it  mi\st  be  elevated  about  1^ 
degree  to  attain  this  range. 


FIELD   FORTIFICATIONS.  '  21 

point  4  or   8*  feet  above  the  commanding  hill,  according  as  the 
work  is  to  be  defiladed  against  artillery  or  musketry. 

It  is  usual  to  defilade  a  work  against  musketry  if  there  are 
heights  within  300  yards  of  it,  and  against  artillery,  when  the 
heights  are  not  farther  distant  than  800  yards. 

When  the  commanding  ground  is  not  occupied  by  the  enemy, 
the  work  may  be  defiladed  in  the  following  manner :  stretch  a  rope 
between  two  poles  planted  in  the  line  of  the  gorge  at  8  feet  above 
the  ground ;  direct  visual  rays  from  various  points  of  this  rope  to 
the  top  of  a  pole  placed  on  the  commanding  hill,  and  4  feet  high  if 
the  work  is  to  be  defiladed  against  artillery,  but  8  feet  if  it  is  to  be 
defiladed  against  musketry;  the  intersection  of  the  rays  with  poles 
planted  on  the  tracing  of  the  intended  parapet,  will  indicate  the 
height  to  which  the  parapet  must  be  raised  in  order  that  its  defend- 
ers may  be  situated  under  the  plane  of  defilade;  and  since  these 
visual  rays  represent  lines  of  fire  from  the  enemy's  position  on  the 
hill,  it  will  be  evident  that  a  parapet  whose  height  is  thus  deter- 
mined will  defilade  the  interior  of  the  work. 

When  it  is  impossible  to  place  the  pole  on  the  commanding 
ground,  the  following  method  must  be  adopted  :  along  the  gorge  of 
the  intended  work  stretch  a  rope,  which  is  to  be  4  feet  above  the 
ground  if  the  work  is  to  be  defiladed  against  artillery,  and  1^  feet 
if  against  musketry;  in  rear  of  this  rope  at  any  convenient  distance 
(about  5  yards)  drive  two  pickets  into  the  ground,  and  upon  them 
raise  or  lower  a  cord  or  a  straight  edge  of  wood,  until  it  is  in  the 
same  plane  with  the  rope  at  the  gorge,  and  the  top  of  the  height 
from  which  the  work  is  to  be  defiladed;  then  look  from  the  rear 
cord  or  straight  edge  along  that  at  the  gorge,  and  observe  where 
the  line  of  sight  from  thence  cuts  the  poles  raised  on  the  tracing  of 
the  intended  parapet;  these  points  of  section  (indicating  the  position 
of  the  plane  of  sight)  may  be  marked  by  one  of  the  party ;  lastly, 
make  the  crest  of  the  parapet  4  feet  higher  than  the  points  thus 
found  if  the  work  is  to  be  defiladed  against  cannon,  but  6j  feet 
higher  if  against  musketry. 

If  it  is  found  that,  by  this  process,  the  parapet  must  have  more 
than  12  feet  command  in  order  to  defilade  the  work;  the  parapet 
must  be  raised  to  any  convenient  height,  ^suppose  10  or  12  feet,) 
and  then,  in  order  to  defilade   the  part  which  is  not  protected  by 

*A  field-gun  stands  about  3^  feet  above  tlie  gioinid,  and  a  man  on 
horseback  can  fire  about  7^  feet  above  the  ground  ;  therefore  4  and  S  are 
taken  as  the  nearest  whole  numbers  to  these  commands  respectively. 


22  FIELD    FORTIFICATIONS. 

the  parapet,  a  traverse  must  be  erected,  or  the  terreplein  of  the  un- 
protected part  must  be  lowered,  or  both  of  these  steps  must  be  taken 
conjointly. 

In  defilading  a  tete  de  pont,  the  plane  of  defilade  should  pass 
8  feet  above  that  part  of  the  bridge  which  is  most  remote  from  the 
height. 

To  defilade  a  closed  work,  (or  one  with  a  parapet  both  on  the  side 
nearest  to  and  on  the  f^ide  furthest  from  the  height,)  unless  the 
crests  on  both  sides  are  in  a  plane  passing  8  feet  above  the  ground 
which  the  enemy  may  occupy,  in  front  and  in  rear,  a  parados  to 
cover  the  defenders  on  the  banquette  of  the  side  nearest  to  the 
height  from  reverse  fire,  is  indispensable;  for  it  is  clear  that  thq 
higher  the  parapet  nearest  to  a  commanding  ground  is  raised  in  or- 
der to  defilade  a  portion  of  the  whole  of  the  interior  of  tl»e  work, 
the  more  will  the  defenders  standing  on  the  banquette  of  that  para- 
pet be  elevated  above  t.\e  plane  of  defilement  of  the  parapet  fur- 
thest from  the  height,  (or  the  lower  one;)  they  will,  consequently, 
become  exposed  to  a  reverse  fire  directed  over  the  lower  parapet. 

In  this  case,  therefore,  make  the  parapet  nearest  to  the  command- 
ing ground  as  high  as  convenient,  and  so  as  to  defilade  a  portion  (sup- 
pose one-half)  of  the  interior  :  at  the  extremity  of  this  defiladed  por- 
tion, and  (about)  paraliel  to  the  parapet,  raise  a  parados  high 
enough  to  intercept  visua  rays  directed  from  points  8  feet  above  the 
banquette  of  the  lower  p;  rapet  t(^4  or  8  feet  above  the  height,  and 
from  points  8  feet  above  the  banquette  of  the  higher  parapet  to 
points  8  feet  above  the  gi  ound  in  front  of  the  former  parapet. 

If  the  site  of  the  inte  ided  redoubt  be  commanded  on  opposite 
sides,  the  work  will  be  defiladed  in  the  manner  just  described,  ex- 
cepting that,  in  this  case,  both  the  parapets  being  commanded,  each 
must  be  raised  high  eno  igh  to  cover  the  portion  of  the  work  be- 
tween it  and  the  traverse  or  parados  from  the  opposite  height. 

Or  the  work  may  be  defiladed  thus:  the  magistral  line  having 
been  traced,  let  the  engineer  place  himself  at  any  convenient  part 
of  the  interior  with  his  eye  8  feet  from  the  ground,  and  let  a  man 
hold  up  a  measuring  rod  on  the  tracing  line  between  the  engineer 
and  each  hill ;  then  a  visual  ray,  from  a  point  estimated  to  be  8  feet 
above  each  hill,  will  intersect  the  measuring  rods  in  points  through 
which  the  crests  of  the  parapets  should  pass.  The  place  of  the  en- 
gineer is  the  place  of  the  traverse  or  parados,  the  height  of  which 
is  determined,  as  before,  by  visual  rays  crossing  each  other  from 
points  4  or  8  feet  above,  the  opposite  heights  to  points  8  feet  above 
the  banquettes  uiost  distant  from  the  heights. 


FIELD   FORTIFICATIONS.  23 

With  the  aid  of  a  plane  table,  the  plane  of  sight  may  be  readily 
determined  thus:  let  the  upper  surface  of  the  table  (which  should 
be  near  the  surface  of  the  ground  in  rear  of  the  work)  be  placed  in 
a  plane  touching  the  points  of  command  :  the  intersections  of  that 
surface  prolonged,  with  the  poles  planted  at  the  angles  of  the  work, 
will  determine  as  many  points  in  the  plane  of  site. 

PROFILING. 

The  proper  height  of  parapet  for  the  work  having  been  deter- 
mined, (by  the  process  of  defilading,  if  necessary,)  the  next  step  is 
to  plant  pickets  on  the  faces,  flanks,  and  angles  as  guides  to  the 
workmen  in  giving  it  the  suitable  dimensions  and  form.  Thus,  to 
the  magistral  line  of  each  face  and  flank,  trace  on  the  ground  per- 
pendicularly at  intervals,  and  on  these  measure,  horizontally,  the 
bases  of  the  slopes  composing  the  profile  to  be  employed.  At  the 
points  thus  set  out*  fix  poles  or  laths  perpendicularly  in  the  ground, 
and  saw  ofi"  their  tops  at  the  height  which  the  parapet  is  to  have  at 
that  particular  part;  nail  laths  to  the  tops  ot  these  poles  from  one  to 
the  other  across  the  direction  of  the  intended  parapet;  and  thus 
there  will  be  obtained  an  outline  of  the  slopes,  or  a  profile  of  the 
parapet. 

For  the  profile  at  an  angle,  lay  a  rope  on  the  ground  bisecting 
that  angle,  and  produce  it  outwards  3  drive  pickets  along  this  rope 
at  the  points  where  it  is  intersected  by  the  prolongations  of  lines 
joining  the  bases  of  the  profiles  already  set  up  perpendicularly  to 
the  adjoining  faces ;  these  pickets  mark  1  he  bases  of  the  profiles  at 
the  salient ;  the  laths  may  then  be  set  up  is  before. 

When  the  salient  angle  is  60°,  the  bieadth  of  the  base  of  any 
slope  measured  on  the  capital  will  be  equal  to  twice  the  breadth  of 
the  same  slope  taken  on  a  line  at  right  angles  to  the  face. 

DISTRIBUTION  OF   THE  WORKING  PARTY. 

Divide  the  men  into  6  equal  parts,  3  of  which  are  to  be  provided 
with  pickaxes  and  shovels,  2  are  to  have  shovels  only,  and  the  re- 
mainder are  to  be  furnished  with  rammen^  only. 

The  party  is  then   to   be  marched  to  the  ground,  and  the  men, 

*Tlio  best  method  of  fixing  the  perpendic  dar  laths  is  to  drive  strong 
pickets  into  the  ground  at  the  requited  poi  its,  and  to  nail  to  them  the 
laths,  previously  cut  of  the  proper  length. 


24  FIELD   FORTIFICATIONS. 

having  bpth  pickaxes  and  shovels,  (viz.  the  diggers,)  are  to  be  sta- 
tioned 6  *  feet  apart  on  the  ground  where  the  ditch  is  to  be  dug 
along  the  berme  line,  and  facing  the  work. 

The  excavation  of  the  ditch  is  now  begun,  the  men  first  loosening 
the  earth  with  their  pickaxes,  and  then  shovelling  it  to  the  place 
where  the  parapet  is  to  stand  ;  here  the  rest  of  the  party  are  posted, 
and  as  the  earth  is  thrown  up  to  them,  the  men  with  shovels  spread 
it  in  layers,  while  the  remainder  with  their  rammers,  beat  it  down 
to  a  firm  mass  ;  and  as  the  parapet  is  raised  they  give  it  the  form 
indicated  by  the  profiles. 

The  profiles  may  be  made  of  3  inch  plank,  ripped  up  into  laths 
three-quarters  of  an  inch  thick. 

The  work  may  be  drained,  if  requisite,  with  fascines  of  stout 
rods,  or  with  loose  stones  having  brushwood  or  heather  laid  over 
them  ;  these  are  placed  in  trenches  dug  across  the  ground  on  which 
the  parapet  is  to  be  raised. 

In  excavating  ditches  and  trenches,  the  slopes  are  made  after  the 
ditch  or  trench  is  finished,  the  sides  being  at  first  left  in  steps ;  the 
crest  of  the  slope  is  marked  out,  and  then  small  sections  are  cut, 
here  and  there,  according  to  the  proper  form  of  the  finished  profile : 
finally,  the  intermediate  earth  is  cut  away  between  these  small  sec- 
tions; the  latter  answering  the  purpose  of  ensuring  regularity  in  the 
excavation  of  the  ditch,  as  the  lath  profiles  ensure  it  in  the  erection 
of  the  parapet. 

When  near  the  surface,  in  soil  requiring  but  little  the  use  of  the 
pickaxe,  an  excavation  of  6  cubic  yards  in  a  day  of  8  hours  would 
be  a  fair  task  for  a  soldier,  who,  in  general,  is  little  accustomed  to 
the  use  of  the  pickaxe  and  shovel. 

In  calculating  the  time  required  to  throw  up  a  field  work,  the 
following  data  may  be  assumed ;  in  light,  dry  sandy  soil,  that  can 
be  easily  dug  without  the  aid  of  a  pickaxe,  a  man  can,  in  a  day  of 
8  hours,  load  from  19  to  20  cubic  yards  of  earth  on  barrows.  If  a 
pickaxe  be  required,  two  men  can  do  the  same  quantity  of  work. 

If  the  whole  mass  must  be  first  moved  with  the  pickaxe,  three  or 
four  men  should  be  allowed. 

A  man  can  wheel  20  cubic  yards  of  earth  per  day  to  a  distance  of 
30  yards  on  level  ground,  or  20  yards  on  a  ramp. 

Twenty  cubic  yards  of  earth  will  fill  500  wheelbarrows. 

*  The  diggers  must  not  be  placed  nearer  to  each  other  than  4^  feet;  but 
if  the  party  is  strong,  another  row  of  diggers  may  be  employed  at  the 
counterscarp,  with  their  backs  to  the  work;  these  throw  the  earth  towards 
the  middle  of  the  space  marked  out  for  tlie  breadth  of  the  ditch. 


FIELD   FORTIFICATIONS.  _  25 

A  horse  can  do  as  much  work  as  7  men  :  he  can  carry  300  lbs.  20 
miles  per  da}^  or  200  lbs.  30  miles;  he  can  draw  1,600  lbs.  on  a 
plain,  and  from  1,200  to  1,300  lbs.  on  irregular  ground,  when  the 
roads  are  in  good  order. 

OBSTACLES. 

Palisades  are  triangular  prisms  of  wood  pointed  at  the  upper 
end,  and  placed  upright  in  the  ground  at  3  or  4  inches  asunder; 
they  are  about  10  feet  long,  with  faces  G  or  8  inches  wide,  and  are 
sunk  3  or  4  feet  in  the  ground.  A  trench  of  that  depth  is  dug, 
the  pali^^ades  are  placed  in  it,  and  the  earth  is  well  rammed  about 
them  ;  they  are  connected  at  top  (and  sometimes  at  bottom  also)  by 
a  ribbon  of  wood,  called  a  lintel,  4  inches  wide  by  2^  thick,  nailed 
to  the  inside  of  the  palisades  about  one  foot  from  the  points;  they 
ought  to  stand,  at  least,  7  feet  out  of  the  ground.  Rough  palisades 
may  be  formed,  quickly,  from  trees  by  cutting  them  into  lengths 
about  10  feet,  then  describing  triangles,  with  sides  of  not  less  than 
6  inches  in  length  on  the  ends,  and  sawing  them  lengthwise  through 
those  sides;  if  thetrees  are  12  or  14  inches  in  diameter,  six  equila- 
teral triangles  meeting  in  the  centre,  can  be  described  on  the  ends, 
and  six  palisades  made  of  one  piece :  if  the  tree  is  but  6  inches  in 
diameter,  then,  by  sawing  it  in  halves,  two  palisades  can  be  made 
of  one  piece. 

Palisades  are  only  used  in  the  ditches,  and  to  close  the  gorges  of 
field  works,  and  are  not,  as  in  permanent  works,  placed  on  the  ban- 
quettes; when  in  the  ditch,  their  best  position  is  at  the  foot  of  the 
counterscarp,  and  slightly  inclined  towards  it;  for,  thus  placed,  they 
are  more  secure  from  a  direct  fire  of  artillery,  and  they  detain  the 
enemy  at  the  counterscarp  under  the  deadly  aim  of  the  garrison; 
also  it  makes  it  difficult  for  the  assailants  to.  cut  them  down,  there 
being  no  room  between  them  and  the  counterscarp  to  stand  and 
wield  the  axe. 

Fraises  are  palisades  about  11  feet  long,  placed  in  a  horizontal  or 
in  an  inclined  position ;  they  ought  to  be  sunk  about  5  feet  in  the 
ground,  the  buried  ends  being  joined  by  a  ribbon  in  order  to  render 
it  difficult  to  pull  them  out;  the  pointed  ends  ought  to  be  not  less 
than  7  feet  from  the  bottom  of  the  ditch;  and  when  placed  on  the 
berme  they  ought  to  incline  downwards,  in  order  that  they  may  not 
interrupt  the  passage  of  shells  when  rolled  over  the  parapet.  Fraises 
are  most  advantageously  placed  2  or  3  feet  below  the  edge  of  the 
counterscarp,  as  they  are,  there,  more  secure  than  on  the  berme, 
2 


26  FIELD    FORTIFICATIONS. 

from  the  direct  fire  of  the  enemy,  whom  they  detain  under  a  close 
fire  from  the  work. 

Chevaux-de-frise  are  beams  of  wood  from  6  to  10  feet  long,  which 
are  cut  in  a  square  or  hexagonal  form,  and  have  pointed  stakes  or 
sword  blades  inserted  into  the  faces;  when  several  are  used,  in  one 
length,  they  are  chained  together  to  prevent  the  enemy  from  re- 
moving them;  and  they  are  made  of  the  lengths  just  mentioned  in 
order  that  they  may  be  portable. 

They  are  employed  as  temporary  barriers  to  impede  the  passage 
of  a  breach,  the  entrance  into  a  work,  to  block  up  a  street,  &c.; 
they  are  occasionally  placed  at  the  foot  of  the  counterscarp  of  the 
ditch,  and,  also,  on  the  berme;  in  the  latter  situation  they  must  be 
covered  from  the  view  and  fire  of  the  enemy  by  a  small  glacis. 

Abatis  are  large  boughs  or  entire  trees  laid  down  in  a  line,  with 
the  butt  ends  buried  3  or  4  feet  in  the  ground,  and  the  branches 
turned  towards  the  enemy:  to  form  an  efficient  obstacle,  the  branches 
ought  to  stand,  at  least,  as  high  as  a  man's  breast,  the  smaller  parts 
being  cut  ofi",  and  the  larger  pointed;  the  butts  should  be  secured 
in  the  ground  by  beams  or  trees  picketed  acrOvSS  them,  and  they 
should  be  covered  with  earth  well  rammed;  this  precaution  will 
make  it  difficult  to  drag  them  away.  They  ought,  moreover,  to  be 
covered  by  a  glacis,  that  they  may  not  bo  seen  and 'breached  or, 
destroyed  at  a  distance,  by  artillery. 

A  detachment  of  90  men  can  make  about  750  feet  of  abatis  in  a 

Some  of  the  trees  on  the  borders  of  a  wood  being  formed  into 
abatis,  may  deter  an  enemy  from  attempting  to  penetrate  into  the 
wood.  A  breastwork  may  be  made  of  trunks  of  trees  piled  one  on 
another  to  the  required  height  behind  the  abatis;  this  is  soon  done, 
and  it  much  increases  the  strength  of  the  obstacles. 

Trous  cle  lowp  are  holes  dug  in  the  ground  in  the  form  of  an  in- 
verted cone  or  pyramid,  and  are  made  about  6  feet  wide  and  6  deep  r 
a  pointed  stake  is  planted  at  the  bottom  to  prevent  an  enemy  from 
making  use  of  them  as  rifle  pits.  In  order  to  form  an  effective  ob- 
stacle, they  should  be  disposed  checker-wise  in  three  rows,  with  in- 
tervals of  about  10  feet  between  them ;  the  earth  from  them  should 
be  formed  into  a  glacis,  rather  than  heaped  up  between  them,  as  in 
the  latter  case  they  might  be  easily  filled  up. 

Trous  de  loup  of  even  two  or  three  feet  deep,  may  be  usefully 
employed  in  rendering  impassable  shallow  wet  ditches,  inundations, 
and  fords;  and,  as  well  as  abatis,  they  are  suitable  obstacles  to  the 
advance  of  an  enemy  on  the  salients  of  works,  on  the  weak  points  of 


FIELD   FORTIFICATIONS.  27 

lines,  or  through  their  intervals ;  they  may  thus  compel  the  enemy 
to  attack  the  stronger  parts. 

The  gorges  of  works  may  also  be  closed  by  abatis  and  trous  do 
loup,  when  there  are  no  means  of  planting  palisades  for  that  pur- 
pose. 

A  man  can  make  one  trou  de  loup  in  a  day. 

An  Entanghmcnt  is  formed  by  cutting  half  through  the  stems  of 
small  trees,  and  pulling  the  upper  parts  to  the  ground,  to  which  they 
are  then  picketed. 

Crows  feet  are  four  iron  spikes  joined  together  at  one  end  in 
such  a  manner,  that  when  thrown  on  the  ground  one  point  will  al- 
ways be  uppermost;  they  may  be  quickly  made  by  inserting  four 
spikenails  iiito  a  small  block  of  wood,  so  as  to  point  in  different  di- 
rections; they  are  chiefly  employed  to  obstruct  the  advance  of  cav- 
alry. 

Pointed  Stakes  are  frequently  fixed  in  the  ground,  at  any  place 
which  the  enemy  might  occupy  at  the  time  of  an  a^isault;  as  on  the 
bermes  of  works,  the  edges  of  trous  de  loup,  and  in  the  spaces  be- 
tween them.  They  must  be  firmly  planted  in  the  ground,  and  if 
they  are  pointed  before  insertion,  two  mallets  must  be  used,  one  of 
which  is  provided  with  a  conical  hole  to  receive  the  point  of  the 
stake,  while  the  blows  are  struck  with  the  other;  these  pickets  may 
be  conveniently  formed  of  the  small  branches  cut  from  the  trees  in- 
tended for  abatis. 

Common  Fougasses  are  small  mines  placed  in  shafts  or  pits  from 
'3  to  10  feet  deep. 

The  powder  is  lodged  on  one  side  of  the  shaft  at  the  bottom,  and 
is  fired  from  a  secure  spot  by  means  of  a  powder  hose,  or  fuse,  which 
is  brought  up  one  side  of  the  vshaft,  and  carried  in  a  trough  (or 
casing  tube)  parallel  to  the  surl'ace  of  the  ground;  the  trough 
should  be  5  or  6  feet  below  the  ground  if  there  is  any  danger  of 
shells  falling  on  it;  if  not,  2  feet  will  be  deep  enough. 

A  shell  foiiguss  is  formed  by  dividing  a  box  into  two  parts  by  a 
horizontal  partition;  the  shells  being  loaded,  are  placed  in  the  up- 
per part,  with  the  fuzes  pointing  down  through  holes  in  the  parti- 
tion in  order  that  they  may  be  ignited,  at  the  same  moment,  by  the 
priming;  the  latter  consists  of  a  few  pounds  of  powder  placed  in 
the  lower  compartment. 

Shell  fougasses  are  very  convenient  obstacles  to  impede  the  pas- 
sage of  a  ditch  and  the  ascent  of  a  breach,  as  they  can  be  prepared 
within  the  work,  and  speedily  buried  at  the  required  spot  just  be- 
fore their  action  is  required. 


28  HELD    FORTIFICATIONS. 

A  stone  fougass  or  rock  mortar  is  thus  formed.  Excavate  a  shaft 
at  an  inclination  of  about  45°  to  the  horizon,  and  about  6  feet  deep ; 
at  the' bottom  place  a  charge  of  55  lbs.  of  powder,  then  a  strong 
shield  of  wood  (at  least  6  inches  thick)  in  front  of  the  charge ;  and 
over  the  shield  throw  in  3  or  4  cubic  yards  of  pebbles  of  not  less 
than  half  a  pound  weight  each;  a  sufficient  bod}^  of  earth  must  be 
heaped  vertically  above  the  charge,  and  retained  over  the  upper 
part  of  the  shaft  (near  the  edge)  by  a  revetment  of  sods,  to  ensure 
its  effect  taking  place  in  the  direction  required. 

Twelve  men  can  make  a  stono  fougass  in  three  hours,  which, 
being  charged  as  before  described,  will,  when  exploded,  disperse  the 
materials  over  a  circle  of  30  or  40  yards  radius,  at  about  60  yards 
from  the  mouth  of  the  shaft. 

The  usual  and  most  effective  position  for  fougasses  is  beyond  the 
ditch  and  over  the  salients  Or  other  weak  points  of  the  work  ;  they 
must  be  removed  in  advance  of  the  ditch  so  far  as  not  to  injure  tho 
counterscarp  by  their  explosion. 

A  good  method  of  discharging  fougasses  at  the  moment  required, 
is  to  place  a  loaded  musket  with  the  muzzle  in  the  priming  and  a 
wire  attached  to  the  trigger;  the  wire  can  be  led  in  any  direction,  in 
the  same  manner  as  the  hose,  and  being  pulled  at  the  proper  mo- 
ment, the  explosion  will  take  place. 

INUNDATIONS. 

It  frequently  occurs  in  the  field  that  small  streams  or  rivulets  are 
met  with,  which  of  themselves  offer  no  impediment  to  the  advance 
of  the  enemy,  but  which,  by  judicious  management,  may  be  made 
effectually  to  check  his  attack  on  certain  points  where  the  water  may 
be  collected. 

An  inundation,  or  collection  of  water,  is  produced  by  forming 
across  a  stream  one  or  more  dams,  which  must  extend  to  a  certain 
distance  from  thence,  according  to  the  inclination  (or  slope)  of  the 
ground  contiguous  to  the  stream,  and  to  the  required  breadth  of  the 
inundation. 

A  dam  may  be  formed  in  the  following  manner  :  after  construct- 
ing an  embankment  of  earth  on  each  side  of  the  stream  perpendicu- 
larly to  its  length,  as  far  as  the  bank,  stones  and  gravel  should  be 
thrown  into  the  water  to  diminish  its  depth  ;  then  two  heaps  of  earth 
are  prepared,  one  on  each  bank,  and  as  many  workmen  being  set  on 
as  can  be  employed  without  impeding  each  other,  the  earth  from 
those  heaps  is  thrown  into  the  stream  over  the  stones  and  gravel  as 


FIELD    rORTIFICATIONS.  29 

rapidly  as  possible,  until  the   embankments   previously  formed  arc 
connected  together  across  the  stream. 

It  rarely  occurs  that  sufficient  means  are  to  be  found  in  the  field 
to  allow  of  a  dam  being  made  more  than  ten  feet  high  ;  and  suppos- 
ing this  height  to  be  given,  the  difference  of  level  between  any  two 
dams  should  be  five  feet,  in  order  that  the  shallowest  part  of  the 
inundation  may  be  five  feet  deep,  and  therefore,  not  fordablc. 

The  distance  at  which  the  dams  should  be  placed  from  one  another 
will  depend  upon  the  I'all  of  the  bed  of  the  stream,  and  must  be  de- 
termined by  levelling.  The  thickness  of  the  dam  at  top  may  be 
made  equal  to  the  depth  of  the  water  intended  to  be  retained,  but  if 
it  is  liable  to  be  battered  by  artillery,  it  sfiould  be  ten  leet  thick  at 
top.  The  exterior  slope  of  the  dam  may  be  left  at  the  natural  slope 
of  the  earth,  while  to  that  opposed  to  the  stream  a  base  of  not  less 
than  double  its  height  should  be  given. 

A  sluice  or  waste  weir  should  be  provided  at  the  height  to  which 
it  is  desired  the  water  should  rise ;  otherwise,  the  water  being  al- 
lowed to  flow  over  every  part,  the  dam  would  be  destroyed.  These 
openings,  or  waste  weirs,  must  be  revetted  with  fascines  or  timber, 
and  ought  to  be  completed  before  the  dam  is  carried  up  to  its  full 
height. 

Sometimes  the  inclination  of  the  ground  contiguous  to  the  stream 
prevents  the  inundation  from  attaining  a  depth  greater  than  two  or 
three  feet ;  it  may,  notwithstanding,  be  rendered  impassable,  by 
dig-ing  pits  and  ditches  in  difierent  parts  before  the  water  is  allowed 
to  cover  the  ground. 

The  end  of  the  dam  on  the  enemy's  side  must  be  protected  by 
field  works  to  prevent  him  from  destroying  it,  or  using  it  as  a 
bridge.  When  no  work  can  be  placed  immediately  to  cover  the 
head  of  the  dam,  the  approaches  to  it  should  be  defended ;  or  if  the 
opposite  bank  be  within  short  musket  range,  the  end  of  the  dam 
may  be  covered  by  abatis.  The  works  thrown  up  to  cover  the  head 
of  a  dam  are  traced  precisely  on  the  same,  principles  as  those  wlj^ich 
are  to  protect  a  bridge.  The  best  condition,  therefore,  when  a 
choice  is  possible,  is,  that  the  inundations  should  be  concave  to  the 
enemy. 

Small  islands  may  exist  in  the  midst  of  an  inundation,  and  on 
these  batteries  or  breastworks  for  musketry  may  be  advantageously 
formed,  either  to  protect  the  dams,  or  for  the  general  defence  of  the 
position. 


30  FIELD    FORTIFICATIONS. 


TETES  DE  PONT. 

Tete?  de  pont  are  works  thrown  up  to  cover  a  communication 
across  a  river,  to  hinder  the  destruction  of  the  bridge,  and  to  defend 
it  until  an  army  or  detachment  has-crossed  over  it. 

They  should  be  of  sufficient  streu^^th  to  be  defended  until  the 
whole  of  the  troops  have  oro.ssed  and  the  bridge  has  been  taken  up. 
The  works  employed  for  this  purpose  vary  according  to  the  nature  of 
the  ground  to  be  occupied,  the  shape  and  width  of  the  river,  the 
importance  of  the  communication,  &c.  :  they  consist  o-f  redans, 
lunettes,  hornworks,  or  portions  of  any  kind  of  field  work. 

If  the  bridge  is  seen  irom  any  point  en  the  bank,  the  tete  de  pont 
should  have  at  least  one  face,  whose  fire  may  sweep  that  point.— 
Islands  should  be  made  to  contribute  to  the  defence  by  works  erected 
on  them  ;  these  should  be  breastworks  for  infantry,  if  the  work  is 
within  the  range  of  that  arm,  or  batteries  for  field  guns.  Advan- 
tage should  also  be  taken  of  the  opposite  bank  tofortifiy  it  in  a  simi- 
lar manrier.  If  these  measures  cannot  be  taken,  auxiliary  flanks 
may  be  added  to  the  faces  of  such- a  work  as  a  redan  for  the  defence 
of  the  salients. 

A  reduit  is  frequently  constructed  within  a  t(^to  de  pont,  to  cover 
the  bridge  from  the  neighboring  heights,  and  also  to  enable  a  small 
party  of  the  troops  to  keep  the  enemy  in  check  until  the  n^jain  body 
has  crossed,  and  the  bridge  has.  been  taken  up  \  this  rear  guard  then 
crosses  the  river  in  boats  or  rafts,  protected  by  the  fire  from  the 
opposite  side. 

A  battery  should  be  constructed  so  as  to  enfilade  the  bridge,  and 
to  destroy  it,  should  the  enemy  force  the  reduit. 

The  faces  or  flanks  of  a  tete  de  pont  should  have  such  directions 
given  to  them  that  their  fire  may  range  directly  along  the  banks. 

The  best  position  for  a  (temporary)  military  bridge  and  tete  is  at 
a  4:e-entering  bend  of  a  river;  viz.,  at  a  part  v/hich  is  concave  to- 
wards the  enemy's  side,  because  then  the  bank  whiih  is  in  possession 
of  the  force  about  to  lay  down  the  bridge,  in  part,  envelope  both 
that  and  the  t^te.  Thus,  while  the  bridge  is  covered  from  the  view 
of  the  enemy,  breastworks  or  batteries  may  be  advantageously 
placed  to  assist  in  its  defence,  and  at  the  same  time  to  give  an  eftee- 
tive  cross  fire  in  its  front. 

When,  however,  the  bridge  is  to  remain  a  considerable  time, 
these  advantages  must  be  given  up,  and  a  straight  part  of  the  river 
chosen,  beciuse  there  the  current  acts  directly  against  the  heads  of 


FIELD    FORTIFICATIONS.  31 

the  boats  or  pontoons,  whereas  at  a  bend  it  acts  obliquely  against  the 
sides,  and  thus  tends  constantly  to  derange  their  positions.  Again, 
at  a  bend  the  current  is  constantly  wearing  away  the  concave  side, 
(or  bank,)  and  depositing  the  earth  thus  removed  at  the  next  convex 
bond,  thus  causing  a  shallow  bank  to  be  formed  on  one  side  of  the 
river  and  a  deep  part  at  the  opposite  side ;  consequently  at  every  fall 
of  the  water,  in  such  a  place,  one  end  of  the  bridge  is  left  aground 
on  the  shallow  part,  while  the  other  end  descends  with  the  water, 
and  thus  the  bridge  is  in  danger  of  being  broken. 

It  is  evident  that  the  bed  of  a  river  will  be  less  irregular,  and  that 
fords  will  be  most  usually  found  where  the  course  is  straight;  fords 
are,  however,  occasionally  found  at  the  bends  of  ^  river  in  directions 
obliquely  across,  from  one  convex  part  to  the  next  on  the  opposite 
side. 

A  ford  should  not  be  more  than  four  feet  deep  for  cavalry,  three 
feet  for  infantry,  and  two  feet  four  inches  for  artillery. 

LINES. 

Lines  are  a  series  of  works  and  trenches,  or  of  independent  works, 
arranged  so  as  to  defend  each  other,  and  the  ground  in  front  of  and 
between  them. 

Lines  are  used  to  cover  the  front  of  a  position,  or  to  connect  im- 
portant redoubts  or  forts  together. 

Lines  are  of  two  kinds,  such  as  are  continuous,  and  such  as  have 
intervals  between  the  works. 

The  former  are  principally  applicable  to  situations  where  it  is  pro- 
posed to  act  on  the  defensive  only,  and  where  they  are  of  such 
limited  extent  that  the  whole  line  of  parapet  can  be  occupied  with 
troops  exclusive  of  the  reserves ;  as,  for  instance,  to  close  a  pass  be- 
tween scarped  mountains,  or  on  the  sea  shore,  or  on  the  banks  of 
large  rivers;  thus  resting  on  natural  obstacles,  which  will  prevent 
their  flanks  being  turned.  They  are  often  introduced  as  portions  of 
an  extended  line  with  intervals. 

Extensive  continued  lines  can  make  but  slight  resistance,  while 
the  labor  necessarily  expended  in  executing  them  is  considerable; 
and  as  the  enemy  may  menace  several  points  at  once,  it  follows  that 
nearly  as  many  troops  would  be  required  for  the  defence  as  are  em- 
ployed in  the  attack,  in  which  case  the  first  principle  of  fortification 
is  violated.  Even  if  the  defenders  have  a  sufficient  number  of  dis- 
posable troops,  they  act,  when  within  lines,  under  a  disadvantage, 
for  they  must  watch  and  follow  every  movement  of  the  cneny,  so  as 


32  riBLD    FORTIFICATIONS. 

to  be  equaMy  prepared  to  resist  a  false  and  a  real  attack.  It  has 
often  happened  that  while  the  defenders  within  lines  were  concen- 
trating their  forces  to  oppose  a  false  attack,  the  enemy  has  pene- 
trated at  a  point  where  he  was  net  expected;  and  a  continued  line 
once  entered  may  generally  be  deemed  lost. 

Continuous  lines  of  redans  connected  by  curtains  are  constructed 
in  three  ways  :  in  the  first,  as  described  by  Vauban,  the  salients  of 
the  redans  are  at  240  yards  asunder,  and  consequently  the  musketry 
fire  of  one  redan  does  not^  efi"ectively,  defend  the  salient  of  the  next. 
To  remedy  this  defect,  it  was  subsequently  recommended  that  the 
►salients  of  the  redans  should  be  brought  within  musket  range  of 
each  other,  or  within  160  yards. 

In  both  of  these  constructions  the  flanking  angles  formed  by  the 
faces  of  the  redans  and  the  curtains  joining  them  much  exceed 
105°,  and  consequently  the  flanking  defence  is  very  imperfect. 

In  the  third  construction  the  salients  are  removed  to  240  yards 
from  each  other,  (tlie  original  distance,)  but  the  curtain  is  broken 
into  two  parts,  forming  a  salient  angle,  and  thus  the  re-entering  or 
flanking  angles  are  reduced  to  but  little  more  than  90°,  by  which 
means  the  flanking  defence  is  greatly  improved. 

This  tracing  is,  however,  still  defective,  inasmuch  as  it  presents 
double  the  number  of  salients  to  the  enemy's  attacks,  and  the 
branches  of  the  broken  curtains  are  exposed  to  be  enfiladed,  which 
is  not  the  case  in  Vauban's  construction. 

Lines  of  tenailles  consist  of  parapets  forming  a  series  of  salient 
and  re-entering  angles,  and  are,  in  fact,  like  the  improved  redan 
lines,  except  that,  in  this  tracing,  the  redans  are  all  of  the  same 
size,  and  have  obtuse  angles. 

They  are  traced  by  setting  off  distances  of  about  200  yards  along 
the  front  of  the  intended  lines,  to  mark  the  position  of  the  salient 
angles;  these  intervals  are  then  bisected,  and  perpendiculars  drawn 
towards  the  interior  to  give  the  places  of  the  re-entering  angles. 
The  perpendiculars  should  not  exceed  half  the  distance  between  the 
salients,  otherwise  the  re-entering  angles  would  be  less  than  right 
angles. 

Cremaillere  lines  are  composed  of  alternate  short  and  long  faces 
at  right  angles  (or  nearly  so)  to  each  other;  the  short  faces,  called 
crotchets,  are  made  about  30  yards  long,  and  the  long  faces,  called 
branches,  about  100  yards  long. 

These  lines  possess  the  following  advantages : 

1st.  The  branches  are  but  little  exposed  to  be  enfiladed,  owing  to 
the  small  projection  of  the  salients. 


FIELD   FORTIFICATIONS.  33 

2dly.  Each  branch  is  defended  not  only  by  the  fire  of  the  adjoin- 
ing crotchet,  but  by  several  others. 

3dly.  Their  outline  is  very  easily  adapted  to  all  varieties  of 
of  ground;  and  on  slopes,  in  particular,  they  are  very  advantageous, 
because  a  small  additional  height  given  to  the  crotchets  will  de- 
filade a  long  extent  of  branch  from  the  fire  of  an  enemy  on  the 
height. 

Their  defects  are : 

1st.  The  crotchets  being  short,  very  little  of  the  ditch  of  each  is 
defended  by  the  adjacent  branch, 

2dly.  A  battery  which  can  enfilade  one  branch  is  equally  able  to 
enfilade  several. 

CremailMre  lines  may  be  much    strengthened  by  placing  along" 
their  front  bastions  or  double  redans,  at  intervals  varying  from  690 
to  800  yards,  in  order  that  a  cross  fire  of  artillery  may  be  brought 
from  them  in  front  of  the  other  parts  of  the  line. 

The  crotchets  should  face  towards  the  bastions,  or  redans,  in  or- 
der that  the  fire  from  the  crotchets  may  defend  the  salients  of  those 
works,  and  that  the  branches  may  be  defiladed  by  being  directed  on 
the  bastions  or  double  redans.  When  the  line  crosses  a  valley,  the 
branches  may  be  most  eff'ectually  defiladed  by  giving  the  whole  a 
bend  concave  towards  the  exterior,  and  placing  the  bastions,  or  re- 
dans, on  the  high  ground;  these  works  will  thus  form  the  more  ad- 
vanced parts  of  the  line. 

The  flanks  of  the  bastions  must  be  connected  with  the  next 
crotchets  on  both  sides  by  broken  curtains,  taking  care  that  the  re- 
entering angles  are  not  less  than  right  angles. 

Bastioned  lines  are  made  precisely  in  the  manner  already  pointed 
out  for  the  fronts  of  bastioned  forts;  such  lines  may  be  strengthened 
by  lunettes,  constructed  at  musket-shot  distances  in  their  front,  and 
having  their  faces  directed  upon  those  of  the  bastions,  in  order  that 
the  ditches  of  the  lunettes,  and  the  ground  in  front  of  them,  may 
be  defended  by  those  faces. 

The  flanks  of  the  lunettes  give  a  direct  and  close  fire  in  front  of 
the  salients  of  the  bastions ;  but  care  must  be  taken  in  their  con- 
struction that  they  do  not  fire  into  each  other;  on  this  account, 
when  the  fronts  are  in  one  straight  line,  it  is  usual  either  to  sup- 
press the  flanks  of  the  lunettes,  or  to  place  a  lunette  on  every  alter- 
nate front  only. 

The  communication  from  the  lines  to  the  gorge  of  each  lunette 
is  by  a  caponniere,  which  is,  generally,  made  broadest  at  the  inner 
end,  in  order,  to  enable  the  garrison  to  meet  the  enemy  on  a  superior 


34  FIELD    FORTIFICATIONS. 

front,  should  he  succeed  in  getting  into  it;  its  parapet  is  made  only 
3  feet  above  the  ground  that  it  may  not  mask  the  fire  of  the  lines, 
and  consequently  its  interior  must  be  sunk  4  or  5  feet  to  afford  the 
requisite  cover;  its  breadth  must  be  sufficient  to  allow  room  for  a 
banquette.  A  traverse  is  placed  at  its  inner  extremity,  and  perhaps, 
(according  to  the  nature  of  the  ground  and  the  length  of  the  passage,) 
at'intervals  along  the  passage. 

Sometimes  the  line  changes  its  direction ;  in  such  cases,  when 
the  change  causes  the  parts  of  the  line  to  form  with  each  other  a 
re-entering  angle,  the  latter  is  one  of  the  strongest  parts  of  the 
line. 

LINES   WITH   INTERVALS,  OR   BROKEN   LINES. 

Broken  lines  should  always,  when  practicable,  be  disposed  in  a 
double  row,  and  in  such  a  manner  that  the  inner  works  may  flank 
the  outer;  the  advantages  possessed  by  broken  lines  are: 

1st.  With  the  same  extent  as  continuous  lines,  they  require  less 
labor  in  the  construction,  and  fewer  troops  to  occupy  them,  conse- 
quently large  reserves  may  be  formed. 

2dly.  The  defenders  may  advance  in  force  and  in  a  regular  for- 
mation through  the  intervals,  and  attack  the  enemy,  should  he  have 
been  thrown  into  confusion. 

3dly.  They  oblio-e  the  enemy  to  overpower  each  separate  work 
before  he  can  become  possessed  of  the  whole;  whereas  if  a  contin- 
uous line  be  forced  in  one  part,  it  is  generally  lost  to  the  defenders. 

4thly.  If  the  enemy  has  gained  one  work  he  will  then  be  exposed 
to  the  flanking  fire  of  the  adjacent  works^  and  to  a  fire  from  the 
works  in  the  second  line. 

To  profit  fully  by  this  advantage,  when  the  front  line  consists  of 
closed  works,  their  rear  fjices  ought  to  be  of  slight  construction, 
that  the  artillery  of  the  second  line  may  easily  demolish  those  faces, 
if  the  enemy  should  gain  possession  of  the  works. 

When  there  are  two  lines  of  works,  the  heaviest  artillery  should 
be  placed  in  the  inner  line,  or  else  the  enemy,  obtaining  possession 
of  the  exterior  line,  would  turn  the  eruns  against  the  other,  and 
have  a  superiority  over  the  defenders. 

When  lines  are  on  sloping  ground  descending  towards  the  front, 
the  slope  should,  if  possible,  be  cut  very  steep,  so  as  to  form  an  es- 
carpment before  the  works. 

A  single  row  of  redans  or  redoubts  is  comparatively  weak,  for  the 
fire  from  them  crosses  at  a  distance  in  front  of   the  intervals,  and 


FIELD   FORTIFICATIONS.  35 

but  feebly  defend.s  the  salients.  Lunettes  are  better  in  such  a  situa- 
tion on  account  of  the  fire  of  the  flanks,  which  may  be  brought  to 
cross  the  capitals  close  to  the  saHent  angles. 

The  intervals  between  the  works  which  form  a  broken  line  should 
not  exceed  IGO  yards,  in  order  that  they  may  be  defended  by  an 
effective  cross  fire  from  those  works. 

The  different  works  should  occupy  the  most  prominent  and  the 
highest  ground ;  also  the  flanking  parts  ought  to  be  perpendicular 
to  their  lines  of  defence. 

The  intervals  between  the  works  may  be  strengthened  by  artifi- 
cial obstacles,  or  by  a  trench,  for  troops,  with  a  rough  parapet,  (like 
the  first  parallel  in  a  siege,)  having  a  broad  interior  slope  to  enable 
the  men  to  advance  over  it  when  occasion  requires. 

DEFENCE    OF    FIELD   WORKS. 

A  spot  selected  for  a  military  post  should  not  be  commanded,  es- 
pecially on  the  flank  or  in  the  rear,  within  the  ordinary  range  of  a 
field  piece.  There  should  be  plenty  of  materials  on  the  spot  to  aid 
in  strengthening  the  works,  or  in  forming  obstructions  in  front  of 
them.  The  soil  should  be  of  a  nature  to  be  easily  worked,  and  the 
position  should  be  difficult  of  access;  it  should,  however,  offer  the 
means  of  retreating  in  security,  and  with  facility. 

The  highest  ground  of  a  position  should  be  occupied  by  the 
salients  of  works,  for  then  the  adjoining  faces  will  be,  in  some  mea- 
sure, secured  from  enfilade  fire;  it  follows  that  the  re-entering  an- 
gles should  be  placed  in  the  lowest  spots. 

It  is  very  essential  to  create  obstructions  within  short  range  of 
musketry  in  front  of  all  works  of  a  t:^mporary  nature,  with  a  view 
of  breaking  the  order  of  the  assailants,  and  detaining  them  under 
a  close  and  severe  tire,  if  they  persist  in  forcing  their  way  through. 

In  fact,  all  the  movements  of  an  enemy,  whether  to  the  front,  to 
the  right  or  left,  should  be  a  much  cramped  and  impeded  as  possi- 
ble; it  is  important  to  break  his  order  and  put  him  into  confusion 
when  under  fire,  for  he  can  seldom  re-form  under  such  circum- 
stance ;  and  if  he  attacks  in  disorder,  the  chances  are  against  his 
success. 

To  save  time  in  making  palisades  or  stockade  work,  the  whole 
quantity  ought  to  be  divided  into  distinct  portions,  say  10  or  12  feet 
in  length,  to  one  carpenter  and  two  laborers;  and  to  prevent  confu- 
sion in  obtaining  materials  for  constructing  obstacles,  it  is  well  to 
divide  the  men  into  parties  of  8  or  10   each,  prescribing  to  each 


36  FIELD   FORTIFICATIONS. 

party  tlie  nature  of  the  materials,  required,  the  place  where  they 
are  to  be  obtained,  and  the  spot  at  which  they  are  to  be  deposited. 

The  materials  are  obtained  by  felling  trees,  unroofing  houses,  tak- 
ing; up  floors,  and  the  like. 

The  guns  of  a  work  should  not,  generally,  reply  to  the  cannonade 
which  precedes  an  assault,  but  should  be  placed  behind  traverses,  or 
other  places  of  shelter  previously  prepared  for  them;  they  should 
only  fire  at  the  enemy's  artillery,  while  the  latter  is  changing  its 
position. 

Round  shot  or  shells  are  fired  against  guns;  grape,  canister, 
spherical  case,  and  rockets  against  troops. 

As  soon  as  the  enemy's  light  troops  advance,  the  parapets  are  to 
be  manned;  sand-bags  previously  filled  are  placed  along  the  para- 
pet, leaving  loopholes  between  them ;  they  are  musket-shot  proof, 
and  give  the  men  the  necessary  confidence  to  enable  them  to  take  a 
steady  aim.  One  rank  of  men  is  sujSicient  on  the  banquette,  others 
being  placed  behind  them  to  load.  A  reserve  is  to  be  stationed  un- 
der cover,  who  fall  upon  the  assailants  with  the  bayonet,  should 
they  succeed  in  getting  into  the  work.  For  a  good  defence  there 
ought  to  be  a  file  per  yard  to  man  the  parapet,  with  a  reserve  of 
one-fourth  or  one-sixth  of  the  whole,  in  addition. 

As  soon  as  the  assaulting  columns  begin  to  mask  the  fire  of  their 
own  artillery,  the  guns  of  the  work  will  be.  brought  up,  and  open 
their  fire  on  them. 

A  sortie  (very  rarely)  may  be  made,  should  the  enemy  be  thrown 
into  disorder;  but  this  step  requires  great  caution,,  for  should  the 
sortie  be  repelled,  the  enemy  may  enter  the  work  with  the  retiriifg 
troops. 

Fouo;asses,  having  been  previously  prepared,  will  be  fired  the  in- 
stant the  enemy  is  above  them,  by  means  of  a  piece  of  safety  fuze, 
or  a  musket  with  its  muzzle  in  the  powder  and  a  wire  to  the  trigger. 

It  the  assailants  at  length  descend  into  tlie  ditch,  shells,  grenades, 
and  every  sort  of  missile  are  to  be  thrown  upon  them.  The  shells 
are  rolled  down  by  being  placed  in  troughs  laid  on  the  superior 
slope  of  the  parapet. 

If  the  enemy  has  to  cross  a  river  before  he  arriveSrat  the  work, 
the  fords  may  be  rendered  impassable  for  artillery  and  cavalry,  by 
digging  pits,  planting  stakes,  throwing  in  felled  trees  and  harrows, 
or  by  driving  wagons  or  carts  full  of  stones  into  the  middle,  and 
taking  off  the  wheels. 

Should  the  ford  be  beyond  musket  range  from  the  work,  a 
parapet  may  be  raised  opposite  to  it,  at  such  a  distance  from  it  as  to 


FIELD    FORTIPICATIONS.  37 

permit  the  defenders  to  issue  forth  and  chara:e  the  party  crossing  it, 
at  the  moment  they  land  in  disorder  on  the  bank. 

To  prevent  surprise,  outposts  are  stationed  round  the  work  at 
night,  and  heaps  of  dried  brushwood,  or  tarred  fascines,  should  be 
placed  along  the  post  at  intervals;  at  the  approach  of  the  enemy, 
the  outposts  retire  into  the  work,  having  set  fire  to  the  piles  of 
brushwood;  this  will,  in  a  great  measure,  prevent  an  enemy  from 
concealing  himself  near  the  work. 


LOOPIIOLING    WALLS. 

AYalls  are  made  available  for  the  purposes  of  defence  by  loophol- 
ing  them;  if  a  ditch  cannot,  for  want  of  time,  be  dug  at  the  foot  of 
the  wall  outside,  the  loopholes  ought  to  be,  at  least,  7  feet  above  the 
ground  to  prevent  the  assailants  from  making  use  of  them;  in  the  former 
case  a  temporary  stage  might  be  made  of  casks,  ladders,  &c.,  within 
4  feet  or  4  feet  6  inches  of  the  loopholes,  to  enable  the  men  to  fire 
through  them. 

The  quickest  way  of  loopholing  a  wall  is  to  break- it  down  from 
the  top  in  the  form  of  narrow  fissures  about  3  feet  asunder;  but  if 
the  wall  is  very  low,  or  there  is  not  time  to  make  loopholes,  a  piece 
of  timber,  or  the  trunk  of  a  tree,  supported  on  the  top  of  it  by  a 
couple  of  stones,  would  be  a  ready  expedient,  and  men  could  fire 
from  the  opening  under  it;  or  sand-bags,  or  large  stones  or  sods, 
might  be  placed  on  the  wall  at  intervals.  The  loopholes  made  in 
walls  or  buildings  can  seldom  be  of  any  regular  form ;  the  width 
outside  should  not  exceed  3  inches,  but  inside  it  may  be  equal  to 
the  thickness  of  the  wall.  The  best  tools  (of  such  as  are  usually 
found  about  building)  to  break  loopholes  through  a  wall,  are  crow- 
bars, pickaxes,  and  large  hammers. 

Barricades  for  roads  and  streets  are  made,  if  time  permits,  by 
sinking  a  ditch  7  or  8  feet  deep,  and  forming  the  earth  into  a 
breastwork,  adding  palisades,  &c.;  but,  if  time  presses,  casks,  boxes, 
or  cart  bodies  filled  with  earth,  stones,  manure  or  cinders,  sacks  of 
flour,  bales  of  merchandise,  and  the  like,  must  be  arranged  across; 
paving  stones  may  be  taken  up  and  disposed  in  a  similar  manner. 

The  mass  should  be  raised  6  or  7  feet  high,  and  a  banquette 
formed  for  firing  over  it;  the  neighboring  houses  should  also  be 
loopholed  so  as  to  give  a  good  flanking  fire  over  the  ground  in  front 
of  the  barricade,  and  stones  may  be  collected  to  throw  down  on  the 
assailants  from  the  contiguous  houses. 


38  FIELD   FORTIFICATIONS. 


FORTIFYING   HOUSES. 


The  great  art  of  converting  buildings,  and  the  outhouses  and 
walls  that  usually  surround  them,  into  defensible  posts,  consists  in 
selecting  from  the  mass  of  objects  at  hand  such  as  will  answer  the 
purpose,  and  in  sacrificing  every  thing  else  ;  making  use  of  the  mate- 
rials to  strengthen  the  part  which  is  to  be  fortified. 

The  building  chosen  should  possess  some  of,  or  all  the  following 
requisites. 

1st.  It  should  command  all  that  surrounds  it. 

2dly.  It  should  be  substantial,  (not  thatched,)  and  of  a  nature  to 
furnish  materials  useful  for  placing  it  in  a  state  of  defence. 

3dly.  It  should  be  of  an  extent  not  too  great  for  the  number  of 
the  defenders,  and  should  only  require  for  the  completion  of  the 
proposed  object  the  time  and  means  which  can  be  spared.' 

4thly.  It  should  have  projections  flanking  the  walls  and  anoles. 

5thly.  It  should  be  difficult  of  access  on  the  side  exposed  to 
attack,  and  yet  have  a  safe  retreat  for  the  defenders ;  and,  of  course, 
it  must  be  in  such  a  position  as  to  answer  the  purpose  for  which  the 
detachment  is  posted. 

As  a  rough  guide  to  judge  of  the  third  requisite,  there  ought  to 
be  a  man  for  every  4  feet  of  wall  round  the  interior  of  the  lower 
story,  one  man  to  6  feet  for  the  second  story,  one  to  8  feet  for  an 
attic,  with  a  reserve  of  about  one-sixth  of  the  whole. 

Should  there  exist  any  doubt  about  having  sufficient  time  to  exe- 
cute all  that  might  be  wished,  it  would  be  necessary  to  decide  on 
the  best  jpoints  to  be  secured,  in  order  to  repel  an  immediate  attack; 
in  such  a  case  it  might  be  well  to  employ  as  many  men  as  could  work 
without  hindering  each  other  by  being  too  crowded,  to  collect  mate- 
rials, and  barricade  the  doors  and  windows  on  the  ground  floor,  to 
make  loopholes  in  them,  and  to  level  any  obstruction  outside,  that 
would  give  cover  to  the  enemy,  or  facilitate  the  attack ;  to  sink 
ditches  opposite  the  doors  on  the  outside,  and  arrange  loopholes  in 
the  windows  of  the  upper  story;  to  make  loopholes  through  the 
walls  generally,  attending  first  to  the  most  exposed  parts,  and  to 
break  communications  through  all  the  party  walls  and  partitions ; 
to  place  abatis  or  any  feasible  obstruction  on  the  outside,  and  to  im- 
prove the  defence  of  the  post  by  the  construction  of  tambours;  to 
place  outbuildings  and  garden  walls  in  a  state  of  defence,  and  es- 
tablish communications  between  them ;  to  make  arrangements  (in 
the  lower  story   particularly)  for  defending  one  room  after  another, 


FIELD   FORTIFICATIONS.  39 

SO  that  a  partial  possession  only  could  be  obtained  on  a  sudden  attack 
being  made. 

These  different  works  should  be  undertaken  in  the  order  of  their 
relative  importance,  according  to  circumstances;  and  after  securing 
the  immediate  object  for  which  they  were  designed,  they  might  re- 
main to  be  improved  on,  if  an  opportunity  should  offer. 

Houses  are  fortified  by  piercing  loopholes  through  the  walls,  and 
if  the  walls  are  high,  two,  or  even  three  rows  of  loopholes  may  be 
made,  and  a  temporary  scaffolding  of  furniture,  casks,  &c.,  erected 
for  firing  from  the  upper  oTies :  one  row  may  be  made  close  to  the 
ground,  with  pits  dug  in  the  rear,  or  the  floor  may  be  cut  through, 
if  there  is  a  basement,  for  the  convenience  of  making  use  of  them. 
The  loopholes  may  have  the  dimensions  before  prescribed,  and  they 
ought  not  to  be  made  at  a  less  distance  than  three  feet  from  each 
other,  lest  the  wall  should  be  too  much  weakened,  or  the  defenders 
inconveniently  crowded. 

The  staircases  are  to  be  cut  away,  the  communication  being  kept 
up  by  ladders ;  and  the  floors,  as  well  as  the  partition  walls,  should 
be  loopholed. 

Thatched  roofs  and  all  combustible  materials  are  to  be  removed, 
and  barrels  of  water  should  be  placed  in  every  room  in  readiness  to 
extinguish  fire. 

A  communication  ought  to  be  opened  on  the  side  furthest  from  the 
enemy,  through  which  ammunition  and  reinforcements  may  enter. 

The  door  or  barrier  closing  this  communication  may  be  made 
musli:ct-proof  by  nailing  strong  planks  to  it,  and  if  there  is  a  base- 
ment to  the  house,  the  floor  should  be  cut  away  within  the  door,  so 
as  to  form  a  sort  of  ditch. 

All  the  doors  and  windows  are  to  be  barricaded  and  loopholed. 
The  best  barricade  for  a  door  is  made  by  strong  palisades,  which  are 
secured  to  a  thick  cross  beam  let  into  the  wall  on  each  side;  a  bank 
of  earth  may  also  be  formed  on  the  exterior. 

A  flanking  defence  can  always  be  obtained  by  constructing  a 
tanibour  in  front  of  aside,  or  at  the  angles  of  a  house. 

All  enclosures  which  may  afford  the  enemy  cover  must  be  re- 
moved, if  not  included  in  the  defence. 

If  artillery  is  likely  to  ."be  employed  against  the  house,  it  will  be 
necessary,  unless  the  walls  are  very  strong,  to  support  the  timbers  of 
the  roof  by  means  of  props. 

If  there  is  time,  the  house  may  be  formed  into  a  blockhouse  by 
pulling  down  the  upper  stories,  and  laying  the  materials  over  the 
lower  rooms  to  make  the  covering  shell-proof. 


40  FIELD    FORTIFICATIONS. 

A  ditch  may  be  dug  on  the  outside  of  the  house,  and  the  earth 
placed  against  the  walls :  some  protection  may  be  obtained  for  the 
doo/s,  by  placing  strong  beams  against  the  walls  on  the  outside  in 
an  inclined  position,  and  heaping  earth  or  rubbish  over  them, 

INTRENCHING  A  VILLAGE. 

In  intrenching  a  village,  the  buildings,  walls,  and  hedges  on  its 
circuit  are  to  be  considered  as  part  of  its  enclosure,  and  are  to  be 
made  fit  for  the  purposes  of  defence;  all  the  intervals  between  them 
are  to  be  occupied  by  breastworks  or  palisades,  and  strengthened  by 
abatis. 

The  streets  are  to  be  barricaded  at  intervals  with  carts  or  wagons 
having  one  or  two  wheels  taken  off,  with  barrels  of  earth,  bales  of 
merchandize,  &c.  A  passage  should  be  made  through  the  adjoining- 
houses,  which  should  be  loopholed,  and  care  must  be  taken  that  the 
barricade  be  not  turned  by  an  enemy  passing  down  the  neighboring 
streets. 

Some  strong  building,  such  as  a  church,  court-house,  or  jail, 
should  be  selected,  and  fortified  with  particular  care,  to  serve  as  a 
citadel  or  reduit,  to  which  the  defenders  may  retire  when  driven  in 
from  the  exterior  part  of  the  village. 

Advantage  must  be  taken  of  any  wajls  or  outbuildings  surround- 
ing whatever  has  been  selected  as  the  reduit  or  keep ;  and  they 
should  be  converted  into  outworks  for  strengthening  it  as  an  inde- 
pendent post.  Should  the  village  be  of  too  great  an  extent  for  the 
force  thrown  into  it,  a  portion  of  it  only  might  be  strengthened,  and 
the  remainder  separated  or  destroyed  ;  or  the  defence  might  be  con- 
fined to  some  separate  building. 

The  roads  by  which  an  enemy  would  advance  should  be  cut  up, 
and  obstructed  with  felled  trees,  ploughs,  harrows,  &c.;  bridges 
should  be  broken,  and  the  passage  disputed  under  cover  of  some 
simple  field  work  placed  favorably  to  command  the  road. 

The  resolute  defence  of  villages  situated  on  the  front  of  an  army 
has  often  decided  the  fate  of  a  battle;  in  this  position,  they  may  be 
regarded  as  bastions  connected  by  movable  curtains. 

ATTACK  ON  FIELD  WORKS. 

The  attack  on  field  works  maybe  executed  by  surprise,  or  by  open 
force;  the  former  can  only  take  place  when  the  advance  of  the  as- 


FIELD   FORTIEICATIONS.  41 

sailants  is  concealed  by  fog  or  darkness^  or  by  the  nature  of  the 
ground,  as  in  mountainous  countries. 

In  the  attack  of  field  works  by  open  force,  it  is  advisable  to  ad- 
vance against  several  points  at  the  same  njoment,  when  circum- 
stances permit;  of  these  some  may  be  false  attacks,  and  may  be 
converted  into  real  ones  if  the  enemy  appears  weak  or  hesitrvting  on 
the  points  threatened.  One  attack  ought,  generally,  to  be  directed 
upon  the  rear  of  the  work,  (if  open  at  the  gorge,)  which  will  al- 
ways lessen  the  confidence  of  the  defenders. 

As  many  assaulting  columns  should  be  formed  as  there  are  points 
to  be  attacked,  and  before  the  works  are  stormed,  pits  and  trenches 
should  (when  time  permits,  and  there  is  no  natural  cover  for  skir- 
mishers) be  dug  to  conceal  riflemen:  these  pits  are  about  four  feet 
wide,  and,  with  the  excavated  earth  raised  before  them,  four  feet  in 
depth,  in  order  that  they  may  serve  to  cover  a  file  of  men  to  that 
height. 

The  artillery  should  be  posted  on  the  prolongations  of  the  faces 
to  enfilade  them,  weaken  the  parapets,  and  ruin  the  interior  defences 
of  the  work  and  its  ditch;  for  the  latter  purpose  howitzers  are  best 
adapted.  As  soon  as  the  artillery  has  produced  some  effect,  the 
signal  for  the  assault  should  be  given;  light  troops  will  gradually 
advance  towards  the  counterscarp,  in  skirmishing  order,  firing  at  the 
gunners  through  the  embrasures;  they  will  conceal  themselves  in 
the  pits  and  trenches  prepared  for  them,  or  seek  shelter  in  the  ine- 
qualities of  the  ground.  They  should  be  followed  by  storming  par- 
ties, and  these  should  be  accompanied  by  a  detachment  of  sappers, 
(or  a  squad  of  soldiers  told  off  for  that  purpose,)  carrying  axes, 
crowbars,  bags  of  powder,  &c.,  to  force  obstacles.  Lastly,  the  re- 
serve will  follow,  at  some  distance,  to  act  as  circumstances  may  re- 
quire;  it  may  lepel  attempts  to  aid  the  defenders,  reinforce  the 
storming  parties  if  they  succeed  in  entering  the  work,  or  it  may  af- 
ford them  a  rallying  point,  and  cover  their  retreat  if  they  fail. 

Tlie  troops  descend  into  the  ditch  with  unfixed  bayonets,  in  order 
to  avoid  accidents;  and  they  fix  them  when  on  the  berme. 

Should  the  ditches  have  a  great  depth,  it  will  be  necessary  to 
lessen  it  by  means  of  bags  with  heather  or  grass,  or  by  bundles  of 
hay  or  straw,  or  fascines,  &c. 

A  bridge  formed  of  a  gun  limber  and  a  ladder  may  be  run  up  to 
the  counterscarp  and  thrown  across. 

To  avoid  mistakes  in  marching  by  night  to  attack,  each  soldier 
should  bear  some  visible  mark  by  which  ho  may  be  distinguished 
from  an  enemy.     If  a  breach  or  any  particular  point  is  to  be  at- 


42  FIELD    FORTIFICATIONS. 

tacked  by  night,  the  way  to  it  should  be  marked  by  distinguishable 
l^ickets  or  other  objects,  placed  or  re-marked  on  the  ground  at  the 
time  of  the  previous  reconnoissance.  • 

The  columns  march  to  the  assault  in  the  direction  of  the  capi- 
tals;  but  after  passing  the  ditch,  the  troops  should  enter  the  works 
by  the  faces,  on  each  side  of  the  salient  angle,  that  they  may  pre- 
sent a  front  in  the  work  equal  or  superior  to  that  of  the  enemy. 
When  it  may  be  advisable  to  force  an  entrance  at  the  gate  of  a  for- 
tified post,  that  gate  may  be  destroyed  by  a  piece  of  artillery  brou  >,ht 
close  up  to  it,  or  by  a  bag  of  powder  attached  to  the  wood  by  a  gim- 
let, or  propped  against  it  by  a  forked  stick.  - 

In  assaulting  a  place  whose  scarps  and  counterscarps  are  revetted 
with  masonry,  scaling  ladders  must  be  employed.  The  first  division 
of  each  column  of  assault  carries  the  longest  ladders;  they  descend 
into  the  ditch  with  them,  and  afterwards  carry  the  ladders  across 
and  raise  them  against  the  scarp. 

The  next  division  carries  other  ladders,  which  they  place  and 
leave  against  the  counterscarp.  The  ladders  are  carried  and  planted 
with  arms  slung.  Ladders  planted  against  a  wall  are  not  to  slope 
above  one-fourth  of  their  height,  lest  they  should  break  under  the 
weight  of  the  men. 

A  strong  tiring  party  is  drawn  up  on  the  glacis  to  keep  down  the 
fire  of  the  defenders,  if  the  latter  should  appear  on  the  parapets  to 
oppose  the  assault. 

ATTACKING    HOUSES. 

In  the  attack  of  houses,  artillery  should  be  employed  to  form  a 
breach  before  giving  the  assault,  and  also  to  throw  hot  shot,  shells, 
and  carcasses. 

If  the  detachment  is  unprovided  with  artillery,  attempts  must  be 
made  to  force  passages  through  doors,  windows,  or  unflanked  parts 
of  the  walls:  the  attack  should  be  made  on  difiierent  parts  of  the 
building,  to  distract  the  attention  of  the  defenders;  in  the  mean 
time,  and  for  the  same  purpose,  parties  of  men  keep  up  a  fire  on 
any  points  where  there  is  a  chance  of  disabling  them.  Attempts 
may  also  be  made  to  eflfect  an  entrance  through  the  roof,  by  means 
of  ladders. 

If  the  assailants'  have  neither  powder  nor  crowbars  for  forcing 
doors,  a  heavy  beam  or  tree  may,  if  at  hand,  be  used  as  a  battering 
ram;  a  fire,  of  straw  or  brushwood   may  be  made  near  the  walls 


FIELD    FORTIFICATIONS.  43 

further  to  distract  and  alarm  the  defenders,  and  to  cover  the  opera- 
tions of  the  assailants. 

ATTACKING    BARRICADES. 

Artillery  will  soon  clear  a  passage  through  ordinary  barricades; 
if  not,  the  assaulting  party  must  endeavor  to  turn  the  barricade, 
either  by  passing  down  some  other  street,  or  by  forcing  a  passage 
from  one  house  to  another,  until  they  arrive  in  rear  of  it :  a  few 
loaded  muskets  applied  to  the  locks  and  bolts  of  the  strongest  door 
will  force  it  open,  and  the  partition  walls  may  be  destroyed  by  bags 
of  powder,  &c.  After  having  taken  possession  of  a  house,  troops 
must  be  left  in  it  for  the  purpose  of  firing  from  it  upon  the  barri- 
cade. 


CHAPTER  II. 

ARTILLERY. 


The  pieces  of  artillery  in  ordinary  use  are:  guns,  howitzers,  and 
mortars.  They  are  made  either  either  of  iron  or  brass,  (gun 
metal.) 

Brass  guns  are  made  of'  a  metal  composed  of  8  parts  of  tin  to 
100  of  copper,  and  cost  about  $900  per  ton ;  iron  guns  cost  $100 
per  ton. 

Brass  guns  are  used  for  field  batteries,  as  they  can  be  made  with 
a  less  quantity  of  metal  than  iron  guns  of  the  same  calibre,  without 
danger  of  bursting.  Therefore,  though  brass  is  heavier  than  iron, 
guns  of  the  former  metal  are  lighter  than  those  of  the  latter.  Brass 
guns,  are  however  soon  rendered  unserviceable  by  repeated  and 
quick  firing. 

Iron  guns  are  better  adapted  for  the  attack  or  defence  of  for- 
tresses, and  for  service  on  board  of  ship,  being  less  expensive  than 
those  of  brass,  and  better  able  to  sustain  long  continued  and  rapid 
firing. 

At  the  siege  of  St.  Sebastian,  each  piece  fired  350  rounds  in  15? 
hours  without  becoming  unserviceable:  brass  guns  could  not  have 
fired  120  rounds  in  the  same  time,  without  drooping  at  the  muzzle 
and  rumiing  at  the  vent  so  much  as  to  become  useless. 

The  length  of  a  gun  is  measured  from  rear  of  the  base  or  breech- 
ring  to  the  face  of  the  muzzle. 

The  CALIBRE  is  the  diameter  of  the  bore. 

The  DISPART  is  the  excess  of  half  the  diameter  of  the  base  ring 
(or  thickest  part  of  the  gun)  above  half  the  diameter  of  the  muz- 
zle. Guns  are  made  thicker  at  the  breech  than  at  the  muzzle,  the 
better  to  resist  the  expansive  force  of  the  powder. 

The  TRUNNIONS  are  projections  or  arms  one  on  each  side  of  the 
gun,  by  which  it  is  secured  and  supported  in  the  carriage. 

The  WINDAGE  is  the  excess  of  the  diameter  of  the  bore  over  the 


ARTILLERY.  45 

diameter  of  the  shot,  and  is,  in  field  2:un«,  about  1-40  the  diameter 
of  the  shot;  in  iron  <j;uns  it  is  about  1-G  inch*. 

Gruns  are  named  according  to  the  number  of  pounds  contained  in 
the  round  shot  they  carry;  thus  a  6-pounder  carries  a  G  lb.  shot;  a 
12-pounder  carries  a  12  lb.  shot,  etc. 

The  service  charge  of  powder  for  battering  is  one-third  of  the 
weight  of  the  shot. 

The  charge  for  field  guns  is  from  1-6  to  1-4  of  the  weight  of 
the  shot,  as  a  greater  charge  is  found  to  injure  the  carriages  with- 
out producing  an  equivalent  eff'ect. 

For  ricochet  firing,  the  charge  varies  from  1-18  to  1-36  the 
weight  of  the  shot;  and  the  elevation  of  the  giin  from  5°  to  9°. 

To  increase  the  range  of  the  gun,  an  increase  of  elevation  above 
a  horizontal  line  must  be  given  to  the  axis  of  the  gun. 

In  pointing  a  gun,  the  line  of  direction  is  given  from  the  trail, 
and  the  elevation  from  the  breech. 

Point-blank  position  of  the  gun  denotes  that  the  piece  is  laid, 
directly,  at  the  object  without  elevation :  to  effect  this,  the  lowest 
notch  on  the  side  of  the  base  ring,  the  notch  on  the  side  of  the 
muzzle,  and  the  object  to  be  fired  at,  are  brought  into  one  line;  the 
two  notches  are  in  a  plane  passing  through  the  axis  of  the  bore, 
and  that  plane  may  be  parallel  or  oblique  to  the  horizon. 

Point-blank  range  is  the  distance  from  the  muzzle  of  the  gun  to 
the  first  point  at  which  the  shot  strikes  the  ground;  it  being  sup- 
posed that  the  latter  is  parallel  to  the  axis  of  the  bore. 

If  the  gun  is  pointed  at  an  object,  by  looking  along  the  upper 
surface  of  it,  (for  which  purpose  there  is  a  notch  behind  the  vent, 
and  one  on  the  top  of  the  muzzle,)  it  is  said  to  be  laid  by  the  line 
of  metal,  and  it  gives  the  gun  an  elevation  of  about  one  degree; 
the  breech  being  wider  than  the  muzzle. 

.  The  upper  right  hand  quadrant  of  the  base  ring  lias  12  quarter 
degrees  (called  quarter  sights)  notched  on  it;  by  bringing  the  ob- 
ject, the  notch  on  the  side  of  the  muzzle,  and  any  quarter  sight 
into  one  line,  a  corresponding  elevation  or  depression  is  given  to  the 
gun. 

The -tangent-scale  is  raised  from  a  groove  behind  the  vent,  and 
can  be  fixed  at  any  point  of  its  length  by  a  screw;  it  is  divided  in- 
to quarter  degrees  from  one  degree  upwards  :  by  means  of  this  scale 

*J2,  9,  and  G-pounders  have  1-10  inch  windage;  a  3-poandcr  has 
9-100  inch;  32-poiindor  from  1-5  inch  to  1-S  inch,  according  to  the  length; 
24-poiin(ler  about  1-6  inch  ;  IS-poiinder  about  1-7  inch.  Carronades  have 
a  windage  of  1-64  the  diameter  of  the  shot. 


46  ARTILLERY. 

the  requisite  elevation,  as  far  as  6  or  8  degrees,  may  be  given  with 
great  accuracy,  the  object  being  seen  in  a  line  with  the  top  of  the 
tangent-scale,  and  the  notch  on  the  top  of  the  muzzle. 

The  point-blank  range  of  light  (brass)  12,  6,  and  3-pounders,  is 
200  yards;  medium  12  and  9-pounders,  and  heavy  6-pounders,  300 
yards;  iron  (long)  24-pounders,  360  yards. 

Every  quarter  of  a  degree  of  elevation  increases  the  range  of 
each  class  by  100  yards  until  there  are  attained,  respectively,  the 
ranges  of  600,  700,  and  1200  yards,  after  which  each  quarter  of  a 
degree  increases  the  range  by  a  less  amount  than  100  yards. 

Howitzers*  are  a  short  description  of  ordnance  with  chambers, 
and  are  used,  principally,  for  projecting  shells  horizontally  or  near- 
ly so.  _ 

Their  principal  advantages  are,  that  they  can  be  more  easily 
loaded,  and  are  considerably  lighter,  in  proportion  to  the  calibre 
than  guna;  they  may,  also,  be  used  as  mortars:  they  have  no  dis- 
part, the  diameter  of  the  base  ring  and  swell  of  the  muzzle  being 
equal,  or  the  difference  being  made  up  by  a  patch  on  the  muzzle. 

Howitzers  are  intended  for  enfilade  and  ricochet  firing,  to  reach 
troops  behind  heights  and  parapets,  and  to  breach  earthen  works  by 
firing  shell  into  them :  for  these  purposes  heavy  charges  are  not 
necessary,  although  the  bores  may  be  large ;  the  chamber  is  formed 
so  as  to  confine  the  powder  as  much  as  possible,  and  so  that  the 
shell  may  rest  on  its  mouth. 

Mortars  differ  from  guns  in  the  construction  of  their  bore,  their 
chamber  being  in  the  shape  of  a  frustum  of  a  cone,  by  which 
means  the  powder  is  confined,  and  the  shell  fits  close  to  the  sides; 
they  are  also  much  shorter  and  thicker  than  guns  :  they  have  trun- 
nions at  the  extremity  of  the  breach,  and  are  usually  placed  on  their 
beds  so  as  to  project  shells,  carcasses,  or  fire  balls  at  an  angle  of 
45°,  the  range  being  increased  by  augmenting  the  charge  of  pow- 
der. 

The  shells  discharged  from  mortars  describe  a  high  curve  in  their 
flight,  and  fall  with  their  full  weight  almost  vertically  upon  the  ob- 
ject to  be  struck;  they  thus  fracture  the  strongest  buildings,  and 
bursting  at  the  same  time,  they  set  fir0  to  every  thing  combustible 
about  them. 

Their  splinters  are  also  very  destructive,  and  fly  in  all  directions, 
sometimes  as  far  as  400  yards.     As  mortars  fire   over  the  parapet, 

*Tlie  charges  for  certain  howitzers  are  as  follows: — 10-inch,  7  ibs.; 
8  inch,  4  fts.;  5^-inch,  (24-poun(lNcr,)  2  to  2^  lbs.;  4  2-5  inch,  (12^-i)ound- 
er,)  ^  to  ^  lb. 


ARTILLERY.  47 

and  hot  through  embrasures,  it  is  necessary  that  they  should  be 
placed  at  a  distance  of  12  feet  behind  the  crest  of  the  parapet,  sup- 
posing it  to  be  of  the  ordinary  height. 

Rockets  are  cyHndrical  cases  of  pasteboard*  or  iron,  attached  to 
one  end  of  a  rod  of  Wood,  and  containing  a  composition,  which 
being  ignited,  they  are  projected  through  the  air  by  a  force  arising 
from  the  combustion. 

Military  rockets  terminate  cither  in  a  cone  or  a  parabolid,  and 
may  serve  either  as  shells  or  carcasses  :  their  weight  is  from  3  to  32 
lb.  They  are,  in  general,  fired  from  tulies,  and  the  proper  eleva- 
tion is  about  a  degree  for  each  hundred  yards  in  the  intended 
range.  Fired  against  troops  they  create  much  disorder,  and  falling 
on  buildings,  they  destroy  them  or  set  them  on  fire. 

The  length  of  the  rod  is  about  GO  diameters  of  the  rocket,  and 
the  composition  with  Avhich  the  cylinder  is  filled  consists  generally 
•of  saltpetre,  sulphur,  and  charcoal  or  gunpowder.  The  composition 
is  rammed  into  the  case,  but  a  void  space  is  left  about  the  axis,  in 
order  that  a  considerable  surface  may  be  at  once  in  a  state  of  com- 
bustion. At  the  choke  or  neck  of  the  rocket  there  are  several  aper- 
tures, at  one  of  which  the  fire  is  communicated  to  the  composition. 

The  cause  of  the  rocket's  motion  is,  the  excess  of  the  pressure 
produced  by  the  burning  material  at  the  head  of  the  rocket  abcve 
the  pressure  at  the  neck,  when  part  of  the  flame  escapes  through 
the  apertures ;  the  stick  serves  to  guide  the  rocket  in  its  flight. 

Shells  are  hollow  shot  with  a  hole  to  receive  the  fuse;  they  are 
discharged,  usually,  from  mortars  and  howitzers,  and  are  charged 
with  a  quantity  of  powder  sufficient  to  burst  them  when  at  the  end 
of  their  range;  the  fuze  being  cut  of  such  a  length  that  the  charge 
may  be  ignited  at  the  proper  moment. 

To  breach  earthen  works,  the  shells  are  fired  horizontally,  from 
howitzers,  with  reduced  charges,  that  the  fuze  may  not  be  extin- 
guished before  igniting  the  powder  in  the  shell:  this  powder  is  a 
bursting  charge. 

Carcasses  are  shells  with  three  fuze  holes;  they  are  filled  with  a 
a  peculiar  composition,  which  flames  out  of  the  holes  with  great 
power  and  fury  I'or  about  ten  minutes:  they  are  thrown  fro..i  mor- 
tars, howitzers,  and  guns,  to  set  fire  to  buildings,  and  sometimes  to 
serve  as  light  balls. 

Shrapnell  shells,  or  spherical-case  shot,  are  shells  filled  with  mus- 
ket balls,  having  a  bursting  charge   of   powder  mixed  with  them. 

*  The  former  arc  for  signals,  ahd  the  latter  are  for  military  service. 


48  ARTILLERY. 

They  are  discharged  from  guns  and  howitzers,  and  have  a  fuze 
like  that  of  a  coinmon  shell,  but  shorter,  in  order  that  the  shell 
may  burst  in  the  air  before  the  completion  of  its  range;  in  this 
manner  musket  balls  and  the  splinters  of  the  shell  can  be  poured 
into  a  column  of  troops  at  1,200  yards  distance. 

Common  case,  or  canister  sho't,  are  cylindrical  tin  canisters  with 
wooden  or  iron  bottoms,  containing  from  12  to  70  shot,  which  vary 
in  weight  from  1^  oz.  to  8  oz.  each,  according  to  the  calibre  of  the 
gun.  As  they  burst  nearly  at  the  mouth  of  the  gun,  their  effect 
cannot  be  depended  on  beyond  200  yards,  although  they  are  used  at 
a  greater  distance. 

Grape  shot  are  of  two  patterns;  either  the  balls  are  quilted 
round*  an  iron  pin  with  a  circular  plate  at  the  bottom,  or  a  pin  runs 
through  a  succession  of  plates,  betw(^en  every  two  of  which  is  a  tier 
of  balls;  in  the  latter  case  they  are  also  called  'Hier  shot." 

In  the  first  pattern,  the  shot  soon  corrode  the  canvas  quilting, 
therefore  the  second  is  preferred  :  there  are  9  shot  in  each  round, 
each  shot  varying  in  weight  from  8  oz.  to  4  lbs.  according  to  the 
caUbre  of  the  gun ;  the  most  effective  range  is  about  200  yards. 

Hand  grenades  are  vshells  of  about  1  lb.  13  oz.  weight,  with  a 
fuze  and  bursting  charge;  they  can  be  thrown;  by  the  hand,  about 
25  or  30  yards;  they  are  useful  for  the  defence  of  breaches  andun- 
flanked  works. 

Gunpowder  is  composed  of  75  parts  saltpetre,  15  charcoal,  and 
10  sulphur  in  every  hundred  parts :  a  cubic  foot  of  it  weighs  about 
55  lbs. 

A  shell  fuze  is  a  funnel-shaped  tube  of  well-seasoned  beech,  filled 
with  a  composition  of  saltpetre,  sulphur,  and  mealed  gunpowder. 

Portfire  is  a  composition  of  saltpetre,  charcoal,  and  sulphur, 
pressed  closely  into  a  cylinder  of  white  brown  paper  :  they  are  made 
in  lengths  of  IG  inches,  and  are  used  to  discharge  guns,  to  ignite 
bags  of  powder,  &c. 

Portfire  and  shell  fuzes  burn"  at  the  rate  of  one  incli  in  five 
seconds :  Bickford's  fuze  (which  will  burn  under  water)  burns  6 
inches  in  5  seconds,  or  2  yards  in  a  minute. 

To  fire  shot  or  shells  a  ricochet,  or  in  such  a  manner  that  they 
make  several  bounds  during  their  course,  it  is  necessary  to  give  the 
gun  or  howitzer  a  charge,  and  an  elevation  depending  on  the  extent 
of  the  range  required.  In  enfilading  a  work  ricochet,  the  gun 
should  be  placed  nearly  in  the  direction  of  the  interior  slope  of  the 
parapet  produced;  and  its  elevation  should  be  such  that  the  shot 
may  just  clear  the  crest  of  the  parapet  in  front. 


ARTILLERY.  49 

Ricochet  firing  against  guns  in  a  work,  is  useless  if  carried  on  at 
a  greater  distance  than  650  yards;  the  best  range  is  about  400 
yards. 

Hound  shot  are  sometimes  fired  red  hot  from  heavy  guns,  to  set 
on  fire  buildings,  blockhouses,  shipping,  and  any  defences  in  the  con- 
struction of  which  timber  has  been  employed. 

It  requires  about  three-quarters  of  an  hour  to  heat  a  24  pound 
shot  when  the  furnace  has  been  previously  prepared;  double  that 
time  if  not.  In  loading,  a  tight  dry  wad  is  placed  over  the  powder, 
and  afterwards  a  wet  wad,  first  soaked,  and  then  well  wrung;  next, 
the  gun  being  slightly  elevated,  the  shot  is  brought  up,  by  means 
of  an  instrument  called  the  carrier,  and  rolled  home;  if  it  is  re- 
quired to  depress  the  gun,  another  wet  wad  must  be  placed  over  the 
shot. 

A  gun  platform  is  a  flooring  of  wood  or  stone,  to  prevent  the 
wheels  or  trucks  of  a  gun  carriage  from  sinking  into  the  ground : 
the  garrison  and  siege  platforms  are  10  feet  wide  at  the  head,  15 
feet  long,  and  14  feet  wide  at  the  splay  or  tail. 


3 


CHAPTER  ni. 

MANUAL  FOR  LIGHT  ARTILLERY. 

1.  For  instruction  in  the  manual  of  light  artillery,  the  piece  se- 
lected is  the  light  12-pclr.  hcTvitzer,  used  for  mountain  service,  oti 
account  of  its  simplicity,  and  as  embracing  all  the  principles  re- 
quired for  serving  a  light  field  piece.  It  is  generally  transported 
by  mules.  The  piece  and  the  shafts  may  be  packed  upon  one  mule, 
the  carriage  upon  another,  and  the  ammunition  chest  upon  the 
third.     The  cayriage  is  adapted  for  draught. 

In^ease  the  pieces  are  served  by  a  iully  organized  company,  a 
jumper  or  short  light  pole,  with  a  cross-piece  of  iron  at  the  end,  is 
substituted  for  the  shafts.  A  rope,  attached  to  the  axle-tree  and 
running  through  rings  in  the  cross-piece,  enables  the  detachments 
to  draw  the  pieces.  In  coming  into  battery,  the  rope  is  detached 
and  held  in  a  coil  ready  for  use. 

2.  The  mule  that  draws  the  piece,  or  carries  it  when  packed,  is 
called  the  shafi  mule;  the  mule  that  carries  the  carriage,  when 
packed,  the  carriage  mule  ;  and  the  mule  on  which  the  ammunition 
chests  are  packed,  the  ammunition  mule. 

3.  The  piece  is  in  hattery  when  the  shafts  are  detached  and  it  is 
in  a  proper  position  to  be  fired.  The  front  in  this  case  is  the  direc- 
tion towards  which  the  muzzle  points.  The  front,  when  the  shafts 
are  attached,- is  the  direction  towards  which  t^ie  shaft  point.  The 
right  of  the  piece,  in  both  cases^  is  the  right  of  the  cannoneer  when 
facing  to  the  front. 

The  position  of  the  mules,  when  the  piece  is  in  battery,  is  as  fol- 
lows: 

The  ammunition  mule  fifteen  yards  in  rear  of  the  piece,  the  shaft 
mule  two  yards  in  rear  of  the  ammunition  mule,  and  the  carriage 
mule  two  yards  in  rear  of  the  shaft  mule,  all  facing  towards  the' 
piece. 

4.  In  the  order  of  march,  with  the  hoicitzer  mounted  on  its  car- 
riage,  the  shaft  mule  is  hitched  in,  and  the  carriage  and  ammuni- 
tion mules  follow;  the  first  two  yards  from  the  piece^  and  the  second 
two  yards  from  the  first. 


o 

3 


O 
5| 


5 


Page  50. 


MANUAL    FOR   LIGHT   ARTILLERY.  51 

5.  In  tJie  order  of  march,  with  the  piece  and  carriage  packed 
upon  the  mules,  the  shaft  mule  leads,  and  the  other  two  follow ;  the 
distance  between  each  being  two  yards. 

FORMING    THE    DETACHMENT. 

6.  Six  men  are  required  for  the  service  of  the  piece.  They  are 
formed  in  two  ranks,  and  told  off  from  the  ri^ht  by  the  chief  of 
piece;  Nos.  1  and  2  being  on  the  right,  No.  8  and  the  gunner  being 
in  the  centre,  and  Nos.  4  and  5  on  their  left;  the  even  numbers 
anti  the  gunner  being  in  the  i'ront,  and  the  odd  numbers  in  the  rear 
rank. 

The  detachment  is  iliarchcd  to  the  piece,  and  posted  as  follows: 

POSTS    OF   THE   DETACHMENTS, 

7.  In  hattery.  Nos.  1  and  2  about  one  yard  outside  of  the  wheels, 
and  in  line  with  the  axle-tree,  No.  1  being  on  the  right,  and  No.  2 
on  the  left;  the  gunner  at  the  end  of  the  trail;  No.  3  opposite  the 
knob  of  the  eascable,  covering  No.  1;  No.  4  on  the  right,  and  No. 
5  on  the  left  of  the  ammunition  mule;  all  Aicing  to  the  front.  The 
chief  of  piece  is  opposite  to  the  trail,  outside  of  and  near  the  left 
cannoneers. 

8.  hi  hattery,  withont  mules.  Nos.  4  and  5  are  on  the  right  and 
left  of  the  ammunition  chests,  facing  to  thc' front. 

9.  In  the  order  of  march,  shaft  mides  hitched  m.  Nos.  1  and  2 
opposite  to  the  muzzle;  the  gunner  and  No.  3  opposite  to'  the  trail;- 
and  Nos.  4  and  5  opposite  to  the  saddle  of  the  ammunition  mule ; 
the  gunner  and  even  numbers  on  the  right,  and  the  odd  numbers  on 
the  left;  all  facing  to  the  front,  and  covering  each  other  in  lines 
one  yard  from  the  wheels.  The  chief  of  piece  is  on  the  left  of  the 
driver  of  the  shaft  mule. 

10.  In  the  order  of  march,  mules  pached.  Nos.  1  and  2  at  the 
shaft  mule ;  the  gvinner  and  No.  3  at  the  carriage  mule ;  and  Nos. 
4  and  5  at  the  ammunition  mule;  he  gunner  and  even  numbers  on 
the  right  and  odd  numbers  on  the  left;  all  opposite  to  the  saddles, 
one  yard  from  the  mules,  and  facing  to  the  IVont.  The  chief  of 
piece  is  on  the  left  of  the  driver  of  the  shaft  mule. 

11.  There  is  one  driver  to  each  mule.  [le  is  on  the  left  of  the 
mule,  and  holds  the  reins  with  the  right  hand,  six  inches  from  the 
mouth,  the  hand  high  and  firm. 


52  MAlfUAL   FOR   LIGHT   ARTILLERY. 


SERVICE    OF   THE   PIECE. 

12.  The  piece  is  in  battery,  the  men  at  their  posts.     (No.  7.) 
The  shafts  are  placed  on  the  ground,  one  yard  and  a  half  from 

the  line  of  the  right  wheel,  and  parallel  to  it^  the  cro^:s-bar  opposite 
to  the  trail,  the  shafts  pointing  to  the  rear. 

The  chests,  when  the  ammunition  mule  is  absent,  are  on  the 
ground,  fifteen  yards  in  rear  of  the  trail,  their  sides  parallel  to  the 
axis  of  the  piece,  backs  together,  the  turnbuckles  outside. 

13.  At  the  command  Take  Equipments,  the  gunner  distribufes 
the  equipments.  No.  1,  with  the  assistance  of  No.  3,  takes  out  the 
sponge.  The  gunner  equips  himself  with  the  belt  containing  the 
hausse  and  priming  wire,  and  with  the  knee-guard  and  the  finger- 
stall, wearing  the  last  on  the  second  finger  of  the  left  hand.  No. 
3  wears  the  tube  pouch  containing  friction  tubes  and  the  lan- 
yard. Nos.  1  and  2  wear  bricoles  hung  from  the  left  shoulder  to 
the  right  side.  Nos.  2  and  5  wear  haversacks  hung  from  the  right 
shoulder  to  the  left  side. 

THE   COMMANDS. 

14.  In  loading  by  detail,  the  instructor  gives  all  the  commands. 
The  commands  are:  Load  hy  detail,  Load,  2,  3,  4;  Sponge,  2, 

3,  4;  Ram,  2,  3;  Ready;  Fire;  and  Cease  Firing. 

When  the  service  of  the  piece  is  not  executed  by  detail,  the 
commands  of  the  instructor  are,  either  Load,  Commence  Firing, 
and  Cease  Firing  ;  or,  Commence  Firing  and  Cease  Firing. 
After  the  command  Comence  Firing,  the  action  is  continued  with- 
out further  commands  from  the  instructor  until  the  command  Cease 
Firing. 

The  last  command  is  repeated  by  the  chief  of  piece  and  the 
gunner. 

duties  of  the  cannoneers. 

15.  Duties  of  tlie  Gunner. — In  action,  the  gunner  gives  or  re- 
peats the  commands  of  execution.  At  the  command  or  signal  to 
commence  firing,  he  gives  the  word  Load;  plants  the  left  foot  op- 
posite to  the  knob  of  the  cascable;  places  the  right  knee  wpon  tlie 
ground  near,  and  on  the  left  of  the  trail ;  places  the  hausse,  when . 
it  is  used;  seizes  the  lunette  with  the  right  hand,  to  give  the  direc- 


MANUAL   FOR   LIGHT   ARTILLERY.  58 

tion,  and  at  the  same  time  tends  vent  with  the  second  finger  of  the 
left  hand,  the  thumb  on  the  base  of  the  breech. 

As  soon  as  the  piece  is  loaded  and  aimed,  he  removes  the  hausse; 
then  rising  pricks  the  cartridge;  gives  t|ie  word  Heady,  and  step- 
ping clear  of  the  wheel  to  the  side  whence  he  can  best  observe  the 
effect  of  the  shot,  gives  the  command,  Fire.  He  continues  the  ac- 
tion in  the  same  manner,  without  farther  commands  from  the  in- 
structor, until  the  firing  is  ordered  to  cease. 

When  the  instructor,  instead  of  giving  the  command  Commence 
Firing,  gives  that  of  Load,  the  gunner  repeats  it,  and  performs 
the  same  duties  as  just  described,  except  that  he  does  not  command 
Fire,  until  the  firing  is  ordered  to  commence. 

When  the  instructor  gives  all  the  commands,  the  gunner  performs 
the  same  duties,  but  without  repeating  the  commands. 

16.  Duties  of  No.  1. — Until  the  command  Load,  he  stands 
square  to  the  front,  in  line  with  the  axle-tree,  holding  the  sponge 
staff  about  the  middle  in  the  right  hand,  and  trailing  it  at  an  angle 
of  45°. 

For  the  convenience  of  instruction,  the  duties  of  No.  1  are  di- 
vided into  motions. 

First  motion. — At  the  command  Load,  No.  1  faces  to  his  left, 
steps  obliquely  to  his  right  with  the  right  foot,  and  brings  the  sponge 
into  a  perpendicular  position  over  the  right  toe,  the  elbow  close  to 
the  side,  the  right  hand  at  the  height  of  the  elbow.  ^ 

Second  motion. — He  plants  tlie  left  foot  near,  and  in  line  with  the 
wheel,  and  inclines  the  sponge  across  the  body  to  the  left,  the  right 
opposite  to  the  middle  of  the  body. 

Third  motion. — He  places  the  right  foot  twelve  inches  to  the 
right  of  the  left,  heels  on  the  same  line;  brings  the  sponge  into  a 
horizontal  position,  and  extending  the  hands  towards  the  ends  of 
the  staff,  back  of  the  right  hand  up,  that  of  the  left  down,  rests  the 
sponge-head  against  the  face  of  the  piece;  the  knees  straight,  the 
feet  turned  out  equally,  and  the  body  inclined  forward. 

Fourth  motion. — He  introduces  the  sponge,  drops  the  left  hand 
by  the  side  of  his  thigh,  and  shoves  the  sponge  to  the  bottom  of  the 
chamber. 

17.  At  the  command  SpOxNGE,  he  carefully  sponges  out  the 
chamber. 

Second  motion. — He  draws  out  the  sponge,  pressing  it  upon  the 
bottom  Q§  the  bore,  seizes  the  staff  near  the  sponge-head  with  the 
lel't  hand,  back  down,  and  rests  it  against  the  face  of  the  piece. 

Third  motion. — He  turns  the  sponge  over  by  bringing  the  hands 


64  MANUAL    FOR   LIGHT   ARTILLERY. 

together  at  the  middle  of  the  staif,  and  giving  it  a  cant  with  each, 
throws  the  sponge  over;  at  the  same  time  turning  the  wrists  so  as  to 
bring  the  stalf  horizontal.  He  then  extends  the  hands  towards  the 
ends  of  the  staff,  back  of  the  left  up,  that  of  the  right  down. 

Fourth  motion. — As  soon  as  the  charge  is  inserted  he  introduces 
the  rammer-head  into  the  muzzle,  and  joins  the  left  hand  to  the 
right. 

18.  At  the  command  Kam,  he  sends  the  charge  carefully  home, 
throwing  the  left  hand  over  the  piece. 

Second  ynotion. — He  draws  out  the  sponge  with  the  ri^ht  hand, 
letting  it  slide  through  tne  hand  as  far  as  the  middle  of  the  staff, 
when  he  grasps  it  firmly,  and  seizing  i<-.  close  to  the  rammer-head 
with  the  lelt  hand,  back  up,  rests  it  against  the  face  of  the  piece. 

Third  motion. — He  raises  the  sponge  to  the  height  of  his  breast, 
and  steps  back,  right  foot  .first,  to  his  position  opposite  to  the  axle- 
tree  ;  quits  the  staff  Ivith  the  left  hand,  and  throwing  the  sponge 
uppermost,  holds  it  at  a  trail  in  the  right.  He  remains  facing  the 
piece  until  the  command  Load,  when  he  steps  up  and  performs  the 
duties  just  described. 

When  the  loading  is  not  by  detail.  No.  1  goes  through  all  his 
duties  at  the  command  Load. 

At  the  flash  of  the  gun,  or  command  Load,  he  rtcpsup  and  again 
performs  his  duties  as  before,  and  so  on,  until  the  command" Cease 
Firing  is  given.  At  this  command  he  resumes  his  post,  faces  to 
the  front,  first  sponging  out  the  piece  if  it  has  been  commenced. 

19.  Duties  of  NoH.  2  and  5. — Until  the  command  Load,  Nos.  2 
and  5  .stand  square  to  the  front,  the  former  in  line  with  the  axle- 
tree,  the  latter  on  the  left  of  the  ammunition  mule,  or  chests. 

At  this  command,  No.  2  faces  about  and  goes  to  the -ammunition 
chesr;  and  No.  5,  having  received  a  round  of  ammunition  from  No. 
4-,  carries  it  to  the  piece  ;  placing  hims^elf  opposite  to  No.  1,  and  in 
line  with  the  wheel,  inserts  the  charge  as  soon  as  No.  1  has  sponged, 
then  steps  back  to  the  post  of  No.  2,  opposite  to  the  axle-tree,  and 
there  remains  facing  the  piece  until  it  is  fired,  when  he  returns  to 
the  ammunition  chest,  No.  2;  having  received  a  round  of  ammuni- 
tion, carries  it  to  within  five  yards  of  the  wheel,  where  he  remains 
until  the  piece  is  fired ;  he  then  moves  forward  and  executes  the 
remaindxjr  of  the  service  as  just  described  for  No.  5. 

Nos.  2  and  5,  in  moving  to  and  from  the. piece,  go  at  a  run  and 
pass  each  other  by  the  right.  * 

In  inserting  the  charge  they  should  be  careful  to  keep  the  seam 
down,  and  to  place  the  fuze  in  the  axis  of  the  bore. 


MANUAL   FOR   LIGHT   ARTILLERY.  65 

At  the  command  Cease  Firing,  they  resume  their  posts,  facing 
to  the  front. 

20.  Duties  of  No.  3. — No.  3  holds  the  handle  of  the  lanyard  in 
the  right  hand,  the  cord  passing  between  the  fingers,  the  hook  be- 
tween the  forefinger  and  thumb.  At  the  command  Load,  he  takes 
a  friction  tube  in  the  left  hand,  and  passes  the  hook  of  the  lanyard 
through  the  eye  of  the  tube  from  right  to  left,  continuing  to  hold  the 
hook  between  the  thumb  and  forefinger.  At  the  word  PiEADY,  he 
faces  the  piece,  and  steps  up,  keeping  outside  of  the  wheel ;  inserts 
the  tube,  steps  back  with  the  right  foot,  breaks  to  his  rear  a  full 
pace  with  the  left  foot,  and  holds  the  lanyard  slightly  stretched,  the 
handle  at  the  height  of  the  knee,  back  of  the  hand  up,  the  left  hand 
against  the  thigh.  At  the  command  Fire,  he  gives  a  smart  pull 
upon  the  lanyard,  being  careful  to  keep  the  hand  low,  and  then  re- 
sumes his  post. 

At  the  command  Cease  Firing,  he  winds  the  lanyard  upon  its 
handle,  and  if  dry,  puts  it  in  the  tube  pouch. 

21.  Duties  of  No.  4. — No.  4  attends  at  the  ammunition  chest, 
serves  out  ammunition,  and  prepares  and  inserts  fuses. 

CHANGING   POSTS. 

22.  In  order  to  instruct  the  men  in  all  the  duties  at  the  piece,  the 
instructor  causes  them  to  change  posts  by  the  following  commands  : 

1.      Change  Posts.     2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  the  cannoneers  on  the  right  of  the  piece 
face  about,  take  off  their  equipments,  and  place  them  on  the  piece 
or  ammunition  chests.  At  the  second  command,  all  step  off,  each 
taking  the  post  and  equipments  of  the  one  in  his  front ;  No.  2  pass- 
ing around  the  muzzle  to  gain  the  post  of  No.  1,  and  No.  4  around 
the  ammunition  chest  to  take  that  of  No.  5. 

23.  During  the  intervals  of  rest,  the  instructor  will  explain  to  the 
men  the  nomenclatures  of  the  piece  and  carriage,  and  the  names 
and  uses  of  the  implements  and  equipments. 

SERVICE     OF      THE     PIECE     WITH    DETACHMENTS    OF    DIFFERENT 

STRENGTHS. 

24.  Two  men.  The  gunner  commands,  tends  vent,  points,  pricks, 
primes,  and  fires.     No.  1  sponges,  serves  ammunition,  and  loads. 


56  MANUAL   FOR   LIGHT   ARTILLERY. 

Three  men.  The  gunner  commands,  tends  vent^  points,  pricks, 
primes,  and  fires.  No.  1  sponges.  No.  2  serves  ammunition,  and 
loads. 

Four  men.  The  gunner  commands,  tends  vent,  points  and  pricks. 
No.  1  sponges.  No.  2  serves  ammunition,  and  loads.  No.  3  primes 
and  fires. 

Five  Men.  No.  4  attends  at  the  chests,  and  serves  ammunition 
to  No.  2,  occasionally  alternating  with  him.  The  other  numbers 
serve  as  with  four  men. 

Six  men.  No.  5  alternate  habitually  with  No.  2.  No.  4  remains 
at  the  chests.     The  other  numbers  serve  as  with  four  men. 

THE  LOCKING   ROPE. 

25.  The  locking  rope  is  habitually  coiled  and  suspended  from 
the  front  arc  of  the  saddle  of  the  shaft  mule.  AVhen  it  becomes 
necessary  to  use  it  in  order  to  prevent  the  too  great  recoil  of  the 
piece,  No.  2,  on  receiving  orders  to  that  efiect,  brings  it  up  from  the 
mule,  and,  with  the  assistance  of  No.  1,  locks  the  wheels.  No.  2 
attaches  one  end  of  it  by  a  timber  hitch  to  the  folly  of  the  left 
wheel,  near  the  ground,  and  No.  1  attaches  the  other  end  in  the 
same  manner  to  the  right  wheel,  the  rope  passing  over  the  stock. 

The  length  of  the  rope  should.be  regulated  by  the  nature  of  the 
ground. 

When  in  firing  it  becomes  necessary  to  run  the  piece  "forward,  the 
locking  rope  is  detached  ;  No.  2  carries  it;  and  it  is  re-attached  as 
soon  as  the  piece  is  in  battery.  When  not  in  use  it  is  placed  on  the 
ground,  outside  of  and  near  No.  2. 

When  the  firing  is  to  be  discontinued,  No.  2  returns  it  to  its  place 
on  the  saddle.  The  locking  rope  should  not  be  used  when  it  can 
be  avoided;  since  on  rough  ground  it  is  liable  to  break  the  wheels, 
and  on  soft  ground  to  upset  the  carriage. 

ATTACHING  AND  DETACHING  THE  SHAFTS. 

26.  To  attach  the  shafts,  the  instructor  commands  : 

Attach  Shafts. 

TRe  gunner  raises  the  trail ;  No.  3  springs  in  between  the  shafts, 
seizes  them  about  twelve  inches  from  the  cross-bar,  and  places  the 
supporting  bar  upon  the  trail ;  the  gunner  then  puts  in  the  key  and 


MANUAL   FOR   LIGHT   ARTILLERY.  5T 

lowers  the  trail  to  the  ground.  No.  1,  with  the  assistance  of  No.  3, 
puts  up  the  sponge  ;  and  the  cannoneers  about  the  piece  assume  their 
posts  as  in  the  order  of  march,  shaft  mule  hitched  in. 

27.  To  detach  the  shafts,  the  instructor  commands  : 

Detach  Shafts. 

The  gunner  raises  the  trail,  and  unkeys  the  shafts;  No.  3  springs 
in  between  them,  seizes  them  about  twelve  inches  from  the  cross- 
bar, (the  gunner  at  the  same  time  lowering  the  trail  to  the  ground,) 
detaches,  and  places  them  as  prescribed  in  No.  12. 

No.  1,  with  the  assistance  of  No.  3,  takes  out  the  sponge;  and  the 
cannoneers  about  the  piece  take  their  posts  as  in  battery. 

MOVING  THE  PIECE  BY  MEANS  OF   THE  CANNONEERS. 

28.  The  shafts  detached.     The  instructor  commands : 

1.  By  hand  to  the  front  {or  rear?)     2.  March, 

At  the  first  command  Nos.  1  and  2,  facing  to  the  front,  (or  rear,) 
apply  themselves  to  the  wheels  with  the  hand  nearest  to  the  piece, 
the  former  carrying  the  sponge,  and  the  latter  the  locking  rope  in 
the  hand  farthest  from  the  piece;  the  gunner  raises  the  trail. 

At  the  second  command,  all  step  off.  At  the  command.  Halt, 
they  resume  their  posts. 

29.  ^'hen  hricoles  are  to  he  used,  the  shafts  attached.  The  in- 
structor commands  : 

1.  By  hricoles  to  the  front  (or  rear.)     2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  Nos.  1  and  2  attach  the  hooks  of  their 
bricolcs  to  the  washerhooks,  and  hold  the  rope  with  the  hand  nearest 
to  the  piece;  the  gunner  and  No.  3  apply  themselves  to  the  shafts; 
all  fiicing  in  the  direction  they  are  to  move. 

At  the  second  command,  all  step  off. 

At  the  command.  Halt,  they  resume  their  posts ;  Nos.  1  and  2 
unhooking  their  hricoles  with  the  hand  nearest  to  the  piece. 

30.  Vtithout  hricoles,  the  shafts  attached.  The  instructor  com- 
mands : 

1.  Forward.     2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  the  gunner  and  No.  3  apply  themselves  to 
the  shafts;  Nos.  1  and  2  at  the  wheels,  as  in  No.  28. 


58  MANUAL   FOR   LIGHT   ARTILLERY. 

At  the  second  command,  all  step  oflF.  At  the  command,  Halt, 
they  resume  their  posts. 

When  the  movement  requires  it,  Nos.  4  and  5  carry  the  ammuni- 
tion chests  to  their  new  position. 

No.  3  carries  the  shafts  when  they  are  detached.  "^ 

SERVICE  OF    SEVERAL  PIECES. 

31.  Forming,  and  marching  the  detachments  to  and  from  the 
pieces,  are  executed  as  in  field  artillery. 

POSTING  AND  CHANGING  THE  POSITION  OF  DETACHMENTS. 

32.  To  form  the  order  of  r^iai'cli,  the  detachments  being  in  line  in 
front.     The  instructor  commands  : 

1.  Detachments,  to  your  i)osts.     2,  MaRCH. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  pieces  face  the  detachments 
to  the  right.  At  the  second,  the  detachments,  Nos.  1  and  2  opening 
out,  file  to  their  posts,  each  member  halting  at  his  place.  The 
chiefs  of  pieces  face  them  to  the  front  by  the  command,  About 
Face. 

To  form  the  order  of  rtiarch,  the  detachments  being  in  line,  in  rear, 
the  instructor  gives  the  same  commands. 

At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  pieces  face  the  detachments 
to  tlip  left,  at  the  second,  the  detachments  march  to  their  posts ; 
each  number  halting  as  before. 

33.  From  the  order  of  march,  to  the  front  (or  rear.)  The  in- 
structor commands : 

1.  Detachments  front  (or  rear.)     2.  March. 

To  the  front.  At  the  second  command,  repeated  by  the  chiefs  of 
pieces,  the  detachments.  No.  3  and  the  gunner  closing  to  the  centre 
when  clear  of  the  mule,  march  to  the  front,  file  to  the  left,  and  are 
halted,  and  faced  to  the  front  by  the  chiefs  of  pieces. 

To  the  rear.  At  the  first  command,  the  chiefs  of  pieces  face  the 
detachments  about,  Nos.  4  and  5  standing  fast.  At  the  second 
command,  the  detachments,  Nos.  1  and  2  closing  to  the  centre  as 
they  advance,  march  to  the  rear,  file  to  the  left,  are  halted  and 
faced  to  the  front  by  the  chiefs  of  pieces.     In  both  cases  Nos.  4  and 


MANUAL   FOR   LIGHT   ARTILLERY.  59 

6  take  their  places  on  the  left,  when  the  detachment  is  in  the  posi- 
tion ordered. 

HITCHING  AND  UNHITCHING. 

34.  To  the  front.     The  instructor  commands : 

Hitch  to  the  front. 

At  this  command,  the  shafts  are  attached,  (No.  26,)  and  the 
gunner  and  No.  3  brine:  the  piece  about,  each  by  means  of  the  shaft 
on  his  own  side. 

The  mule,  passing  on  the  right  of  the  piece,  is  led  by  its  driver 
to  the  front  and  hitched  in,  the  driver  backing  the  mule  and  buck- 
ling the  breast  straps  to  the  staples ;  the  gunner  and  No.  3  buckling 
the  thill  straps  around  the  shafts  through  the  staples,  and  the  breech 
straps  to  the  staples. 

35.  To  the  right  {or  left.')     The  instructor  commands : 

Hitcli  to  the  right  (or  left.) 

At  this  command  the  shafts  are  attached,  and  turned  in  the 
proper  direction,  and  the  mule,  inclining  to  the  right  or  left,  is  led 
to  its  place,  and  hitched  in  as  before. 

36.  To  the  rear.     The  instructor  commands : 

Hitch  to  the  rear. 

At  this  command,  the  shafts  are  attached,  the  mule  brought  up, 
faced  about,  and  hitched  in  as  before. 

37.  In  hitching  in  to  the  front,  the  carriage  and  ammunition 
mules,  the  former  first  passing  the  latter,  are  led  up  to  their  proper 
positions. 

In  hitching  in  to  the  right,  (or  left,)  the  mules  are,  in  like  man- 
ner, led  up  and  wheeled  to  the  right  or  left,  at  the  proper  intervals. 

In  hitching  in  to  the  rear,  the  carriage  and  ammunition  mules, 
following  the  shaft  mule  in  the  order  named,  are  led  past  the  piece 
to  their  position  in  the  rear. 

For  the  position  of  the  mules,  see  No.  3. 


60  MANUAL   FOR   LIGHT   ARTILLERY. 

UNHITCHING  AND   COMING  INTO  ACTION. 

38.  To  the  front.     The  instructor  commands  : 

Action  Front.  m 

At  this  command,  the  mule  is  unhitched,  the  driver  unbuckling 
the  breast  straps,  and  the  gunner  and  No.  3  the  breech  and  thill 
straps.  The  driver  then  leads  the  mule  to  its  place  in  rear,  and  the 
gunner  and  No.  3,  supporting  the  shafts  till  the  mule  is  taken  out, 
bring  the  piece  about.  This  done^  the  shafts  are  detached  and 
placed  as  above. 

The  carriage  and  ammunition  mules  are  led  at  once  to  their  posi- 
tions, (see  No.  3.) 

39.  To  the  right,  left,  or  rear.     The  instructor  commands  : 

Action  right,  (left,  or  rear.) 

At  this  command,  the  mule  is  unhitched;  the  piece  placed  in 
the  required  direction ;  the  shafts  detached,  and  each  mule  led  to 
its  proper  position. 

In  action  rear,  the  carriage  and  ammunition  mules  pass  by  the 
right  of  the  piece  to  their  places  in  rear.  The  mules  face  towards 
the  piece  as  in  action  front. 

PACKING   AND   UNPACKING. 

40.  The  mule  unhitched,  and  shafts  detached.  The  instructor 
commands  : 

1.  Prepare  to  pack  the  Piece.     2.  Pack  the  Piece. 

At  the  first  command,  the  driver  leads  the  shaft  mule  three  yards 
in  rear  of  the  piece,  the  crupper  towards  the  trail;  No.  1,  after  re- 
moving the  right  cap  square,  takes  the  sponge  and  inserts  the  ram- 
mer head  to  the  bottom  of  the  bore ;  and  No.  2,  after  removing  the 
left  cap  square,  takes  the  handspike,  and  passing  one  end  to  No.  3, 
places  it*  under  the  knob  of  the  cascable,  the  loop  around  the  neck. 
All  face  towards  the  mule  and  prepare  to  raise  the  piece. 

At  the  second  command,  they  raise  the  piece.  No.  1  inclining 
slightly  to  his  left  to  clear  the  wheel,  and  place  it  upon  the  saddle, 


MANUAL .  f OE   LIGHT   ARTILLERY,  61 

tlie  trunnions  in  their  beds,  the  vent  up,  and  the  cascable  towards 
the  head  of  the  mule.  No.  1,  then  withdrawing  the  sponge,  places 
it,  and  the  handspike  which  he  receives  from  No.  2,  upon  the  car< 
riage,'  and  goes  to  the  shafts.  No.  3,  with  the  assistance  of  No.  2, 
secures  the  piece  firmly  to  the  saddle  by  means  of  the  lashing 
rope. 

For  this  purpose  he  passes  one  end  of  the  rope  (the  other  being 
fastened  to  the  near  hook  of  the  lashing  girt)  over  the  piece  to  No. 
2,  who  passes  it  back  beneath  the  transoms,  receives  it  again  over  the 
piece,  and  then  fastens  it,  drawing  the  rope  tightly  to  the  ofi"  hook 
of  the  lashing  girth.  This  done,  No.  1  turns  the  shafts  round  and 
carries  them  near  the  mule,  and  Nos.  2  and  3  seizing  them  near  the 
cross-bar,  with  the  a.ssistance  of  No.  1  acting  at  the  ends,  raise  and 
place  them  upon  the  mule,  resting  the  cross-bar  upon  the  cascable, 
and  the  shafts  upon  the  arcs  ]  Nos.  2  and  3,  the  latter  first  putting 
the  key  in  its  place,  then  secure  the  shafts  firmly  by  means  of  the 
lashing  straps. 

PACKING  THE  CARRIAGE  UPON  THE  MULE. 

41.  The  instructor  commands : 

1.  Prepare  to  pack  the  Carriage.     2.  Pack  the  Carriage. 

At  the  first  command,  the  driver  leads  the  carriage  mule  in  front 
of  the  carriage,  and  three  yards  from  it,  the  crupper  towards  the 
head  of  the  carriage ;  the  gunner,  first  replacing  the  cap  squares, 
raises  the  head  of  the  carriage,  and  Nos.  4  and  5,  at  the  right  and 
left  wheels  respectively,  remove  the  linchpins  and  washers,  take  off" 
the  wheels,  and  lay  them  on  the  ground  behind  them,  the  larger 
end  of  the  nave  uppermost.  This  done,  Nos.  4  and  5  replace  the 
linchpins  and  washers,  and  seize  the  arms  of  the  axle-tree;  and  the 
gunner,  quitting  the  head  of  the  carriage,  seizes  the  trail;  all  face 
towards  the  mule,  and  prepare  to  raise  the  carriage. 

At  the  second  command,  they  raise  the  carriage  and  place  it  upon 
the  saddle,  between  the  transoms;  the  axle-tree  just  in  front  of  the 
forward  arc,  the  understraps  upon  the  arc,  and  the  nuts  of  the  trun- 
nion plate  bolts  just  in  rear  of  it.  The  carriage  having  been  placed. 
No.  4,  with  the  assistance  of  No.  5,  secures  it  with  the  lashing  cord, 
taking  two  turns  with  the  cord  round  the  stock  and  transoms,  and 
then  tying  it.  This  done,  they  suspend  the  wheels  by  the  fellies, 
from  the  arms  of  the  axle  trees ;  the  large  end  of  the  nave  between 


62  MANUAL  FOR  LIGHT  ARTILLERY. 

the  arcs,  and  resting  against  the  leather  of  the  outside  bar,  and  se- 
cure them  firmly  by  means  of  the  lashing  straps. 

The  whole  is  then  strongly  bound  by  the  lashing  rope.  For  this 
purpose,  No.  5,  having  fastened  one  end  to  the  near  hook  of  the  lash- 
ing girth,  passes  the  rope  up  from  the  inside  between  the  nearest 
convenient  felly  and  spoke,  and  conlinues  it  on,  pressing  it  in  front 
of  and  against  the  outside  part  of  the  nave,  embracing  one  or  more 
spokes^  to  the  top  felly,  under  which,  and  over  the  stock,  he  passes 
it  to  No.  4,  who,  after  passing  it  round  a  spoke  of  the  off  wheel,  re- 
turns it  under  the  transoms  of  the  saddle  to  No.  5  by  whom  it  is 
passed  round  a  spoke  and  again  handed  over  the  stock  to  No.  4. 
The  latter  then  cames  it  down  under  the  top  felly,  around  the 
spokes,  and  against  the  nave,  as  with  the  near  wheel,  to  the  off 
hook  of  the  lashing  girth,  and  then  fastens  it. 

For  greater  security,  the  gunner  may  tie  the  fellies  of  the  two 
wheels  together,  behind  the  elevating  screw,  with  the  locking  rope. 

'  PACKING   THE   AMMUNITION    CHESTS    UPON   THE   MULE. 

42.  The  instructor  commands: 

1.  Prepare  to  pack  the  Chests,     2.  Pack  the  Chests. 

At  the  first  command,  the  driver  leads  the  mule  from  the  rear  to 
the  distance  of  one  yard  from  the  chests,  its  head  still  facing 
them;  Nos.  2  and  4  hasten  to  the  chest  on  the  right,  and  Nos.  1 
and  5  to  that  on  the  left,  and  seize  them  by  the  handles;  Nos.  1 
and  2  by  those  in  front,  and  Nos.  4  and  5  by  those  in  rear. 

At  the  second  command,  they  raise  the  chests,  carry  them  to  the 
saddle,  and  attach  the  chains  to  the  hooks,  the.  chests  inclining 
slightly  towards  the  rear  of  the  mule ;  Nos.  4  and  5  then  secure 
them  with  the  lashing  straps  and  lashing  rope* 

This  duty  might  be  done  with  three  men,  by  first  hooking  on  one 
chest,  and  letting  one  man  support  it  until  the  other  is  hooked  on. 

PACKING   the    mules   AT    ONE    COMMAND. 

43.  The  instructor  commands  : 

Pack  the  7nules. 

At  this  command,  the  driver  leads  the  mules  to  their  proper  posi- 
tions; Nos.  1,  2,  and  3  proceed/ to  pack  the  piece,  and  Nos.  4,  5, 


MANUAL  FOR  LIGHT  ARTILLERY.  63 

and  the  gunner  the  carriage,  as  soon  as  the  piece  is  removed.    This 
done,  Nos.  1,  2,  4,  and  5  pack  the  ammunition  chests. 

Each  cannoneer  performs  his  duty  as  directed  in  Nos.  40,  41,,42. 

UNPACKING   THE    CARRIAGE. 

44.  The  instructor  commands : 

1.  Prepare  to  unpack  the  Carriage.     2.  Unpack  the  Carriage. 

At  the  first  command,  Nos.  4  and  5  unbuckle  the  lashing  straps, 
detach  the  lashing  rope,  take  oflf  the  wheels,  and  lay  them  upon  the 
ground,  the  large  end  of  the  nave  uppermost.  If  the  locking  rope 
has  been  used,  the  gunner  unties  and  detaches  it.  Nos.  4  and  5 
then  untie  and  remove  the  lashing  cord,  and  facing  to  the  rear,  seize 
the  arms  of  the  axle-tree;  the  gunner  facing  to  the  front  seizes  the 
trail.     All  prepare  to  raise  the  carriage. 

At  the  second  command,  they  raise  the  carriage,  and  carry  it 
three  yards  in  rear  of  the  mule;  the  gunner  then,  placing  the  trail 
upon  the  ground,  seizes  the  head  of  the  carriage  and  holds  it  up ; 
Nos.  4  and  5,  removing  the  linchpins  and  washers,  retain  them  in 
their  hands,  put  on  the  wheels,  and  then  replace  the  linchpins  and 
washers.  The  gunner  puts  up  the  locking  rope,  and  Nos.  4  and  5 
the  lashing  rope. 

unpacking  the  piece. 

45.  The  instructor  commands  : 

1.    Preparie  to  unpack  the  Piece,     2.  Unpack  the  Piece. 

At  the  first  command,  the  driver  leads  the  mule  in  rear  of  and 
three  yards  from  the  carriage,  the  crupper  towards  the  trail;'  Nos. 
2  and  3  unbuckle  the  lashing  straps,  and,  with  the  assistance  of  No. 
1  acting  at  the  ends,  disengage  the  shafts  from  the  saddle;  No.  1 
then  takes  hold  of  them  near  the  cross-bar,  turns  them  round,  and 
lays  them  on  the  ground,  in  the  position  described  in  No.  12.  This 
done,  Nos.  2  and  3  detach  the  lashing  rope ;  and  No.  1,  having 
taken  the  sponge  and  handspike,  hands  the  latter  to  No.  2,  and  in- 
serts the  former  into  the  bore  of  the  piece.  No.  2  then  applies  his 
handspike  as  in  No.  40 ;  when  all,  facing  towards  the  carriage,  pre- 
pare to  rais-3  the  piece. 


64  MANUAL  FOR  LIGHT  ARTILLERY. 

At  the  second  command,  they  raise  the  piece,  No.  1  inclining 
slightly  to  his  right  to  clear  the  wheel,  and  place  it  upon  its  car- 
riage. No.  1  puts  up  the  sponge,  No.  2  the  handspike,  and  No.  3 
secures  the  cap  squares. 

UNPACKING   THE    AMMUNITION   CHESTS. 

46.  The  instructor  commands : 

1.  Prepare  to  unpach  the  Chests.     2.  Unpack  THE  Chests. 

At  the  first  command,  Nos.  2  and  4  seize  the  handles  of  the  right 
chest,  and  Nos.  1  and  5  those  of  the  left:  Nos.  4  and  5  having  first 
unbuckled  the  lashing  straps,  and  detached  the  lashing  rope. 

At  the  second  command,  they  raise  the  chests,  unhook  them,  and 
lay  them  on  the  ground  one  yard  from  the  mule. 

UNPACKING   THE    MULES   AT    ONE    COMMAND. 

47.  The  instructor  commands  : 

Uwpach  the  onules. 

At  this  command,  the  drivers  place  the  shaft  and  carriage  mules 
eight  yards  apart,  the  crupper  towards  the  place  the  piece  is  to  oc- 
cupy; the  gunner,  and  Nos.  4  and  5  proceed  to  unpack  the  car- 
riage, and  Nos.  1,  2,  and  3  the  piece.  The  sponge  and  handspike 
are  not  taken  from  the  carriage  until  it  is  on  the  ground,  nor  is  the 
piece  taken  from  the  saddle  until  the  carriage  is  mounted  on  its 
wheels.  Each  cannoneer  performs  his  duty  as  directed  in  Nos.  44 
and  45. 

If  the  ammunition  chests  are  to  be  unpacked,  it  is  done  as  soon 
as  the  piece  is  mounted,  as  prescribed  in  No.  46. 


CHAPTER  IV. 

MANUAL  FOR  HEAVY  ARTILLERY- 


SERVICE    or   THE   PIECE. 

1.  The  manner  of  serving  heavy  artillery  varies  with  the  kind  of 
piece,  and  the  carriage  upon  which  it  is  mounted. 

2.  There  are  four  kinds  of  heavy  pieces  in  the  land  service,  viz. : 
the  Gun,  the  Howitzer,  the  Mortar,  and  the  Columbiad. 

They  are  distinguished  according  to  their  use,  as  siege,  garrison, 
and  sea-coast  artillery. 

For  their  service  six  distinct  kinds  of  carriages  dre  necessary, 
viz. :  the  siege^  the  harhette,  the  casemate,  the  fiank-casemate,  the 
columbiad,  and  the  carriage  upon  which  the  Mortar  is  mounted, 
which'  is  technically  called  its  bed. 

Siege  art illert/ ia  used  in  the  attack  of  places ;  and  as  it  follows 
armies  in  their  operations,  is  mounted  upon  carriages  which  serve 
for  its  transportation. 

Garrison  artillery  is  employed  in  the  defence  of  forts,  more  es- 
pecially those  of  the  interior;  and  sea-coast  artillery,  consisting  of 
the  heaviest  calibres,  is  used  for  the  defence  of  the  sea-coast.  Their, 
carriages  do  not  subserve  the  purpose  of  transportation;  the  bar- 
bette carriage  may,  however,  be  used  for  moving  its  piece  for  short 
distances,  as  from  one  front  of  a  work  to  another. 


66 


MANUAL   FOR    HEAVY  ARTILLERY. 


The  following  are  the  kinds  and  calibres  of  Heavy  Artillery 
used  in  the  land  service  of  the  United  States: 


Kind  of  Ordnance. 


1 


j  Siege  and  Garrison.     < 

Sea-coast.  < 

owiTZERS.    I  Siege  and  Garrison.    < 


Guns. 


H 


CoLUMBiADS.   y  Sea-coast. 


Mortars. 


Siege. 

Sea-coast. 

Stone. 
Coeliorn. 


CaUbre, 


12-p(1r. 
IS-pdr. 
24-pdr. 
32-pdr. 
42-pdr. 

8-inch. 
24-pdr. 

8-inch. 
10-inch. 

SScii. 
10-inch. 

8-inch. 
lO-inch. 
10-inch. 
]  3-inch. 
16-inch. 
24-pdr. 


Material. 


\-  Iron. 


I  Bronze 


3.  The  detachment  for  serving  a  piece  is  formed  in  two  ranks, 
and  numbered  from  right  to  left.  The  odd  numbers  from  the  rear 
rank,  and  serve  on  the  right  of  the  piece;  the  even  numbers  and 
the  gunner  form  the  front  rank,  and  serve  on  its  left.  The  right 
file  is  numbered  1  and  2;  the  next  file  3  and  4;  the  gunner  is  un- 
covered, and  generally  on  the  left  of  No.  4;  and  on  his  left  nre  as 
many  files  as  are  deemed  necessary,  numbered  5  and  6,  7  and  8,  etc. 

4.  A  piece  is  in  battery  when  it  is  in  the  proper  position  to  be 
fired. 

The  right  of  a  piece,  when  in  battery,  is  the  right  of  the  can- 
noneer when  facing  to  the  object  to  be  fired  at;  the  front  is  the  di- 
rection towards  which  the  muzzle  points. 

The  term  battery  is  applied  to  one  or  more  pieces,  or  to  the  places 
where  the  pieces  are  fired. 

A  jjlatform  is  the  support  upon  which  a  piece  is  manoeuvred 
when  in  battery. 

5.  The  detachment  is  marched  to  the  battery  by  a  flank.  It  is 
halted,  and  faced  to  the  iront,  when  its  centre  is  opposite  to  the 
middle  of  the  platform,  and  (if  there  be  room)  four  yards  from  it. 


MANUAL    FOR   HEAVY   ARTILLERY.  67 

6.  To  cause  tlie  cannoneers  to  take  their  posts,  the  instructor 
commands: 

1.  Detachment,  to  your  posts.     2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  the  detachment  is  faced  to  the  right  hy  the 
chief  of  piece. 

At  the  second  command,  it  files  to  the  left,  and  the  two  flanks 
separate ;  the  rear  rank  marching  to  the  right  of  the  piece,  and  the 
front  rank  to  the  left,  in  lines  parallel  to  its  axis.  As  each  man  ar- 
rives at  his  post,  he  halts  and  faces  to  the  piece;  Nos.  1  and  2  one 
yard  from  the  epaulment,  parapet,  or  scarp,  their  breasts  eighteen 
inches  outside  of  the  wheels  of  the  carriage  or  cheeks  of  the  mor- 
tar bed,  as  the  case  may  be;  and  the  other  numbers  and  the 
gunner,  dressing  on  Nos.  1  and  2  respectively  at  intervals  of  one 
yard,  except  that  between  Nos.  3  and  5  there  is  an  interval  of  two 
yards.  With  the  mortar,  Nos.  1  and  2  are  opposite  to  the  front  ma- 
noeuvring bolts,  and  Nos.  3  and  4  opposite  to  those  in  the  rear. 

Under  the  Jire  of  the  enemy,  the  men  will  be  directed  to  cover 
themselves  by  the  parapet  as  much  as  may  be  consistent  with  the 
execution  of  their  duties. 

7.  Tlie  chief  of  inece  (a  non-commissioned  officer)  assists  the  in- 
structor in  efiecting  a  correct  execution  of  the  movements.  While 
at  the  battery,  he  will  generally  be  one  yard  outside  of  the  can- 
noneers of  the  left,  facing  the  piece,  and  two  yards  in  rear  of  the 
platform  or  rearmost  part  of  the  carriage.  He  communicates  and 
attends  to  the  execution  of  all  orders  he  may  receive  in  relation  to 
the  service  of  his  piece;  as,  for  instance,  the  kind  of  ammunition 
t<|^|?e  used,  the  weight  of  charge,  the  kind  and  length  of  fuze,  etc. 

o.  The  movements  of  the  cannoneers  at  the  battery  are  in  douhle 
quick  time. 

0.  Posts  are  changed  at  the  discretion  of  the  instructor. 

10.  To  allow  the  detachment  to  rest,  the  instructor  commands: 

In  place.     Rest;  or,  Kest. 

The  cannoneers  lay  down  their  handspikes. 

In  the  first  case,  the  men   remain  at  their  posts;  in  the  second 
case,  they  may  leave  their  posts,  but  will  remain  near  the  piece. 
To  resume  the  exercise,  the  instructor  commands: 

Attention — Detachment. 
At  which  command,  all  resume  their  posts  and  handspikes. 


68  MANUAL   FOR   HEAVY   ARTILLERY. 

11.  Until  the  cannoneer  becomes  well  versed  in  his  duties  at  the 
piece,  the  instructor  will  himself,  by  way  ot  example,  occasionally 
execute  the  movements  which  he  orders.  In  the  intervals  of  rest 
he  will  minutely  instruct  the  men  in  the  names  and  uses  of  the  im- 
plements, and  in  the  nomenclatures  of  the  piece,  its  carriage  or  bed, 
and  of  the  parts  of  the  fbrtification  near  the  battery.  In  the  course 
of  the  instruction,  he  will  require  every  man  to  point  out  and  de- 
signate by  name  all  the  parts  enumerated  in  these  nomenclatures, 
and  to  answer  questions  relative  to  the  service  of  the  piece;  such 
as  the  weight  of.  charge,  the  manner  of  making  cartridges  and  wads, 
of  heating  shot  and  throwing  hot  shot,  of  laying  platforms,  f)oint- 
ing,  etc.  And  although  he  is  to  consider  precision  of  movement  as 
highly  essential,  yet  he  is  to  inculcate  that  something  more  is  neces- 
sary than  a  merely  mechanical  performance  of  duty.  He  will, 
therefore,  endeavor  to  impress  upon  the  cannoneer  not  only  the 
habit  of  a  soldier-like  manner  of  working  his  gun,  but  an  accurate 
understanding  of  all  the  elements  necessary  to  the  efficiency  of  its 
fire. 

12.  To  leave  the  battery,  the  instructor  commands: 

1.  Detachment,  rear.     2.  March. 

At  the  first  command,  the  detachment  is  faced  from  the  epaul- 
ment  by  the  chief  of  piece. 

At  the  second  command,  it  marches  to  the  rear — the  cannoneers 
of  the  left  closing  upon  those  of  the  right — files  to  the  right,  and 
is  halted  and  faced  to  the  front  by  the  chief  of  piece,  so  as  to  bring 
its  centre  opposite  to  the  middle  of  the  platform,  and  four  yards 
from  it.     The  chief  of  piece  places  himself  upon  the  right. 

The  detachment  is  marched  from  the  battery  by  a  flank. 


LESSON  I. 

Service  of  a   Gun  mounted  on  a  siege  carriage. 

Seven  men  are  necessary;  one  gunner  and  six  other  cannoneers. 
13.  The  piece  is  in  battery  upon  its  platform. 
The  implements;  etc.,  are  arrarrged  as  follows: 

r  Three  on  each  side  of  the  carriage  leaning 
Handspikes,     .      I      against  the  epaulment,  in  line  with   the 

(^     cannoneers. 


to 

I 

o 

a 

p- 

i-j 
O 

P 

►— '  • 

OfQ 

O 


Page  68. 


MANUAL   FOR   HEAVY  ARTILLERY. 


69 


Sponge  Rammer, 


Pass-box, 


Tube-pouch, 


Gunner's-pouch, 

Chocks,    .    .    , 
Vent-cover,    , 

TOMPION,       .      . 

Broom,    .     .    . 


{ 


One  yard  behind  and  parallel  to  the  line  of 
cannoneers  of  the  right,  the  sponge  upper- 
most, the  sponge  and  rammer-heads  turned 
from  the  epaulment,  and  supported  upon  a 
prop. 
Against  the  epaulment,  outside  of  the  pile  of 

balls.  ^ 

Containing  friction  tubes,  and  the  lanyard, 
which  is  habitually  wound  in  the  form  of 
St.  Andrew's  cross  upon  its  handle.  Sus- 
pended from  the  knob  of  the  cascable. 
Containing  the  gunner's  level,  breech  sight, 
fingerstall,  priming  wire,  gimlet,  vent-punch 
and  chalk.  Suspended  from  the  knob  of 
the  cascable. 
One  on  each  side  of  the  piece,  near  the  ends 

of  the  hurter. 
Covering  the  vent. 
In  the  muzzle. 
I  Leaning  against  the    epaulment,  outside  of 
I      the  pile  of  balls. 
When  several  guns  are  served  together,  there  will  be  only  one 
gunner's  level  and  two  vent-punchers  to  each  battery,  not  exceeding 
six  pieces.     To  the  same  battery  there  will  be  one  ivorm,  one  ladle, 
and  one  lorench. 

The  balls  are  regularly  piled  on  the  left  of  the  piece,  near  the 
epaulment,  and  close  to  the  edge  of  the  platform. 

The  wads  are  placed  between  the  epaulment  and  the  balls,  partly 
resting  on  them. 

14.  The  cannoneers  having  been  marched  to  their  posts,  the  in- 
structor directs  them  to  plaoe  their  muskets  against  the  epaulment, 
and  then  explains  to  them  the  names  and  uses  of  the  implements, 
and  the  nomenclatures  of  the  gun,  its  carriage  and  the  battery. 

15.  To  cause  the  implements  to  be  distributed,  the  instructor 
commands: 


Take  Impleinents. 

The  gunner  steps  to  the  knob  of  the  cascable;  takes  off  the  vent- 
cover,  handing  it  to  No.  2  to  place  against  the  epaulment,  outside 
of  the  pass-box;  gives  the  tube-pouch  to  No.  3;  equips  himself 
with  his  own  pouch  and  the  fingerstall,  wearing  the  latter  on  the 


70  MANUAL   FOR   HEAVY   ARTILLER^^ 

second  finger  of  the  left  hand;  levels  the  piece  by  the  elevating 
screw;  applies  his  level  to  ascertain  the  highest  points  of  the  base- 
ring  and  swell  of  -the  muzzle,  which  he  marks  with  chalk,  and  re- 
sumes his  post. 

No.  3  equips  himself  with  the  tube-pouch. 

Nos.  1  and  2,  after  passing  two  handspikes  each  to  Nos.  3  and  4, 
take  each  one  for  himself.  JS"os.  5  and  6  receives  theirs  from  Nos. 
3  and  4. 

16.  The  handspike  is  held  in  both  hands;  the  hand  nearest  to 
the  epaulment  grasping  it  near  the  small  end  and  at  the  height  of 
the  shoulder,  back  of  the  hand  down,  the  arm  extended  naturally; 
the  butt  of  the  handspike  upon  the  platform  on  the  side  farthest 
from  the  epaulment,  and  six  inches  in  advance  of  the  alignment. 

17.  When  the  cannoneer  lays  down  his  handspike,  he  places  it 
directly  before  fiim,  about  six  inches  in  advance  of  and  parallel  to 
the  alignment,  the  small  end  towards  the  epaulment;  and  whenever 
he  thus  lays  it  down  for  the  discharge  of  any  particular  duty,  he 
will  resume  it  on  returning  to  his  post  after  the  completion  of 
that  duty. 

18.  The  instructor  causes  the  service  of  the  piece  to  be  executed 
by  the  following  commands  : 

1.  From  Battery. 

The  gunner  moves  two  paces  to  his  right. 

Nos.  1,  2,  3,  4,  5  and  6,  facing  from  the  epaulment,  unbar;  Nos. 
1  and  2  under  the  front  of  the  wheels ;  Nos.  3  and  4  through  the 
rear  spokes  of  the  wheels  near  the  felly,  under  and  perpendicularly 
to  the  cheeks;  and  Nos.  5  and  6  under  the  manoeuvring  bolts. 

All  being  ready,  the  gunner  gives  the  command  Heave,  which 
will  be  repeated  as  often  as  may  be  necessary.  He  sees  Nos.  5  and 
6  guide  the  trail  in  prolongation  of  the  directrix  of  the  embrasure, 
and  as  soon  as  the  face  of  the  piece  is  about  one  yard  from  the 
epaulment,  commands  Halt.  All  unbar,  and  resume  their  posts, 
Nos.  1  and  2  chock  the  wheels. 

2.  Load  hy  Detail.     Load. 

19.  Nos.  1,  2  and  4  lay  down  their  handspikes. 

No.  2  takes  out  the  tompion,  and  places  it  near  the  vent-cover. 
]No.  1  faces  once  and  a  half  to  his  left;  steps  over  the  sponge  and 
rammer ;  faces  to  the  piece ;  takes  the  sponge  with  both  hands,  the 


MANUAL  FOR   HEAVY  ARTILL:ERY.  71 

black  down,  the  right  hand  three  feet  from  the  sponge  head,  the 
left  hand  eighteen  inches  nearer  to  it,  returns  to  the  piece,  entering 
the  staff  in  the  embrasure;  places  the  left  foot  in  line  with  the  face 
of  the  piece,  half  way  between  it  and  the  wheels;  breaks  to  the 
right  with  the  right  foot,  the  heels  on  a  line  parallel  to  the  direction 
of  the  piece,  the  left  leg  straightened,  the  right  knee  bent,  the 
body  erect  upon  the  haunches ;  and  rests  the  end  of  the  sponge  in 
the  muzzle,  the  staff  in  the  prolongation  of  the  bore,  supported  by 
the  right  hand,  the  right  arm  extended,  the  left  hand  flat  against 
the  side  of  the  thigh. 

No.  3  steps  to  the  muzzle,  and  occupies  a  position  on'the  left  of 
the  piece  corresponding  to  that  of  No.  1  on  its  right.  He  seizes  the 
staff  with  the  left  hand,  back  down,  near  to  and  outside  of  the  hand 
ofNo.  1. 

No.  2,  facing  towards  the  epaulment,  embars  under  the -breech, 
and  maintains  the  piece  in  a  convenient  position  for  inserting  the 
sponge,  until  he  receives  a  signal  from'thc  gunner  to  unbar.  He 
then  lays  down  his  handspike;  steps  over  the  rammer,  and  seizes  the 
staff  witli  both  hands,  as  prescribed  for  the  sponge ;  and  stands  ready 
to  exchange  with  No.  1. 

No.  4  takes  the  pass-box  and  goes  to  the  rear  for  a  cartridge;  re- 
turns with  it,  and  places  himself,  facing  the  piece,  about  eighteen 
inches  to  the  rear  and  right  of  No.  2. 

The  gunr.er  places  himself  near  the  stock,  the  left  foot  advanced, 
closes  the  vent  with  the  second  finirer  of  the  left  band,  bendino:  well 
forward  to  cover  himself  by  the  breech;  turns  the  elevating  screw 
with  the  right  hand,  so  as  to  adjust  the  piece  conveniently  for  load- 
ing :  and  makes  a  signal  for  No.  3  to  unbar. 

20.  In  the  mean  time  Nos.  1  and  2  insert  the  sponge  by  the  fol- 
lowing motions : 

First  motion. — They  insert  the  spongd  as  far  as  the  hand  of  No. 
1,  bodies  erect,  shoulders  square. 

Second  motion. — They  slide  the  hand  along' the  staff,  and  seize  it 
at  arm's  length. 

TMrd  motion. — They  force  the  sponge  down  as  prescribed  in  the 
first  motion. 

Fourth  motion. — They  repeat  the  second  motion. 

Fifth  motion. — They  push  the  sponge  to  the  bottom  of  the  bore. 
No.  1.  replaces  the  left  hand  on  the  staff,  back  up,  six  inches  nearer 
to  the  muzzle  than  the  right.  No.  2  places  the  right  hand,  back 
Up,  between  the  hands  of  No.  1. 

If  in  executing  these  motions,  or  the  corresponding  ones  with  the 


72  MANUAL   FOR   HEAVY  ARTILLERY. 

rammer,  it  be  found  that  the  sponge  or  rammer  is  at  home  at  the 
third  or  fourth  motion,  then  what  is  prescribed  for  the  fifth  motion 
will  be  performed  at  the  third  or  fourth.  The  knee  on  the  side  to- 
wards which  the  body  is  to  be  inclined  is  always  bent,  the  other 
straightened;  and  the  weight  of  the  body  added,  as  much  as  possi- 
ble, to  the  eflFort  exerted  by  the  arms. 

3.  Sponge. 

21.  Nos.  1  and  2,  pressing  the  sponge  firmly  against  the  bottom 
of  the  bor^,  turn  it  three  times  from  right  to  left,  and  three  times 
from  left  to  right;  replace  the  hands  on  the  thighs;  and  withdraw 
the  sponge  by  motions  contrary  to   those  prescribed  for  inserting  it. 

Remark. — To  handle  the  sponge  when  it  is  new  and  fits  tight,  it  maybe- 
come  necessary  for  Nos.  1  and  2  to  use  both  hands.  In  this  case  it  will  be 
inserted  and  withdrawn  by  short  and  quick  motions. 

INo.  2  quits  the  stafi",  and  turning  towards  No.  4,  receives  from 
him  the  cartridge,  which  he  takes  in  both  hands,  back  down,  and 
introduces  into  the  bore  bottom  foremost,  seams  to  the  sides ;  he  then 
grasps  the  rammer  in  the  way  prescribed  for  the  sponge. 

No.  1,  rising  upon  the  right  leg  and  turning  towards  his  left, 
passes  the  sponge  above  the  rammer  with  the  left  hand  to  No.  3, 
and  receiving  the  rammer  with  the  right,  presents  it  as  prescribed 
for  the  sponge,  except  that  he  rests  the  rammer-head  against  the 
right  side  of  the  face  of  the  piece. 

No.  3,  as  soon  as  the  sponge  is  withdrawn,  passing  the  rammer 
under  the  sponge  into  the  embrasure  with  the  right  hand,  receives 
the  sponge  from  No.  1  with  the  left,  replaces  it  upon  the  prop,  and 
resumes  his  post. 

No.  4,  setting  down  the  pass-box,  takes  out  the  ^cartridge  and 
presents  it  in  both  hands  to  No.  2,  the  choke  to  the  front ,  returns 
the  pass-box  to  its  place,  and  picks  up  a  ball,  and  afterwards  a  wad, 
should  one  be  required. 

Nos.  1  and  2  force  down  the  cartridge  by  the  motions  prescribed 
for  forcing  down  the  sponge. 

4.  Kam. 

22.  Nos.  1  and  2,  drawing  the  rammer  out  to  the  full  extent  of 
their  arms,  ram  with  a  single  stroke.  No.  2  quits  the  staiSf,  and 
turning  towards  No.  4,  receives  from  him  the  ball  and  wad,  whilst 


MANUAL   FOR   HEAVY   ARTILLERY.  73 

No.  1  throws  out  the  rammer,  and  holds  the  head  against  the  right 
side  bf^e  face  of  the  piece.  No.  2,  receiving  successively  the  ball 
and  wal,  introduces  them  into  the  bore,  the  ball  first,  and  seizes  the 
staff  with  the  left  hand.     No.  4  then  resumes  his  post. 

Nos.  1  and  2  force  down  the  ball  and  wad  together  by  the  same 
motions,  and  ram  in  the  same  manner  as  prescribed  for  the  car- 
tridge. No.  2  quits  the  rammer;  sweeps,  if  necessary,  the  platform 
on  his  own  side;  passes  the  broom  to  No.  1 ;  and  resumes  his  post. 
No.  1  throws  out  the  rammer,  and  places  it  upon  the  prop  below  the 
sponge;  finishes  the  sweeping,  and  resumes  his  post. 

The  gunner  pricks,  leaving  the  priming  wire  in  the  vent;  re- 
sumes his  post;  and,  if  firing  beyond  point-blank  range,  adjusts  the 
breech-sight  to  the  distance. 

5.  In  Battery. 

23.  Nos.  1  and  2  unchock  the  wheels,  and  with  Nos.  3,  4,  6,  and 
6,  all  facing  towards  the  epaulment,  embar  ;  Nos.  1  and  2  through 
the  front  spokes  of  the  wheels  near  the  felly,  under  and  perpen- 
dicularly to  the  cheeks;  Nos.  3  and  4  under  the  rear  of  the  wheels; 
and  Nos.  5  and  6  under  the  manoeuvring  bolts  perpendicularly  to  the 
stock. 

All  being  ready,  the  gunner  commands  Heave,  and  the  piece  is 
run  into  battery ;  Nos.  5  and  6  being  careful  to  guide  the  chase 
into  the  middle  of  the  embrasure. .  As  soon  as  the  wheels  touch  the 
hurter,  he  commands  Halt.  All  unbar,  and  Nos.  1,  2,  3,  and  4. 
resume  their  posts. 

6.  Point. 

24.  No.  3  lays  down  his  handspike,  passes  the  hook  of  the  lan- 
yard through  the  eye  of  a  tube  from  front  to  rear,  and  holds  the 
handle  of  the  lanyard  with  the  right  hand,  the  hook  between  the 
thumb  and  forefinger. 

Nos.  5  and  6  embar  under  and  perpendicularly  to  the  trail,  near 
the  manoeuvrinii;  bolts. 

The  gunner,  placing  himself  at  the  stock,  as  at  the  command 
Load,  withdraws  the  priming- wire,  and,  aided  by  Nos.  5  and  6, 
gives  the  direction,  causing  the  trail  to  be  moved  by  commanding 
Left,  or  Right,  tapping  at  the  same  time  on  the  right  side  of  tho 
breech  for  No.  5  to  move  the  trail  to  the  left,  or  on  the  left  side  for 
No.  6  to  move  it  to  the  right. 

4 


74  MANUAL   FOR  HEAVY   ARTILLERY. 

He  then  places  the  centre  point  of  the  breech-sight  accurately 
upon  the  chalk  mark  on  the  base-ring,  and  by  the  elevating  ^rew 
gives  the  proper  elevation,  rectifying  the  direction,  if  necessary. 

The  moment  the  piece  is  correctly  pointed,  he  rises  on  the  left 
leg,  and  gives  the  word  Ready,  making  a  signal  with  both  hands,  at 
which  Nos.  5  and  6  unbar,  and  resume  their  posts;  takes  the  breech- 
sight  with  the  left  hand,  and  goes  to  the  windward  to  observe  the 
effect  of  the  shot. 

No.  3  inserts  the  tube  in  the  vent,  drops  the  handle,  allowing  the 
lanyard  to  uncoil  as  he  steps  back  to  his  post,  holding  it  slightly 
stretched  with  the  right  hand,  the  cord  passing  between  the  fingers, 
back  of  the  hand  up;  and  breaks  to  the  rear  a  full  pace  with  the 
left  foot,  the  left  hand  against  the  thigh. 

At  the  word  Eeady,  Nos.  1  and  2  take  the  chocks,  and  breaking 
off  with  the  feet  furthest  from  the  epaulment,  stand  ready  to  chock 
the  wheels. 

25.  In  directing  the  piece  to  be  fired,  the  instructor  will  designate 
it  by  its  number,  as,  for  example  : 

7.  Numher  one — FiRE. 

No.  3  gives  a  smart  pull  upon  the  lanyard. 

Immediately  afcer  the  discharge  of  the  piece,  Nos.  1  and  2  chock 
the  wheels,  and  resume  the  erect  position.  No.  3  resumes  the  erect 
position,  and  rewinds  the  lanyard  in  St.  Andrew's  cross  upon  its 
handle,  returning  it  if  dry  to  the  tube-pouch.  The  gunner,  having 
observed  the  effect  of  the  shot,  returns  to  his  post. 

26.  Whenever  the  piece  is  to  be  fired  by  d^  lock,  port-fire,  or  sloiv- 
mafrh,  it  will  be  done  by  No.  3,  as  prescribed  for  No.  4,  in   the  in- 

•  struction  fur  field  artillery. 

27.  To  continue  the  exercise^  the  instructor  resumes  the  series  of 
commmds,  beginning  with  From  Battery. 

TO  change  posts. 

28.  To  change  posts  the  instructor  commands : 

1.  Change  Posts.     2.  March.     3.  Call  Off. 

At  the  first  command,  the  cannoneers  lay  down  their  handspikes; 
place  their  equipments  on  the  parts  of  the  carriage  nearest  to  them; 
and  face  to  their  left. 


MANUAL    FOR   HEAVY   ARTILLERY.  75 

At  the  second  command,  they  step  off,  each  advancing  one  postj 
No.  €  taking  that  of  No.  1.  Nos.  2  and  5  pass  to  the  rear  of  the 
trail ;  No.  2  on  the  outside  of  all  the  cannonetrs,  Oi>  arriving  at 
their  posts,  they  face  to  the  piece,  and  equip  themselves. 

At  the  third  command;  they  call  off,  according  to  the  pOsts  they 
are  to  occupy. 

TO  LOAD  FOR  ACTION. 

29.  The  cannoneers  having  been  sufficiently  instructed  in  the 
details  of  the  movements,  the  instructor  commands  : 

*  Load  for  action — LoAD. 

The  piece  is  run  from  battery,  loaded,  run  into  battery,  pointed, 
and  prepared  for  firing,  by  the  following  commands  from  the  gunner  : 
From  Battery — Load — In  Battery — Point — Ready. 

At  the  command  or  signal  from  the  instructor  to  commence  firing, 
the  gunner  gives  the  command  Fire,  and  continues  the  action  until 
the  instructor  directs  the  firing  to  cease. 

to  cease  firing. 

30.  To  cause  the  firing  to  cease,  the  instructor  commands : 

Cease  Firing. 

Whether  the  cannoneers  are  loadinp  l^  detail  or  for  action,  the 
piece  is  sponged  out,  and  all  resume  their  posts.  If  the  cartridge 
has  been  inserted,  the  loading  will  be  completed,  unless  the  instruc- 
tor should  otherwise  direct. 

to  secure  piece,  and  replace  implements. 

31.  To  discontinue  the  exercise,  the  instructor  having  ordered  the 
firing  to  cease,  and  caused  the  piece  to  be  run  into  battery,  gives 
the  following  commands  : 

1.  Secure  Piece. 

No.  2  returns  the  tompion  to  the  muzzle,  the  gunner  puts  on  the 
vent-cover,  which  he  receives  from  No.  2,  and  depresses  the  piece. 


76  MANUAL   FOR   HEAVY   ARTILLERY. 

^R^  2.   Replace  Implements.  • 

No3.  1  and  2  replactfe  the  handspikes  against  the  epaulment,  those 
of  Nos.  3,  4,  5  and  G  being  passed  to  them  by  Nos.  o  and  4  for  that 
purpose.  The  gunner -hangs  the  pouches  upon  the  knob  of  the 
cascable. 

TO  LEAVE  THE  BATTERY. 

'  32.  The  instructor  causes  the  muskets  to  be  taken;  forms  the 
detachment  in  rear  of  the  piece;  and  marches  it  from  the  battery  as 
prescribed  in  No.  12.  • 

33.  Remarhs. — The  service  of  a  24  pdr.  siege  gun,  as  it  respects 
running  from  and  to  battery,  and  pointing,  is  performed  by  five 
men,  as  prescribed  for  the  siege  howitzer,  li'ive  men  suffice  for  the 
service  of  the  18  and  12  pdrs.  To  perform,  however,  all  the  duties 
incident  to  a  battery  of  heavy  artillery  on  a  war  establishment,  inclu- 
ding transportation  and  the  mechanical  manoeuvres,  the  details  for 
its  daily  service,  at  three  reliefS;  should  allow  at  least  twenty  pri- 
vates to  each  piece. 

TO   SERVE   THE   PIECE   WITH   REi)UCED    NUMBERS. 

34.  The  smallest  number  of  men  with  which  heavy  pieces  can 
be  served  with  facility,  has  been  given  as  five.  It  may  be  necessa- 
ry, however,  from  the  men  being  disabled,  or  from  other  circum- 
stances, to  serve  a  gun  with  a  less  number. 

With  four  men. — They  will  be  told  off  as  gunner,  and  Nos.  1,  2, 
and  8.  In  this  case  No.  2  will;  in  addition  to  his  own  duties,  per- 
form those  of  No.  4. 

With  three  men. — They  will  be  told  off  as  gunner,  and  Nos.  1 
and  2.  No.  1  performs  the  duties  prescribed  for  No.  3,  as  well  as 
his  own.     No.  2  performs  those  of  No.  4,  as  in  the  preceding  case. 

When  No.  2  serves  ammunition,  he  goes  for  the  cartridge,  and 
places  the  pass-box  behind  his  post,  before  assisting  No.  1  to 
sponge. 

*  TRANSPORTATION. 

35.  The  transportation  of  a  24-pounder  gun  requires  ten  horses 
and  five  drivers;  an  18-pounder  eight  horses  and  four  drivers;  a 


« 
MANUAL    FUU   HEAVY   ARTILLERY.  77 

battery  wagon  six  horses  and  three  drivers;  and  spare  carriages — 
at  the  rate  of  one  for  every  five  pieces  require  each  six  hor&es  and 
three  drivers. 

CIl ARCHES,  ETC. 

36.  Tlic  ordinary  service  charge  of  powder  for  lieavy  guns  is 
one-fourth  the  weight  of  the  shot.  .  For  firing  double  sliot  it  is  one- 
sixth  that  weight.  The  breaching  charge  is  one-third  the  weight  of 
the  sliot. 

Range  of  a  24  pth-.,  at  an  angle  of  1°  30'',  (point   blank), 

charge  ^Ibs.,               .              _              .              .              .  050  yards. 

Range  of  a  24-p(lr.,  at  an  aniile  of  ■)°,  charge  6  fts..           -  lOoO  '     " 

Range  of  an  IS-pdr.,  at  an  aniile  of  1°  30^,  charge  4^  16?.,  800        " 

Range  of  an  IS-jjdr.,  at  an  angle  of  5°,  cliarge  4^  lbs.,      -  KIIJO 

Proof  range  of  powder,       .             .              -              -             .  300        " 
The  range  of  a  r2.pdr.  is  about  the  same  as  that  of  an 

18-pdr.       ' 

Greatest  elevation  that  a  24-pdr.  carringe  admr"ts,               -  12° 

Greatest  elevation  that  an  i8-pdr.  carnage  admits,            -  12* 

Greatest  elevation  that  a  r2-pdr.  carriage  admits,               -  13° 

Greatest  depression  that  a  24-pdr.  carriage  admits,            -  4° 

Greatest  depression  that  an  18-pdr.  carriage  admits,         -  4° 

Greatest  depression  that  a  12-pdr.  carriage  admits,            -  4° 

WADS. 

37.  Wach  are  not  generally  necessary,  except  when  firing  at 
angles  of  depression  •  and  then  only  one  is  used,  and  that  on  the 
ball.  When,  however,  the  piece  has  been  fired  so  often  that  the 
ball  has  caused  a  lodtpnent  in  the  bore,  it  is  well  to  use  wads  differ- 
ing in  length,  according  to  the  position  and  extent  of  the  lodgment, 
between  the  shot  and  the  cartridge. 

Ilai/  wads  may  be  made  by  twisting  hay  into  a  rope  of  about  one 
inch  in  diameter,  folding  it  together  of  any  desired  length,  and 
then  winding  the  folds  from  one  end  to  the  other,  leaving  the  wad 
a  little  larger  that  the  bore. 

BREACniNG   BATTERIES. 

88.  Breaching  hatieries  established  against  walls  are: 
Fir^f.  Tq  make  a  horizontal   section    the  length  of  the  desired 
breach  along  the  scarj),  at  one-third   its  height  from  the   bottom  of* 
the  ditch,  and  to  a  depth  equal  to  the  thickness  of  the  wall. 


78  MANUAL    FOR    HEAVY   ARTILLERY. 

SeconrVi/.  To  mako  vertical  cuts  throueh  the  wall,  not  further 
than  ten  yards  apart,  and  not  exceeding  one  to  each  piece;  b(\uin- 
ning  at  the  liorizontal  section,  and  ascending  gradually  to  the  top  of 
the  wall. 

Thirdly.  To  fire  at  the  most  prominent  pofnts  of  the  masonry 
left  standing;  beginning  always  at  the  bottom,  and  gradually  ap- 
proaching to  the  top. 

Fourthh/.  To  fire  into  the  broken  mass  with  howitzers  until  the 
breach  is  practicable. 

Breaches  of  more  than  twenty  yards  in  length  have  been  opened 
by  way  of  experiment,  and  rendered  practicable,  in  less  than  ten 
hours,  by  about  two  hundred  and  thirty  24-pdr.  balls  and  forty 
shells  in  one  case^  and  by  three  hundred  18-pdr.  balls  and  forty 
shells  in  another. 

RAPIDITY   OF   riRING. 

89.  Iron  guns  sustain  long-continued  and  rapid  firing  better  than 
brass  guns.  A'iron  gun  should  sustain  twelve  hundred  discharges, 
at  the  rate  of  twelve  an  hour;  but  whatever  may  be  the  rate  of  tire, 
it  is  deemed  unsafe  after  that  number  of  discharges.  As  many  as 
twenty  an  hour  have  been  made  for  sixteen   consecutive  hours. 

PENETRATION    OF    SHOT. 

40.  The  penetration  of  balls  increases  to  a  certain  extent  with 
their  calibre.  The  mean  result,  from  several  experiments,  gives  the 
penetration  of  a  24-pdr.  ball,  with  the  charge  of  one-third  its 
weight,  at  the  distance  of  one  hundred  yards,  as  follows: 

Feet.     Inches. 
Ill  earth  of  old^parapets,  -  -  -        8  6 

In  earth  recently  thrown  up,      -  -  -       15  0 

In  oak  wood,  sound  and   hard,  -  -  .40 

In  rubble  stone  and  masonry,     -  -  -         1  10 

In  brick,  -  -  -  -  -         3  0 

LESSON  II. 

Service  of  an  %-inch  Siege  Howitzer,  mounted  on  a  2.\-pdr.  Siege 

Carriage. 

Five  men  are  necessary:  one  gunner  and  four  other  cannoneers. 
41.  The  piece  is  in  battery  upon  its  platform. 


MANUAL  FOR   HEAVY   ARTILLERY. 


79 


The  implements,  ect,  are  arranged  as  follows: 

C  Three  on  the  left  of  the  carriage,  and  two  on 
Handspikes,  -  <  the  right,  leaning  against  the  epaulment,  in 
(^  line  with  the  cannoneers. 
r  On  props,  eighteen  inches  behind  and  parallel 
-|  to  the  cannoneers  of  the  right,  the  sponge- 
(^  head  turned  towards  the  epaulment. 
(  Containing  fuzes,  a  pair  of  sleeves,  and  a 
priming-wire,  bent  at  right  angles  at  the 


Sponge  &  .Rammer, 


Haversack, 


Tube-pouch, 


gunners'-pouch, 

loading-tongs, 
Quadrant,  -  - 
Plummet,  -  - 
Scraper,  -  - 
Wiper,  -  -  - 
Splints,  -  -  - 
Grummet-wad, 

Chocks,  -    -    - 

Vent-cover, 
Tompion,      -    - 
Quoin,      -    -    - 

Broom,    -    -    - 


< 


point  for  withdrawing  the  cartridge  used  in 
I  instruction.  Suspended  from  the  knob  of 
l^      the  cascable. 

(  Containing  friction  tubes,  and  the  .lanyard, 
wound  in  St.  Andrew's  cross  upon  its 
handle.  Suspended  from  the  knob  of  the 
cascable. 

{ Containing    the  gunner's  level  breech-sight, 
j       finger-stall,     priming-wire,     gimlet,    vent- 
punch,   and    chalk.     Suspended  from  the 
knob  of  the  cascable. 


I    In  a  basket  or  on  a  shelf,  against  the  epaul- 
-J       ment,  outside  of  and  near  the   handspikes 
I       of  the  left. 

I 
On  the  end  of  the  hurter,  near  No.  2. 

f  One  on  each  side  of  the  piece,  near  the  ends 

i      of  the  hurter. 

Covering  the  vent. 


Tn  the  muzzle. 
Under  the  breech. 
J  Leaning  against  the  epaulment,  outside  of  the 
(      basket  or  shelf. 
When  several  howitzers   are  served  together,  there  will  be  only 
one  gunner's  level  and  two  vent-punches  to   each   battery,  not  ex- 
ceeding six  pieces.     To  the  same  battery  there  will   be  one  wrench. 
One  shell  and  one  bombazine  cartridge  bag  for  instruction — the 
bag  filled  with  sawdust,  and  having  loops  of    thread  at  the  choke 
end — arc  at  the  magazine,  or  other  safe  place  in  rear  of  the  piece. 
42.  The  cannoneers  having  been  marched  to  their  posts,  the  in- 
structor directs  them  to  place  their  muskets  against  the  epaulment, 


80  MANUAL   FOR    UEAVY    ARTILLBKY. 

and  then  explains  to  tliem  the  names  and  uses  of  the  implements, 
und  the  nomenclatures  of  the  howitzer,  its  carriage,  and  the  bat- 
tery. 

43.  To  cause  the  implements  to  be  distributed,  the  instructor 
commands : 

Take  Implements. 

The  p;unner  steps  to  the  knob  of  the  cascable;  takes  off  the  vent- 
cover,  handing  it  to  No.  2  to  place  against  the  epaulment,  outside 
of  the  basket^  gives  the  tube-pouch  t'6  No.  8,  and  tho  haversack  to 
No.  4";  and  equips  himself  with  liis  own  pouch  and  the  finger-stall, 
wearing  the  latter  on  the  second  finger  of  the  left  hand. 

No.  2  puts  on  the  sleeves. 

No.  3  equips  himself  with  the  tube-pouch. 

No.  4  equips  himself  with  the  haversack,  which  he  wears  from 
the  right  shoulder  to  the  left  side ;  takes  out  the  sleeves ;  and  as- 
sists No.  2  to  put  theni,on. 

Nos.  1  and  2,  after  passing  handspikes  to  Nos.  3  and  4  and  the 
gunner,  take  each  one  for  himself.  The  gunner,  receiving  his  from 
No.  4,  lays  it^in  the  allignment,  the  small  end  towards  the  epaul- 
ment, and  two  yards  to  his  right.  The  other  handspkes  arc  held, 
laid  down,  and  resumed,  as  prescribed  in  Nos.  15  and  IG. 

The  gunner  directs  No.  8  to  raise  the  breech  to  enable  him  to 
level  the  piece ;  applies  his  level  to  ascertain  the  highest  points  of 
the  base-ring  and  muzzle-band,  wliich  he  marks- with  chalk;  and  re- 
sumes his  post. 

44.  The  instructor  causes  the  service  of  ihe  piece  to  be  executed 
by  the  following  commands  : 

1.  From  Battery. 

The  gunner  moves  two  paces  to  his  right. 

Nos.  1,  2,  3,  and  4,  facing  from  the  epaulment,  embar :  Nos.  1. 
and  2  through  the  rear  spokes  of  the  wheels,  near  the  felly,  under 
and  perpendicularly  to  the  cheeks;  and  Nos.  3  and  4  under  the 
manoeuvring  bolts. 

All  being  ready,  the  gunner  gives  the  command  Heave,  which 
will  be  repeated  as  often  as  may  be  necessary.  He  sees  that  Nos.  3 
and  4  guide  the  trail  in  prolongation  of  the  directrix  of  the  em- 
brasure, and  as  soon  as  the  wheels  are  about  one  yard  from  the 


MANUAL    FOR   HEAVY   AETILLERY.  81 

cpaulraent,  commands  Halt.     All  imbar^  and  resume  their  posts. 
Nos.  1  and  2  chock  the  wheels. 

2.  Load  hy  detail — Load. 

45.  Nos.  1,  2,  and  4,  lay  down  their  handspikes. 

No.  2  takes  but  the  tompion,  and  places  it  near  the  vent-cover; 
sweeps,  if  necessar}^,  his  side  of  the  platform ;  passes  the  broom  to 
the  right  side  of  the  piece;  and  resumes  his  post. 

No.  1  faces  to  his  right,  and  seizes  the  sponge-staff  at  its  middle 
with  the  right  hand,  back  up;  places  himself  at  the  muzzle; 
forces  the  sponge  to  the  bottom  of  the  chamber;  and  grasps  the 
staff  with  both  hands :  all  nearly  as  in  field  artillery. 

No.  3,  facing  towards  the  epaulment,  embars  under  the  breech  or 
knob  of  the  cascable,  until  he  receives  a  signal  from  the  gunner  to 
unbar,  when  he  resumes  his  post. 

No.  4  goes  to  the  rear  for  a  cartridge  and  shell ;  puts  the  cart- 
ridge in  his  haversack;  takes  the  shell  in  both  hands;  returns  and 
places  it  on  the  grummet-wad ;  and  stands,  facing  the  piece,  about 
eighteen  inches  to  the  rear  and  left  of  No.  2. 

The  gunner  places  himself  near  the  stock,  as  in  No.  18,  and 
closes  the  vent  with  the  second  finger  of  the  left  hand;  adjusts  the 
piece  with  the  quoin  to  about  one  degree's  elevation;  and  makes  a 
sign  for  No.  3  to  unbar.  . 

3.  Sponge. 

46.  No.  1,  pressing  the  sponge  firmly  against  the  bottom  of  the 
chamber,  turns  it  three  times  from  right  to  left,  and  three  times 
from  left  to  right;  draws  it  out  to  the  front  of  the  ehamber :  wipes 
out  the  bore ;  reinserts  the  sponge  along  the  upper  side  of  the  bore 
as  far  as  the  chamber ;  draws  it  entirely  out,  pressing  it  upon  the 
lower  side  of  the  bore;  turns  the  sponge  over  towards  the  embra- 
sure; and  presents  the  rammer-head  against  the  right  side  of  the 
face  of  the  piece,  holding'  the  staff  in  both  hands. 

No.  2,  as  soon  as  the  sponging  is  completed,  takes  the  tongs  and 
occupies  a  position  at  the  muzzle  corresponding  to  that  prescribed 
for  No.  1  on  the  right ;  turns  to  his  left  on  the  right  heel,  advanc- 
ing the  left  foot,  and  prc;>cnts  the  tongs  in  both  hands,  the  left  hand 
nearest  him,  the  tongs  opened,  their  legs  in  the  same  vertical  plane. 

No.  4  takes  out  the  cartridge  and  inserts  it  as  far  as  its  middle 
in  the  tongs,  choke  foremost,  the  seam   downwards;  removes  the 


82  MANUAL   rOR   HEAVY   ARTILLERY. 

stopper  from,  and  inserts  the  fuze  into,  the  fuze  plug;  scrapes  its 
end  ;  and  takes  the  wiper. 

No.  2,  having  received  the  cartridge  in  the  tongs,  makes  a  face 
and  a  half  to  his  right  mi  the  right  heel,  and  breaks  off  with  the 
left  foot;  places  the  right  hand  against  the  head  of  the  left  cheek 
of  the  carriage,  and  with  the  left  hand  introduces  the  cartridge  into 
the  chamber,  keeping  the  legs  of  the  tongs  in  a  vertical  plane; 
then  slightly  withdrawing  and  closing  the  tongs,  he  presses  them  in 
the  direction  of  the  axis  of  the  piece  against  the  end  of  the  cart- 
ridge, and  shoves  it  home.  Withdrawing  the  tongs,  he  makes  a  ■ 
face  and  a  half  to  his  left  on  the  right  heel,  and  puts  the  hooks 
of  the  tongs  into  the  ears  of  the  shell,  which  he  lifts  and  holds 
about  two  feet  from  the  ground,  whilst  No.  4  wipes  it. 

No.  1,  as  soon  as  the  tongs  are  withdrawn,  inserts  the  rammer, 
and  holds  it  with  the  head  against  the  cartridge,  the  staff  in  the 
axis  of  the  piece. 

4.  Ram. 

47.  No.  1  presses  firmly  upon  the  cartridge;  throws  out  the  ram- 
mer, and  places  it  upon  the  props;  sweeps,  if  necessary,  his  side  of 
the  platform;  passes  the  broom  to  the  left  side  of  the  piece;  and 
resumes  his  post. 

No.  2  introduces  the  shell,  and  shoves  it  home  in  a  manner  simi- 
lar to  that  prescribed  for  the  cartridge ;  withdraws  the  hooks,  and 
looks  to  see  that  the  fuze  is  in  the  axis  of  the  piece. 

If  the  piece  is  to  be  fired  horizontally,  or  at  an  angle  of  depres- 
sion, No.  4,  having  replaced  the  wiper,  hands  a  splint  to  No.  2,  and 
resumes  his  post.  ^ 

No.  2  presses  the  splint  under  the  shell  with  the  left  hand;  re- 
places the  tongs  and  broom ;  and  resumes  his  post. 

The  gunner  pricks,  leaving  the  priming-wire  in  the  vent,  and  re- 
sumes his  post. 

5.  In  Battery. 

48.  Nos.  1  and  2  unchock  the  wheels,  and  with  Nos.  3  and  4,  all 
facing  towards  the  epaulment,  erabar :  Nos.  1  and  2  through  the 
front  spokes  of  the  wheels,  near  the  felly,  under  and  perpendicular- 
ly to  the  cheeks;  and  Ncs.  3  and  4  under  the  rear  of  the  wheels. 

The  gunner,  seizing  his  handspike,  embars  under  the  manoeuvring 
bolts ;    gives  the  command  Heave  ;  and  guides  the  piece  to  the 


MANUAL   FOR   HEAVY   ARTILLERY.  83 

middle  of   the   embrasure ;  as  soon  as  the  wheels  touch  the  hurter, 
he  commands  Halt.     All  unbar^  and  resume  their  posts. 

G.  Point. 

49.  Nos.  1  and  4  embar  under  and  perpendicularly  to  the  trail, 
near  the  manceuvring  bolts. 

No.  2,  facing  towards  the  epaulment,  embars  under  the  breech  or 
knob  of  the  cascable. 

No.  3  lays  down  his  handspike ;  passes  the  hook  of  the  lanyard 
through  the  eye  of  a  tube  from  front  to  rear;  and  holds  the  handle 
of  the  lanyard  with  the  right  hand,  the  hook  between  the  thumb 
and  forefino;er. 

The  gunner,  placing  himself  at  the  stock,  as  at  the  command 
Load,  withdraws  the  priming-wire,  and,  aided  by  Nos.  1  and  4, 
gives  the  direction;  causing  the  trail  to  be  moved  by  commanding 
Left,  or  Right,  tapping,  at  the  same  time  on  the  right  side  o^  the 
breech  for  No.  1  to  move  the  trail  to  the  left,  or  on  the  left  side  of 
No.  4  to  move  it  to  the  right. 

He  then  places  the  centre  point  of  the  breech-sight  accurately 
upon  the  chalk  mark  on  the  base-ring,  and  commands  Lower,  or 
Raise,  tapping,  at  the  same  time,  on  the  upper  side  of  the  knob  of 
the  cascable  with  the  left  hand,  and  drawing  out  the  quoin  with  the 
right,  in  order  to  elevate,  or  tapping  upwards  on  the  lower  side,  and 
shoving  in  the  quoin,  in  order  to  depress  the  piece ;  rectifying  the 
direction,  if  necessary. 

If  the  piece  is  to  be  fired  point-blank,  horizontally,  or  at  an  angle 
of  depression,  he  does  not  apply  the  breech-sight. 

If  the  piece  is  masked  from  the  object  fired  at,  he  places  himself 
astride  the  stock,  or  in  rear  of  the  trail,  and  gives  the  direction  by 
the  plummet. 

To  give  the  elevation  when  the  piece  is  masked,  or  when  the  de- 
sired range  is  greater  than  the  breech-sight  ranges,  he  applies  the 
quadrant  to  the  upper  surface  of  the  lock-piece,  making  the  allow- 
ance due  to  its  inclination  wiib  the  axis  of  the  piece,  which  ought 
to  be  previously  determined. 

The  moment  the  piece  is  correctly  pointed,  he  rises  on  the  left 
leg,  and  gives  the  word  Ready,  making  a  signal  with  both  hands, 
at  which  Nos.  1,  2,  and  4  unbar,  and  resume  their  posts ;  takes  the 
breech-sight  with  the  left  hand,  and  goes  to  the  windward  to  ob- 
serve the  efi"ect  of  the  shot. 

No.  3   inserts  the  tube  in  the  vent ;  drops  the  handle,  allowing 


84  MANUAL   FOR   HEAVY   ARTILLERY. 

the  lanyard  to  uncoil  as  he  steps  back  to  his  post,  holding  it  slightly 
stretched  with  the  right  hand,  the  cord  passing  between  the  fingers, 
back  of  the  hand  up ;  and  breaks  to  the  rear  a  full  pace  with  the 
left  foot,  the  left  hand  against  the  thigh. 

Nos.  1  and  2,  on  resuming  their  ])osts,  break  oif  with  the  feet 
furthest  from  the  epaulment,  inclining  well  to  that  side  in  order  to 
avoid  the  blast. 

7.  Number  one  (or  the  like) — Fire. 

50.  Executed  as  in  No.  25,  except  that  the  wheels  are  not 
chocked. 

What  is  prescribed  in  No.  26  will  apply  to  this  piece. 

51.  To  continue  the  exercise,  the  instructor  resumes  the  series  of 
commands,  beginning  with  From  Battery. 

TO    UNLOAD. 

62.  The  piece  having  been  run  from  battery,  the  instructor  di- 
rects No.  2  to  take  out  the  shell  and  cartridge ;  No.  4  carrying  them 
to  their  place  in  rear  of  the  piece.  No.  3  assists  No.  2,  by  raising 
the  breech  until  the  shell  rolls  to  the  muzzle. 

TO    SCRAPE    THE    PIECE. 

53.  [n  the  course  of  firing,  it  may  become  necessary  to  scrape 
the  piece.  To  cause  "this  to  be  done,  the  instructor  directs  the 
piece  to  be  moved  from  battery,  and  then  commands : 

Scrape  the  Piece. 

Nos.  1  and  2  lay  down  their  handspikes. 

No.  2  takes  the  scraper  and  wiper,  giving  the  latter  to  No.  1 ; 
thoroughly  scrapes  the  chamber  and  bore ;  draws  out  the  scrapings 
with  the  spoon ;  returns  the  scraper  ^o  its  place,  and  resumes  his 
post. 

No.  1,  enveloping  the  sponge-head  in  the  wiper,  wipes  out  the 
bore  and  returns  the  wiper  to  No.  2,  who  replaces  it;"pi|tsthe 
sponge  upon  the  props,  and  resumes  his  post. 

To  change  j^osts. 

To  load  for  action. 

To  cease  firing. 


MANUAL   FOR   HEAVY  ARTILLERY. 


85 


To  secure  piece,  and  replace  implements. 
To  leave  the  hatteri/. 

Executed  as  in  Nos.  28,  29,  31,  and  32 ;  No.  4  assisting  No.  2  to 
take  oiF  the  sleeves. 

TO    SERVE   THE   PIECE   WITH   REDUCED    NUMBERS. 

Executed  as  in  No.  34. 

TRANSPORTATION. 

54.  The  transportation  of  an  8-inch  siege  howitzer  requires  eight 
horses  and  four  drivers. 


55. 


CHARGES,    ETC. 


Greatest  charge  of  powder, 

Greatest  charge,  shell  filled  with  bullets, 

Charge  of  the  shell  filled  with  powder, 

Charge  to  blow  out  the  fuze, 

Bursting  charge  of  the  shell, 

Greatest  elevation  the  carriage  admits, 

Greatest  depression  the  carriage   admits. 

Range  at  an  angle  of  1°,  charge  4  lbs., 

Range  at  an  angle  of  5°,  charge  4  ibs. 

Range  at  an  angle  15°,  charge  4  lbs.. 

Proof  range  of  powder, 

Weight  of  .«hell,  '  - 

Weight  of  the  shell  filled  with  bullets, 

The  black  fuze  burns  to  the  inch, 

The  red  fuze  burns  to  the  inch,     - 

The   green  fuze  burns  to  the  inch. 

The  yellow  fuze  burns  to  the  inch, 

At  2°   elevation,  black  fuze,   full  charge" 

At  3°  2.')'     ''        '  red    fuze,  "- 

At  4°  2y     "  green  fuze,  " 

At  5°  25^     "  yellow,  "  " 

A  proper  charge  for.  en^^ding,  at  the  dis 
a  horizontal  plane,  relief  of  the  epaulment 
2°. 75,  red  fuze,  is  three  pounds. 


The 
burs 


-  4  8)3. 

-  3  lbs. 

-  2  lbs.  9  oz. 

4  oz. 

1  lb. 

-  15° 

-  10° 

-  430  yards. 

-  1150     " 

-  2300     " 

-  300     " 

45  fljs. 
65  fcs. 

2  lbs. 

3  lbs. 

4  lbs. 

5  lbs. 

'  500  to  600  yds. 
shell  SOO  to  900  yds. 
ts  at    ]     900  to  1000  yds. 

^1000  to  1100  yds. 

tance  of  600  yards,  on 
seven  feet,  elevation 


TO    PREPARE   AMMUNITION. 


56.  If  the  ammunition  for  howitzers  is  to  be  prepared  amd  issued 
by  the  artillery,  two  men,  numbered  5  and  6,  are  added  to  each  de- 


86  MANUAL   FOR   HEAVY   ARTILLERY. 

tachment  for  that  purpose.     They  are  sent  to  the  magazinOj  where 
they  are  provided  with  the  following  implements  and  stores : 

1  Set  of  Powder  Measures. 

1  Funnel. 

1  Fuze-malleL 

1  Fuze-setter. 

1  Fuze  plug-reamer. 

1  Rasp. 

1  Basket.     Containing  fuze-plug. 

2  Grummet-wads,  or  f  On  which  to  place  the  shells  while  putting 
2  Holloio -blocks.  j       in  the  charge. 

1  Budge-barrel. 

1  Dark  Lantern. 

Tow,     For  stoppers. 

Cartridge  bags.     Of  bombazine. 

Twine. 

Powder. 

Musket  bidlets. 

Incen diary  composition . 

They  first  fill  and  tie  a  number  of  cartridges,  according  to  the 
directions  received  from  the  battery,  and  then  prepare  a  correspond- 
ing number  of  shells. 

"To  Jill  the  cartridges.  One  holds  the  bag,  while  the  other  (by 
means  of  the  funnel)  pours  in  the  powder.  The  cartridges  thus 
filled  are  placed  upright  in  a  box  until  tied,  when  they  are  trans- 
ported to  the  budge-barrel. 

Cartridges  of  reduced,  charges  for  ricocJiet  firing  may  be  made 
thus  :  The  charge  having  been  poured  into  the  bag,  a  wad  of  hay 
about  six  inches  in  length  is  placed  upon  it.  This  wad  is  made  by 
laying  wisps  of  hay  evenly  together,  so  as  to  form  a  cylinder  nearly 
of  the  diameter  of  the  cartridge  bag.  The  wad  is  tied  about  an 
inch  from  each  end,  and  the  ends  are  cut  squarely  oft',  so  as  to  pre- 
sent an  even  surface  to  the  powder.  In  handling  these  cartridges, 
the  powder  end  of  the  bag  should  always  be  kept  downwards. 

To  prepare  the  shells.  No.  5  places  one  upon  a  grummet-wad; 
cleanses  it,  if  necessary,  with  a  rasp;  drives  in  a  fuze-plug  until  it 
does  not  project  more  than  the  tenth  of  an  inch;  and  reams  it  out 
with  the  reamer.  No.  6,  transferring  it  to  the  other  grummet- 
wad,  charges  it  with  powder ;  puts  in  a  stopper  of  tow ;  marks  it 
with  chalk;  and  places  it  conveniently  for  No.  4. 

If  the  shell  is  to  be  loaded  with  bullets  or  incendiary  composi- 
tion, it  is  charged  before  the  fuze-plug  is  driven.    It  should  contain 


MANUAL   FOE   HEAVY  ARTILLERY. 


87 


about  about  three  hundred  and  twenty  bullets  and  one  pound  and  a 
quarter  of  powder. 

If  filled  only  with  powder,  No.  G  marks  the  shell  with  a  cross j  if 
jjith  incendiary  composition,  he  makes  a  circle  around  the  fuze- 
plug;  and  if  with  bullets,  he  makes  two  circles  on  one  side.  The 
shells  thus  differently  charged  are  kept  separate. 


LESSON  III. 

Service  of  a  \0-mch  Siege  Mortar. 

Five  men   are  necessary;   pne  gunner  and  four  other  cannoneers. 

57.  The  mortar  is  upon  its  platform. 

The  implements,  etc.,  are  arranged  as  follows: 

{ Two  on  each  side  of  the  bed  against  the 
j  che:>-ks,  leaning  upon  the  four  manoeuvring 
■{  bolts,  the  small  ends  towards  the  epaul- 
I  ment,  those  of  the  front  handspikes  even 
(^      with  the  front  of  the  cheeks. 

Containing   fuzes  and  a  pair  of  sleeves.     At- 
■s       tached  to  the  tompion,  and  lying  upon  the 
(^      mortar. 
Containing  the  priming^wire,  friction  tubes, 
and  the   lanyard,  wound   in  St.  Andrew's 
cross  upon   its   handle.     Attached    to  the 
tompion,  and  lying  upon  the  mortar. 
Containing  the   gunner's  level,  gimlet,  vent- 
punch,  and  chalk. •    Attached   to   the  tom- 
pion,. and  lying  upon  the  mortar. 


Handspikes, 


Haversack, 


Tube-pouch, 


Gunner's-pouch, 


( 


Quadrant,   -  - 

Plummet,     -  - 
Pointing-cord, 

Scraper,      -.  - 

Wiper,     -    -  - 

Shell-iiooks,  - 

Tompion,      -  - 

Quoin,     -    -    - 

Pointing-stakes, 
Maul,      -    -    - 
Broom,    -    -    - 


In  a  basket  between 
tar  bed. 


the  cheeks  of  the  mor- 


In  the  muzzle. 

Under  the  mortar  upon  the  bolster,  its  handle 
to  the  left. 

With  the  basket. 


88  MANUAL    FOR   HEAVY   ARTILLERY. 

When  several  mortars  are  served  tooether,  there  will  be  only  one 
gunner's  level,  and  two  vent-punches  to  each  battery,  not  exceeding 
six  pieces.     To  the  same  battery  ^lere  will   be  one  hammer-icrench. 

One  shell  and  one  paper  cartridge  bag  for  instruction,  arc  at  the 
magazine  or  other  safe  place  in  rear  of  the  piece. 

58.  The  cannoneers  having -been  marched  to  their  posts,  the  in- 
structor directs  them  to  place  their  muskets  against  the  epaulment, 
and  explains  to  them  the  names  and  uses  of  the  implements,  and 
the  nomenclatures  of  the  mortar,  its  bed,  and  the  battery. 

59.  To  cause  the  pointing-stakes  to  be  established  in  position,  the 
instructor  qommands : 

Plant  the  Pointing-stakes. 

The  gunner,  assisted  by  Nos.  1  and  2,  plants  the  stakes. 

No.  1,  having  driven  the  pointing-stakes,  drives  another  stake 
one  yard  behind  his  post  for  holding  the  wiper,  and  replaces  the 
maul  near  the  basket. 

The  gunner  lays  the  slack  of  the  pointing-cord  at  the  foot  of  the 
epaulment,  leaving  the  plummet  at  the  stake  in  the  rear  of  the 
piece. 

All  resume  their  posts. 

60.  To  cause  the  implements  to  be  distributed,  the  instructor 
commands  j 

Take  Implements. 

The  gunner  steps  to  the  front  of  the  piece ;  gives  to  No.  1  the 
sleeves  and  the  wiper ;  to  No.  IJ  the  basket  and  maul ;  to  No.  3  the 
tube-pouch  and  broom;  and  to  No.  4  the  haversack;  equips  himself 
with  the  gunner's  pouch ;  applies  his  level  to  ascertain  the  line  of 
metal,  which  he  marks  with  chalk ;  and  resumes  his  post. 

No.  1  places  the  wiper  upon  the  stake  behind  him,  and,  assisted 
by  No.  3,  puts  on  the  sleeves. 

No.  2  removes  the  tpmpion,  which  he  places  with  the  basket  and 
maul,  one  yard  behind  him,  and  lays  the  shell-hooks  on  the  ground 
between  himself  and  the  basket. 

No.  3  lays  the  btoom  on  the  ground  behind  him,  and  equips  him- 
self with  the  tube-pouch. 

No.  4  equips  himself  with  the  haversack,  which  he  wears  from 
the  right  shoulder  to  the  left  side. 

All  take  their  handspikes. 


MANUAL   FOK    HEAVY    AKTILLKEY.  89 

61.  The  handspikes  ai-e-  held  as  in  No.  16.  When  laid  down, 
they  are  returned,  except  in  one  case,  to  their  places  on  the  ma- 
noeuvring bolt.  ^ 

62.  The  instructor  causes  the  service  of  the  piece  to  be  executed 
by  the  following  commands  : 

1.  In  Battery. 

The  gunner,  making  a  half-face  to  his  right,  steps  off,  left  foot 
first,  and  places  himself  two  paces  in  rear  of  the  platform,  facing  the 
piece. 

Nos.  1,  2,  3,  and  4,  facing  towards  the  cpaulment,  embar  :  Nos.  1 
and  2  under  the  front  mana^uvring  bolts,  and  Nos.  3  and  4  under 
those  in  the  rear,  engaging  the  butts  of  their  handspikes  about  three 
inches. 

All  being  ready,  the  gunner  gives  the  command,  Heave,  which 
will  bo  repeated  as  often  as  may  J3e  necessary.  As  soon  as  the  piece 
is  on  the  middle  of  the  platform,  he  commands  Halt.  All  unbar, 
and  resume  their  posts. 

2.  Load  hy  Detail — Load. 

63.  Nos.  1,  3,  and  4,  lay  down  their  handspikes. 

The  gunner  taking  the  scraper,  places  himself  in  front  of  the 
muzzle,  and  scrapes  the  bore  and  chamber  ]  draws  out  the  scrapings 
with  the  spoon;  returns  the  scraper  to  the  basket,  and  again  places 
himself  at  the  muzzle,  one  yard  in  its  front. 

No.  1,  turning  to  his  right,  takes  the  wiper  with  the  right  hand; 
faces  to  his  left,  and  places  the  left  foot  near  the  manoeuvring  bolt, 
the  right  in  front  of  the  muzzle,  the  left  hand  upon  the  face  of  the 
piece ;  thoroughly  wipes  out  the  chamber  and  bore,  and  resumes  his 
post. 

No.  3,  as  soon  as  the  piece  is  wiped,  clears  the  vent  with  the 
priming-wire;  sweeps  the  platform,  if  necessary,  and  resumes  his 
post  and  handspike.  « 

•  Nos.  2  and  4,  facing  to  their  right — No.  2  holding  his  handspike 
at  the  middle  under  the  left  arm,  butt  end  foremost,  and  taking  the 
shell-hooks  in  the  right — go  to  the  rear  for  a  cartridge  and  shell. 
"While  No.  4  is  getting  the  cartridge,  No.  2  inserts  the  shell-hooks 
in  the  ears  of  the  shell,  and  passes  the  small  end  of  the  handspike 
through  the  ring.  In  carrying  the  shell  they  hold  the  liandspike 
s.ith  their  right  hands.  No.  4  at  the  small  end  and  in  advance  of 


90  MANUAL   FOR    HEAVY   AKTILLERY. 

No.  2.  Passing  by  the  left  of  the  piece^  between  the  gunner  and 
the  muzzle,  they  rest  the  shell  upon  the  platform  against  the  middle 
of  the  transom.  ^^ 

No.  1,  placing  the  wiper  upon  the  handspike,  receives  the  small 
end  of  the  handspike  from  No.  4,  who  gives  the  cartridge  to  the 
gunner. 

The  gunner  advances  the  left  foot,  and  places  the  left  hand  upon 
the  face  of  the  piece  ;  introduces  the  cartridge  into  the  mouth  of  the 
chamber  with  the  right  hand,  and  carefully  pours  in  the  powder ; 
returns  the  cartridge  bag  to  No.  4,  and  distributes  the  powder  evenly 
over  the  bottom  of  the  chamber.  In  firing  with  paper  fuzes,  he  re- 
ceives one  from  No.  4,  and  inserts  it  in  the  fuze-plug. 

No.  4,  returning  the  cartridge  bag  to  the  haversack,  takes  the 
wiper. 

Nos.  1  and  2  raise  the  shell  and  hold  it  about  a  foot  from  the 
ground,  while  No.  4  wipes  it;  they  then  lift  it  into  the  muzzle. 

The  gunner  steps  forward,  and  with  the  left  hand  over  the  hand- 
spike, the  right  hand  under  and  nearer  to  it,  seizes  the  shell-hooks 
and  assists  to  lower  the  shell  gently  into  its  place.  No.  2  then 
withdraws  his  handspike  from  the  ring,  and  resumes  his  post.  No. 
1  takes  his  handspike.  The  gunner  adjusts  the  shell  so  that  the 
faze  is  in  the  axis  of  the  piece  ;  throws  the  shell  hooks  to  their  place 
behind  No.  2  ;  and,  if  firing  with  wooden  fuzes,  uncaps  the  fuze. 

No.  4,  as  soon  as  he  wipes  the  shell,  returns  the  wiper  to  its 
place  ;  takes  the  ^lack  of  the  pointing-cord,  which  he  lays  over  the 
left  manoeuvring  bolts,  leaving  its  end  at  the  rear  pointing-stake  j 
and  resumes  his  post  and  handspike. 

3,    POINT. 

64.  Nos.  1  and  2,  facing  towards  the  epaulment,  embar  upon  the 
bolster,  under  and  perpendicularly  to  the  piece. 

The  gunner  taking  the  quadrant  from  the  basket,  applies  it  to  the 
left  side  of  the  face  of  the  piece  with  the  left  hand,  and  inserts  or 
draws  out  the  quoin  with  the  right,  giving  the  command  Kaise,  or 
Lower,  until  the  piece  is  at  the  elevation  required — usually  452. 
Returning  the  quadrant  to  the  basket — Nos.  1  and  2  at  the  same 
time  unbarring  and  resuming  their  posts — he  places  himself  in  rear 
of  the  rear  pointing-stake,  ;ind  holding  the  pointing-cord  in  the  left 
hand  and  the  plummet  in  the  right,  gives  the  direction ;  command- 
ing Mortar  Left,  Mortar  Eight  ;  Muzzle  Left,  Muzzle 
Eight;  Trail  Left,  Trail  Eight,  as  may  be  required. 


V 

MANUAL   EOK   REAYY  ARTILLEllY,  91 

To  throw  the  mortar  to  the  left.  Nos.  2  and  4,  facing  each 
other,  embar  under  the  manoeuvring  boUs.  Nos.  1  and  3,  facing 
towards  the  epaulment,  embar  under  the  H(>tcbes  near  them.  Wben 
all  are  ready,  the  gunner  gives  the  command,  Heave  Steady. 
The  cannoneerb*  remain  embarred  until  he  gives  some  other  com- 
mand, or  makes  the  signal  to  unbar. 

To  throw  the  mortar  to  the  right.  Nos.  1  and  o  embar  under,  the 
manoeuvring  bolts.     Nos.  2  and  4  embar  under  the  notches. 

To  throw  the  muzzle  to  the  left.  Nos.  1  and  3,  facing  towards  the 
epaulment,  embar  under  the  front  notches ;  No.  1  under  the  inside 
of  the  left  notch. 

2^0  throw  the  trail  to  the  left. — Nos.  1  and  3,  facing  towards  the 
epaulment,  embar  under  the  rear  notches;  No.  3  under  the  inside  of 
the  left  notch. 

The  muzzle  or  trail  is  thrown  to  the  right^  in  a  similar  manner  to 
the  preceding,  by  Nos,  2  and  4. 

The  direction  having  been  given,  the  gunner  gives  the  word, 
Ready,  and  makes  a  signal  with  both  hands;  leaves  the  plummet  at 
the  stake;  returns  the  pointing-cord  to  tlie  foot  of  the  epaulment; 
and  goes  to  the  windward  to  observe  the  eifect  of  the  shot. 

Nos.  1,  2,  and  4,  taking  their  handspikes  with  them,  go  four 
yards  in  rear  of  the  platform,  and  face  to  the  front;  No.  4  between 
Nos.  1  and  2,  their  handspikes  held  erect  by  the  right  side,  the  right 
arm  extended  naturally. 

No.  3  lays  down  his  handspike  six  inches  in  his  front,  parallel  to 
the  edge  .of  the  platfom:,  and  makes  ready  y,  friction  tube,  as  in  No. 
24;  advancing  the  right  foot,  he  puts  the  tube  in  the  vent;  rises  on 
the  left  leg,  and  moves  three  paces  to  the  rear  in  prolongation  of  the 
right  cheek;  faces  to  the  front;  holds  the  handle  of  the  lanyard 
with  the  right  hand,  the  lanyard  slightly  stretched,  the  cord  passing 
between  the  fingers,  back  of  the  hand  up  ;  and  breaks  to  the  rear  a 
full  pace  with  the  left  foot,  the  left  hand  against  the  thigh. 

Remark. — To  discharge  the  mortars  now  in  use  by  means  of  a 
friction  tube,  the  lanyard  should  be  passed  under  a  rope  attached  to 
and  tightly  drawn  between  the  rear  manoeuvring  bolts,  or  through  a 
loop  of  rope  attached  to-the  rear  right  manoeuvring  bolt. 

4.  Number  one  (or  the  like) — Fire. 

65.  Executed  as  in  No.  25. 

On  the  discharge  of  the  piece,  all  resume  their  posts  except  the 
gunner,  who  waits  tcv  observe  the  effect  of  the  shot.  As  soon  as  the 
shot  strikes  he  resumes  his  post. 


92  MANUAL   FOK    HEAVY   ARTILLERY.  , 

What  is  prescribed  in  No.  2G  "will  apply  to  this  piece,  omitting 
the  word  ''lock:' 

66.  To  continue  the  cri:ercise,,the  instructor  causes  the  piece  to 
be  moved  towards  the  rear  of  the  phxtlbrm,  directs  Nos.  2  and  4  to 
take  out  the  shell  and  carry  'it  to  the  rear,  and  then  resumes  the 
series  of  commands  beginning  with  In  Battery. 

TO    CHANGE    TOSTS.      TO    LOAD    FOR    ACTION.      TO    CEASE    FIRING. 

Executed  as  in  Nos.  28,  29,  .'ind  30,  except  that  in  changing  posts 
No.  2  passes  by  the  front  of  the  piece. 

TO    SECURE  PIECE,  AND  REPLACE  IMPLEMENTS. 

67.  To  discontinue  the  exercise,  the  instructor  having  ordered 
the  firing  to  cease,  and  caused  the  piece  to  be  placed  as  at  the  com- 
mand, In  Battery,  gives  the  command  : 

Replace  Implements. 

All  lay  down  their  handspikes.  No.  2  puts  in  the»tompion,  and 
assists  No.  1  to  pull  up  the  pointing-stakes.  The  gunner  receives 
the  implements  from  the  cannoneers,  and  replaces  them  between  the 
cheeks. 

TO  leave  the  battery. 
Executed  as  in  No.  S;^. 

transportation. 

68.  One  mortar  wagon  is  allowed  to  each  10-inch  siege  mortar 
and  bed ;  to  transport  which  requires  eight  horses  and  four  drivers. 

charges,  etc. 
69. 

Greatest  cliarge  of  powder, 

Ordinary  service  charge,        '       - 

Ciiarge  of  tlie  shell  filled  with  powder  - 

Bursting  cliarge  of  the  shell,       -  .  -  - 

Charge  to  blow  out  the  fuse,      -  -  -  - 

Range,  charge  4  lbs.,  time  of  flight  21''^, 

Range,  charge  3  lbs.,  time  of  flight  19^^, 

Range,  charge  2  lbs.,  time  of  flight  14^'', 

Proof  range  of  powder,  -  -  -  * 

Weight  of  the  shell.  ...  - 


. 

4 

lbs. 

3 

(( 

5 

i( 

2 

u 

5 

07.. 

2100 

yards 

1700 

IC 

. 

1000 

(< 

- 

300 

« 

. 

90  lbs. 

c   ;:: 

c  o 

5=   '^ 

:2H  2 

"O     1;  H 

ca  —  - 

Eye 
Mid 
Fro  I 

O     O     rH 

>— '     ,-1 

•73 

(D 

U. 

PQ 

u 

i 

c3 

CO 

-*j 

o 

J-i 

O 

C3    - 

i-H 

^    ■* 

l«i=i 

C          >^     ^ 

CO         aj    c 

^ 

O      COO' 

C3 

;-( 

•      •      . 

c3 

o  CO  b^  CO 

-t-3 

;h 

o 

«»?-( 

r<^ 

trj 

O 

o    ■ 

tdO 

pq 

QJ 

bD    ^ 

(XJ 

>    «5     . 

13  o  '>  Sh 

o    -    o    "^ 

^   c  r;  m 

f  age  9,3, 


MANUAL   FOR   HEAVY   ARTILLERY.  93 

Five  balls,  according  to  their  size,  are  fired  from  mortars  of  cor- 
responding calibres.  With  a  charge  of  one-twentij-fftli  of  its  weight 
the  ball  is  thrown  from  six  hundred  to  seven  hundred  yards. 

TO  PREPARE  AMMUNITION. 

70.  If  the  ammunition,  for  mortars  is  to  be  prepared  and  issued 
by  the  artillery,  two  men,  numbered  5  and  6,  are  added  to  each 
detachment  for  that  purpose.  Their  duties  at  the  magazine  are 
similar  to  those  prescribed  in  No.  5G. 

Should  wooden  fuses  he  usedj  in  addition  to  the  implements  there- 
in mentioned,  n.  fuze-saw  will  be  required  for  reducing  the  fuzes  to 
the  proper  lengths.  The  shell  being  first  charged,  tlie  fuze,  cut  at 
the  right  length,  is  then  driven. 

The  paper  fuze  is  marked  with  the  number  of  seconds  which  it 
burns  per  inch.     It  may  be  cut  with   a  knife  to  any  desired  length. 

» 

TIME  OP  FLIGHT, 

71.  The  time  of  flight  for  siege  mortars,  at  an  elevation  of  46°, 
with  ordinary  charges,  is  nearly  equal  to  the  square  root  of  the  range 
in  feet  divided  by  four. 

The  experimental  length  of  the  fuze  may  be  given  according  to 
this  rule. 

TO  ASCERTAIN  THE  DISTANCE  BY  THE  REPORT  OF   FIRE-ARMS. 

72.  Multiply  the  number  of  seconds  which  elapse  between  seeing 
the  flash  and  hearing  the  report  by  1,100;  the  product  will  be 
nearly  the  distance  in  feet. 

RAPIDITY  OP  FIRING. 

73.  Siege  mortars  can  be  fired  conveniently  at  the  rate  of  twelve 
rounds  an  hour  continuously ;  but  they  may  in  case  of  need,  be  fired 
with  greater  rapidity. 

LESSON  IV. 

Service  of  an  S-incJi  Siege  Mortar. 

Three  men  are  necessary :  Qne  gunner  and  two  other  Cannoneers' 

74.  The  mortar  is  upon  its  platform. 


94  MANUAL   FOR   HEAVY   ARTILLERY. 

The  implements,  eti.,  omitting  two  handspikes,  and  adding  one 
grummet-wad,  are  the  same  as  prescribed  for  the  10-inch  siege  mor- 
tar in  No.  57.  -They  are  arranged  as  prescribed  in  that  number. 
The  wad  is  in  the  basket. 

75.  The  instruction  for  this  piece  is  the  same  as  that  prescribed  in 
Lesson  III,  with  the  following  modifications  : 

At  the  command  Take  Implements,  No.  1  performs  the  duties 
enjoined  on-  No.  3,  and  No.  2  those  of  No.  4,  each  in  addition  to  his 
own.  No.  2  assists  No.  1  to  put  on  the  sleeves^  and  places  the  wad 
on  the  platform  in  front  of  the  transom. 

76.  At  the  command  In  Battery,  No.  1  embars  under  the  right 
front  manceuvrins;  bolts.  No.  2  embars  under  the  left  rear  ma- 
nceuvring  bolts. 

77.  At  the  command  Load,  No.  1,  having  wiped  out  the  mortar, 
places  the  wiper  upon  the  stake;  pricks;  and,  if  necessary,  sweeps 
the  platform. 

No.  2,  laying  down  his  handspike,  goes  for  a  cartridge  and  shell ; 
carries  the  shell  in  the  r^ght  arm;  passes  between  the  gunner  and 
the  muzzle,  and  places  it  on  the  wad;  gives  to  the  gunner  the  cart- 
ridge, and  if  firing  with  paper  fuzes,  a  fuze;  and  takes  the  wiper 
from  the  stake. 

The  gunner,  on  returning  the  scraper  to  the  basket,  takes  the 
shell-hooks  and  lays  them  on  the  ground  between  himself  and  the 
muzzle.  Having,  carefully  poured  in  the  powd'er,  he  returns  the 
cartridge-bag  to  No.  2,  and  distributes  the  powder  evenly  over  the 
bottom  of  the  chamber;  puts  the  fuze  in  the  fuze-plug;  inserts  the 
hooks  in  the  ears  of  the  shell;  raises  it  about  a  foot  from  the  ground 
and  holds  it,  while  No.  2  wipes  it;  and  then  places  it  in  the  bore. 

No.  2  replaces  the  wiper  upon  the  stake;  lays  the 'slack  of  the 
pointing-cord  over  the  left  manoeuvring  bolts;  and  resumes  his  post. 

78.  At  the  command  Point,  Nos.  1  an'd  2  embar  under  either  of 
the  front  or  rear  notches,  as  required.  At  the  signal  from  the  gun- 
ner, No.  1  prepares  to  fire  the  piece,  as  prescribed  for  No.  3,  in 
No.  64.  ' 

transportation. 

79.  One  mortar  wagon  will  carry  three  8-inch  siege  mortars,  with 
their  beds;  to  transport  which  requires  eight  horses  and  four  drivers. 


MANUAL   FOR   HEAVY  ARTILLERY.  95 


CHARGES^  ETC. 

80. 

Greatest  charge  of  powder,             -  -  -  -  2  lbs. 

Ordinary  service  charge,     -              -  -  -  -  1  lb.  12  oz. 

Charge  of  the  shell  filled  with  powder,  -  -  -  2  lbs.  9  oz. 

Bursting  charge  of  the  shell,            -  .        •     .  -  1  lb. 

Charge  to  blow  out  the  fuze,            -  -  -  -  4  oz. 

Range,  charge  2  lbs.,  time  of  flight  20^^  -  -  1,837  yards. 

Range,  charge  1^  lb.,  time  of  flight  14^'',  -  -  943  yards. 

Proof  range  of  powder,        .              .  -  .  .  300  yards. 

Weight  of  shell,        -              -             -  -  -  -  45  lbs. 


LESSON  V. 

.  Service  of  a   Goeliom  Mortar. 

Tltree  men  are  necessary:  one  gunner  and  two  other  cannoneers. 

81.  The  mortar  is  upon  its  platform. 

The  intplements,  etc.,  and  their  arrangement,  are  the  same  as 
prescribed  for  the  8-inch  siege  mortar  in  No.  74.  A  24-pdr.  shell 
is  used. 

82.  The  instruction  for  this  piece  is  the  same  as  that  prescribed 
in  Lesson  IV. 

To  prepare  its  ammunition,  and  to  transport  it  by  hand  with  ease, 
two  additional  men  are  required.  The  gunner  carries  the  basket 
and  implements. 

83.  It  is. fired  cither  from  behind  intrenchments,  like  other  mor- 
tars, or  it  may  accompany  troops  in  effecting  lodgments  in  towns  and 
fortified  places. 

84.  As  the  shell  is  without  ears,  it  should  be  strapped  with  tin, 
having  loops  attached,  through  which  a  cord  is  passed  for  the  pur- 
pose of  lowering  it  into  the  bore.  The  chamber  being  cylindrical, 
a  sponge  is  used,  which  is  handled  by  No.  1. 

CHARGES,    ETC.  . 

85. 

Greatest  charge  of  powder,     -  -  -  -  -         8  oz. 

Charge  of  t^c  shell  filled  with  powder,  -  -  -IB). 

Bursting  charge  of  the  shell,    -  .  8  oz. 


96  MANUAL   FOR   HEAVY  ARTILLERY. 

Charge  to  blow  out  the  fuze,    -              -             -             -             -  2  oz. 

Range,  charge  8  oz,       -..-..  1,200    yards] 

Range,  charge  G  oz.,      ..-.--  900         " 

Range,  charge  4  oz.,      -              -              -              -              -              -  430          " 

Proof  range  of  powder,             .....  300         « 

Weight  of  shell,             -             -             -             -             -             -  17  B5s. 


LESSON  VI. 

Service  of  a  10-inch  Sea-coast  Mortar. 

Five  men  are  necessary :  one  gunner  and  four  other  cannoneers. 

86.  The  mortar  is  upon  its  platform. 

The  implements,  etc.,  with  the  addition  of  one  sponge,  are  the 
same  as  prescribed  for  the  10-inch  siege  mortar  in  No.  57.  They 
are  arranged  as  prescribed  in  that  number,  except  that  the  sponge 
is  placed  upon  props  one  yard  behind  No.  1,  the  sponge-head  turned 
towards  the  epaulnient.  • 

87.  The  instruction  for  this  piece  is  the  same  as  that  prescribed 
in  Lesson  III,  -with  the  following  modifications : 

No.  1,  after  wiping  the  bore,  sponges  out  the  chamber;  for  this 
purpose  mounting  upon  the  right  cheek  and  bolster. 

To  scrape  the  bore,  and  to  put  in  the  cartridge  and  shell,  the 
gunner  mounts  upon  a  block  in  front  of  the  muzzle. 

The  cartridge — its  bag  being  of  bombazine  or  flannel — is  put 
directly  into  the  chamber  by  the  gunner,  and  rammed  by  No.  1. 

To  lift  the  shell  into  the  muzzle,  Nos.  2  and  3  mount  the  cheeks, 
and  are  assisted  respectively  by  the  gunner  and  No.  1. 

In  giving  the  elevation,  Nos.  1  and  2  are  assisted  by  Nos.  3 
and  4. 

Before  priming,  No.  3  pricks  a  second  time. 

CHARGES,    ETC. 

88. 

Greatest  charge  of  powder,      -              -  -  -             -       10  lbs. 

Charge  of  shell  filled  with  *po-w-der.     -  .  - 

Bursting  charge  of  the  shell,     -              -  -  - 

Charge  to  blow  out  the  fuze,    -             -  -  - 

Range,  charge  10  lbs.,  time  of  flight  SB^-', 

Proof  range  of  powder, 

Weight  of  shell,  ..... 


0 

(( 

o 

(( 

5r 

oz. 

4 

* 

,250 
300 

yo 

yards 
lbs. 

MANUAL   FOR   HEAVY   ARTILLERY.  97 

LESSON  VII. 
Service  of  a  l^-mch  Sea-coast  Mortar, 

Five  men  are  necessary  :  one  gunner  and  four  other  cannoneers. 

89.  The  mortar  is  upon  its  platform. 

The  implements,  etc.,  and  their  arrangement,  are  the  same  as  pre- 
scribed for  the  10-inch  sea-coast  mortar  in  No.  86. 

90.  The  instruction  for  this  piece  differs  in  no  respect  from  that 
prescribed  in  Lesson  VI. 

CHARGES,    ETO. 

91. 

Greatest  charge  of  })o\V(ler,       -              -              -  -  -  20  lbs, 

Charire  of  the  shell  tilled   with   powder,         »  -  -  11     •' 

Bnvsting  charge  of  the  shell,    -             -              -  -  -  6    '- 

Charge  to  blow  out  tlie  fuze,    -              -              -  -  -  6  oz. 

Range,  charge  'JO  il5s.,  time  of  flight  (about)  40'^  -  -  4,325  yards. 

Proof  range  of  powder,              .....  3Q0       <' 

.  Weight  of  shell.              -              -              -              -  -  -  200  BSs. 


LESSON  VIII. 

•  Service  of  a  Stone  Mortar. 

Five  men  are  necessary:  one  gunner  and  four  other  cannoneers. 

92.  The  mortar  is  upon  its  platform. 

The  implements,  etc.,  and  their  arrangement,  are  the  same  as 
prescribed  for  the  10-inch  sea-coast  mortar  in  No.  86. 

93.  'j'he  instruction  for  tliis  piece  differs  in  no  respect  from  that 
prescribed  in  Lesson  \1. 

A  wooden  bottom  is  placed  over  the  mouth  of  the  chamber  to  re- 
ceive the  basket  which  contains  the  charge  of  stones. 

CHARGES,    ETC. 

94.  With  a  charge  of  a  pound  and  a  half  of  powder,  and  one 
hundred  and  twenty  pounds  of  stones,  at  an  elevation  of  60°,  the 
stems  are  thrown  from  one  hundred  and  fifty  to  two  hundred  and 
fifty  yards. 


98 


MANUAL    FOR    HEAVY   ARTILLERY. 


With  fifteen  G-pdr.  shells,  fuze  fifteen  seconds,  charge  of  powder 
one  pound,  elevation  33^,  the  shell  may  be  thrown  from  fifty  to  one 
hundred  and  fifty  yards. 

95.  As  the  shells  are  liable  to  burst  on  leaving  the  bore,  the 
piece  is  fired  by  a  slow  match  applied  to  a  train  of  quick  match, 
giving  the  men  time  to  place  themselves  under  cover. 


LESSON  IX. 


Service  of  a    Gun  mounted  on  a  Barhctte    Carriarje. 

Ixcmark. — The  instruction  for  a  barbette  gnn,  although  in  many  respects 
]"»iec)sely  the   same  as  that  for  a  siege  gun,  is  given  in  full,  Ixtiuup   the 
iege  gun  is  seldom  found  in  the  fbrts  on  the  stja -board. 

Five  men  are  necessary :  one  gunner  and  four  other  cannoneers. 

96.  The  piece  is  in  battery. 

The  implements,  etc.,  are  arranged  as  follows: 

r  Two    on    each  side  of  the  carriage  leaning 
J       against  the  parapet,  in  line  with  the  can- 
(_      n  oncers. 
One  yard  behind  the  cannoneers  of  the  right, 
the  sponge  uppermost,  the  sponge  and  ram- 
mer-heads turned  from  the  parapet,  inclined 
slightly  from  the  piece,  and  suppqf ted  upon 
a  prop;  or;  when  this  cannot  be  done  conve- 
niently, placed  against  the  wall,  the  sponge 
and  rammer-heads  nearest  the  piece, 
f  Against  the  parapet,  outside  of  the   pile  of 
I      balls. 

f  Containing  friction   tubes,  and   the  lanyard, 
■'       wound  in  St.  Andrew's  cross  upon  its  han- 
'       die.     Suspended  from  the  knob  of  the  cas- 
cable. 
Containing  the  gunner's  level,  breech  sight, 
finger-stall,    priming-wire,     gimlet,     vent- 
punch,  chalk-line,  and  chalk.     Suspended 
(^      from  the  knob  of  .the  cascable. 
One  on  each  side  of  the  piece,  at  the  foot  of 
the  parapet,  inside  the  handspikes. 


Handspikes, 


Sponge  Rammer,  \ 


Pass-box, 


Tube-pouch, 


Gunner's-poucii, 


I 


Chocks,    . 
Yent-coveu 


Covering  the  vent, 


I 

o 

o 


o 


p 
o 

n- 
O 

O 

p 


&3 


Page  98. 


\ 


MANUAL    ¥0n   HEAVY   ARTILLERY.  99 

ToMPioN,  ...     In  the  muzzle. 

-p  f  Leaning  against  tlie  parapet,  outside  of  the 

'  (      pile  or  balls. 

T,  f  Containing;  cartridoes,  at  the  safest  and  most 

BUDGE-BARREL,  <  •       <.     1       '' •  P  ^.^ 

'         I      convenient  place  in  rear  ot  the  piece. 

When  several  guns  are  served  together,  there  will  be  only  one 
gunner's  level  and  two  vent-punches  to  each  battery,  not  exceeding 
six  pieces.  To  the  same  battery  there  will  be  one  worm,  one  ladlej 
and  one  wrencJi. 

The  balls  are  regularly  piled  on  the  banquette,  on  the  left  of 
th.e  piece. 

The  wads  are  placed  between  the  parapet  and  the  balls,  partly 
resting  on  them. 

97.  The  cannoneers  having  been  marched  to  their  posts,  the  in- 
structor explains  to  them  the  names  and  uses  of  the  implements, 
and  the  nomenclatures  of  the  gun,  its  carriage  and  the  battery. 

98.  To  cause  the  implements  to  be  distributed,  the  instructor 
commands: 

Take  Implements. 

The  gunner  mounts  upon  the  tongue;  takes  off  the  vent-cover, 
handing  it  to  No.  2  to  place  against  the  parapet,  outside  of  the 
pass-box;  gives  the  tube-pouch  to  No.  3;  equips  himself  with  his 
own  ])Ouch  and  the  finger-stall,  wearing  the  latter  on  the  second 
finger  of  the  left  hand;  levels  the  piece  by  the  elevating  screw;  ap- 
plies his  level  to  ascertain  the  line  of  metal,  which,  with  the  'assis- 
tance of  No.  2,  he  marks  with  the  chalk-line;  and  resumes  his  post. 

No.  3  equips  himself  with  the  tube-pouch. 

Nos.  1  and  2,  after  passing  handspikes  to  Nos.  3  and  4,  take  each 
one  for  himself 

99.  The  handspike  is  held  in  both  hands;  the  hand  nearest  to 
the  parapet  grasping  it  near  the  small  end  and  at  the  height  of 
the  shoulder,  back  of  the  hand  down,  elbow  t(mching  the  body ;  the 
other  hand  back  up,  the  arm  extended  naturally  ;  the  butt  of  the 
handspike  upon  the  ground  on  the  side  farthest  from  the  para- 
pet, and  six  inches  in  advance  of  the  alignment. 

100.  When  the  cannoneer  lays  down  his  handspike,  he  places  it 
directly  before  him,  about  six  inches  in  advance  of  and  parallel  to 
the  alignment,  the  small  end  towards  the  parapet;  and  whenever 
he  thus  lays  it  down  for  the  performance  of  any  particular  duty. 


J-00  MA^'UAL   FOR    HEAVT    ARTILLERY. 

he  will  resume   it  on   returning  to  his  post  after  the   completion 
of  that  duty. 

101.  The  instructor  causes  the  service  of  the  piece  to  be  executed 
by  the  following  commands  : 

1.  FrOxM  Battery. 

The  gunner  moves  two  paces  to  his  right. 

Nos.  1.  '2,  3,  and  4,  facing  from  the  parapet,  embar,  near  the 
tire  ;  Nos.  1  and  2  first  facing  the  chocks  on  the  rails  in  front  of 
the  rollers  through  the  front  spokes  of  the  wheels,  over  the  front 
manoeuviing  bolts;  and  Nos.  3  and  -1  through  the  rear  spokes,  under 
the  rear  manoeuvring  bolts. 

Sho^ild  there  be  no  rear  manoeuvring  bolts,  Nos  3  and  4  emba^ 
under  the  braces,  near  the  manoeuvring  staples. 

All  being  ready,  the  gunner  gives  the  command  Heave,  which 
will  be  repeated  as  often  as  may  be  necessary.  As  soon  as  the  face 
of  the  piece  is  about  one  yard  from  the  parapet,  he  commands 
Halt.  All  unbiir^  and  resume  their  posts.  Nos.  1  and  2  chock 
the  rollers. 

2.   Load  hy  Detail — Load. 

102.  Nos,  1,  2,  3  and  4  lay  down  their  handspikes. 

No.  2  takes  out  the  tompion,  and  places  it  near  the  vent-cover. 

No.  1  faces  once  and  a  half  to  his  left;  steps  over  the  sponge  and 
rammer;  faces  the  piece;  takes  the  sponge  with  both  hnnds,  the 
tacks»down,  the  right  hand  three  feet  from  the  sponge-head,  the 
left  hand  eighteen  inches  nearer  to  it;  returns  to  the  piece,  placing 
the  left  foot  on  the  rail  of  the  chassis  in  line  with  the  face  of  the 
piece,  the  right  in  the  most  convenient  position;  and  rests  the  end 
of  the  sponge  in  the  muzzle,  the  staff  in  the  prolongation  of  the 
bore,  supported  by  the  right  hand,  the  right  arm  extended,  the 
left  hand  flat  against  the  side  of  the  thigh. 

Remark. — In  order  that  Nos.  1  and  2  may  loail  with  faciUty  withom 
standitifi  on  the  chassis,  a  banquette  should  be  placed  between  tlie  head 
of  the  chassis  and  the   wall,  or  a  >platfbrni   attached   to  the  head  of  the 

chassis. 

No.  2  .stejjs  upon  the  rail  on  his  side,  and  occupies  a  position  on 
the  left  of  the  piece  corresponding  to  that  of  No.  1  on  its  right.  He 
seizes  the  staff  with  the  left  hand,  back  down,  near  to  and  outside  of 
the  hand  of  No.  1 . 


MANUAL    FOR    HEAVY    ARTILLERY.  101 

No.  3,  as  soon  as  the  sponge  is  inserted  in  the  bore,  steps  over 
the  rammer,  and  seizes  the  staff  with  both  hands,  as  prescribed  for  the 
spon«2;e;  returns  to  his  post;  and  stands  ready  to  exchange  with 
No.  i. 

No.  4  takes  the  pass-box  and  goes  to  the  rear  for  a  cartridge;  re- 
turns with  it,  and  places  liiniself,  fiicing  the  piece,  about  eighteen 
inches  to  the  rear  and  right  of  No.  2. 

Tlie  gunner  mounts  upon  the  tongue  of  the  chassis,  placing  tht  left 
foot  about  six  inches  from  the  rear  transom  of  the  gun  carriage,  and 
breaks  well  to  the  rear  with  the  right  fuot,  the  toe  to  the  right; 
closes  the  vent  with  the  second  finger  of  the  left  hand,  bending 
well  forward  to  cover  himself  by  the  breech  ;  and  turns  the  elevat- 
ing screw  with  the  right  hand,  so  as  to  adjust  the  piece  convenient- 
ly for  loading. 

10  i.  In  the  mean  time  Nos.  1  and  2  insert  the  sponge  by  the  fol- 
lowing motions : 

First  motion. — They  insert  the  sponge  as  far  as  the  hand  of  No. 
1,  bodies  ereot,  shoulders  square. 

Secojid  motion. — They  slide  the  hands  along  the  staff,  and  seize  it 
at  arm's  length.         . 

Third  motion. — They  force  the  sponge  down  as  prescribed  in  the 
first  motion. 

Fourth  motion. — They  repeat  the  second  motion. 

Fifth  motion. — They  push  the  sponge  to  the  bottom  of  the  bore. 
No.  1.  replaces  the  It't  hand  on  thestafl',  hack  up,  six  inches  ntarer 
to  the  muzzle  than  the  right.  No.  :i  places  the  right,  hand,  back 
up,  between  the  hands  of  No.  1. 

If  in  executing  those  motions,  or  the  corresponding  ones  with  the 
rammer,  it  be  found  that  the  sponge  or  rammer  is  at  home  at  the 
third  or  fourth  motion,  then  what  is  prescribed  for  the  fifth  motion 
will  be  perlbrmed  at  the  third  or  fourth.  The  knee  on  the  side  to- 
wards which  the  body  is  to  be  inclined  is  always  bent,  the  other 
straightened;  and  the  weight  of  the  body  added,  as  much  as  possi- 
ble, to  the  effort  exerted  by  the  arms. 

o.  Sponge. 

104.  Nos,  1  and  2,  pressing  the  sponge  firmly  against  the  bottom 
of  the  bore,  turn  it  three  times  from  right  to  left,  and  three  times 
from  left  to  right;  replace  the  hands  on  the  thighs;  and  withdraw 
the  sponge  by  motions  contrary  to   those  prescribed  for  inserting  it. 


102  MANUAL   FOR   HEAVY   ARTILLERY. 

Remark. — To  handle  the  sponge  wlien  it  is  new  and  fits  tight,  it  maybe- 
come  necessary  fur  Nos.  1  and  2  to  use  both  hands.  In  this  case  it  will  be 
inserted  and  witlidrawrj  by  short  and  quick  motions. 

iNo.  2  quits  the  staff,  and  turning  towards  No.  4,  receives  from 
liim  the  cartridge,  which  he  takes  in  both  hands,  back  down,  and 
introduces  into  the  bore  bottom  foremost,  seams  to  the  sides  ;  he  then 
grasps  the  rammer  in  the  v/ay  prescribed  for  the  sponge. 

No.  1,  rising  upon  the  right  leg  and  turning  towards  his  left, 
passes  the  sponge  above  the  rammer  with  the  left  hand  to  No.  3, 
and  receiving  the  rammer  with  the  right,  presei^s  it  "Xx^  prescribed 
for  the  sponge,  except  that  he  rests  the  rammer-head  against  the 
right  side  of  the  face  of  the  piece. 

No.  3,  as  soon  as  the  sponge  is  withdrawn,  passing  the  rammer 
under  the  sponge  with  the  right  hand,  receives  the  sponge  from 
Zn^o.  1  with  the  left,  replaces  it  upon  the  prop,  and  resumes  his  post. 

No.  4,  settinij  down  the  pass-box,  takes  out  the  cartridge  and 
it^sents  it  in  both  hands  to  No.  2,  the  choke  to  the  front;  returns 
t;ie  pass-box  to  its  place ,  and  picks  up  a  ball,  and  afterwards  a  wad, 
should  one  be  required. 

Nos.  1  and  2  force  down  the  cartridge  by  tlje  motions  prescribed 
for  forcing  down  the  sponge. 

4.  Ram. 

105.  Nos.  1  and  2,  drawing  the  rammer  out  to  the  full  extent  of 
their  arms,  ram  with  a  single  stroke.  No.  2  quits  the  staff,  and 
turning  towards  No.  4,  receives  from  him  the  ball  and  wad,  while 
No.  1  throws  out  the  rammer,  and  holds  the  head  against  the  right 
side  of  the  face  of  the  piece.  No.  2,  receiving  successively  the 
ball  and  wad,  introduces  them  into  the  bore,  the  ball  first,  and 
seizes  the  staff'  with  the  left  hand.     No.  4  then  resumes  his  post. 

Nos.  1  and  2  force  down  the  ball  and  wad  together  by  the  same 
motions,  and  ram  in  the  same  manner  as  prescribed  for  the  car- 
tridge. No.  2  quits  the  rammer  j  sweeps,  if  necessary,  the  platform 
on  his  own  side;  passes  the  broom  to  No.  1 ;  and  resumeg  his  post. 
No.  1  throws  out  the  rammer,  and  places  it  upon  the  pro]3  below  the 
sponge;  finishes  the  sweeping;  and  resumes  his  post. 

The  gunner  pricks,  leaving  the  priming-wire  in  the  vent,  and,  if 
firing  beyond  point-blank  range,  adjusts  the  breech-sight  to  the  dis- 
tance. 


MANUAL   FOR   HEAVY    AUTILLERY.  103 


5.  In  Battery. 

« 

106.  Nos.  1  and  2  uncliock  the  rollers,  and  with  Nos.  3  and  4, 
all  facing  towards  the  parapet,  enibar ;  Nos.  1  and  2  through  the 
front  spokes  of  the  wheels,  near  the  tire,  under  the  manoeuvring 
bolts ;  and  Nos.  8  and  4  under  the  braces,  near  the  manoeuvring 
staples. 

All  being  ready,  the  gunner  commands  Heave,  and  the  piece  is 
run  into  battery  ;  the  gunner  following  up  the  movement.  As  soon 
as  the  rollers  touch  the  hurters,  he  commands  Halt.  All  unbar, 
and  Nos.  1,  2,  o,  and  4  resume  their  posts. 

0.  Point. 

107.  No.  3  lays  down  his  handspike,  passes  the  hook  of  the  lan- 
yard through  the  eye  of  a  tube  from  front  to  rear,  and  holds  the 
liandle  of  the  lanyard  with  the  right  hand,  the  hook  between  the 
thumb  and  forefinger. 

Nos.  1  and  4  go  to  the  traverse  wheels,  and,  facing  towards  the 
parapet,  embar  under  the  fork-bolts  or  under  the  wheels.  No.  1, 
in  passing  from  and  to  his  post,  moves  on  the  outside  of  No.  3. 

The  gunner  withdraws  the  priming-wire,  and,  aided  by  Nos.  1  and  4, 
p;ives  the  direction  ;  causing  the  trail  to  be  moved  by  ^commanding 
Left,  or  Right,  tapping  at  the  same  time  on  the  right  side  of  the 
breech  for  No.  1  to  move  the  chassis  to  the  left,  or  on  the  left  side  tor 
No.  4  to  move  it  to  the  right. 

He  then  places  the  centre  point  of  the  breech-sight  accurately 
upon  the  chalk  mark  on  the  base-ring,  and  by  the  elevating  screw 
gives  the  proper  elevation,  rectifying  the  direction,  if  necessary. 

The  moment  the  piece  is  correctly  pointed,  he  rises  on  the  left 
leg,  and  gives  the  word  Ready,  making  a  signal  with  both  hands,  at 
which  Nos.  1  and  4  unbar,  and  resume  their  posts  ;  takes  the  breech- 
sight  with  the  left  hand,  and  receiving  the  tube  from  No.  3,  inserts 
it  in  the  vent;  dismounts  from  the  tongue;  and  goes  to  the  wind- 
ward to  observe  the  effect  of  the  shot. 

No.  3  drops  the  handle,  allowing  the  lanyard  to  uncoil  as  he 
steps  back  to  his  post,  holding  it  slightly  stretched  with  the  right 
hand,  the  cord  passing  between  the  fingers,  back  of  the  hand  up; 
and  breaks  to  the  rear  a  full  pace  with  the  left  foot,  the  left  hand 
against  the  thigh. 

At  the  word  I^eady,  Nos.  1  and  2  take  the  chocks,  and  breaking 


104  MANUAL    lOK    HEAVY    AKTILLEKY. 

oflFwith  the  feet  fiirthest  from    tlie   parapet,  stand  ready  to  chock 
the  rollers. 

108.  In  directing  the  piece  to  be  fired,  the  instructor  will  designate 
it  by  its  number,  as,  for  example  : 

7.  Nnmher  one — FlRE. 

No.  3  gives  a  smart  pull  upon  the  lanyard. 

Immediately  after  the  discharge  of  the  piece,  Nos.  1  and  2  chock 
the  rollers,  and  resume  the  erect  position.  No.  3  resumes  the  erect 
po.sition,  and  rewinds  the  lanyard  in  St.  Andrew's  cross  upon  its 
handle,  returning  it  if  dry  to  the  tube-pouch.  The  gunner,  having 
observed  the  effect  of  the  shot,  returns  to  his  post. 

109.  Whenever  the  piece  is  to  be  fired  by  a  lock,  jjort-firej  or  slow- 
match,  it  will  be  done  by  No.  3,  as  prescribed  for  No.  4,  in  the  in- 
struction for  field  artillery. 

110.  To  continue  the  exercise,  the  instructor  resumes  the  series  of 
commands,  beginning  with  From  Battery. 

TO   CHANGE  POSTS. 

111.  To  change  posts  the  instructor  commands  : 

1.  Change  Posts.     2.  March.     3.  Call  Off. 

At  the  first  command,  the  cannoneers  lay  down  their  handspikes; 
place  their  equipments  on  the  parts  of  the  carriage  nearest  to  them; 
and  face  to  their  left. 

At  the  second  command,  they  step  off,  each  advancing  one  post; 
No.  2  taking  that  of  No.  1.  Nos.  2  and  3  pass  to  the  rear  of  the 
chassis;  No.  2  on  the  outside  of  all  the  cannoneers.  On  arriving  at 
their  posts,  they  face  to  the  piece,  and  equip  themselves. 

At  the  third  command,  they  call  off,  according  to  the  posts  they 
are  to  occupy. 

TO  LOAD  FOR  ACTION. 

112.  The  cannoneers  having  been  sufiiciently  instructed  in  the 
details  of  the  movements,  the  instructor  commands  : 

Load  for  action — Load. 

The  piece  is  run  from  battery,  loaded,  run  into  battery,  pointed, 
and  prepared  for  firing,  by  the  following  commands  from  the  gunner  : 
From  Battery — Load — In  Battery — Point — Ready. 


MANUAL    FOR   HEAVY   ARTILLERY.  .105 

At  the  command  or  signal  from  the  instructor  to  commence  firing, 
the  gunner  gives  the  command  Fire,  and  continues  the  action  until 
the  instructor  directs  the  firing  to  cease. 

TO  CEASE  FIRING. 

113.  To  cause  the  firing  to  cease, the  instructor  commands: 

Cease  Firing. 

Whether  the  cannoneers  are  loading  hy  detail  or  for  action,  the 
piece  is  sponged  out,  and  all  resume  their  posts.  If  the  cartridge 
has  been  inserted,  the  loading  will  be  completed,  unless  the  instruc- 
tor should  otherwise  direct. 

TO  SECURE   PIECE,  AND  REPLACE  IMPLEMENTS. 

114.  To  discontinue  the  exercise,  the  instructor  having  ordered  the 
firing  to  cease,  and  caused  the  piece  to  be  run  into  battery,  gives 
the  following  commands  : 

1.  Secure  Piece. 

No.  2  returns  the  tompion  to  the  muzzle,  the  gunner  puts  on  the 
vent-cover,  which  he  receives  from  No.  2,  and  depresses  the  piece. 

2.   Replace  Implements. 

Nos.  1  and  2  replace  the  handspikes  against  the  parapet,  Nos. 
3  and  4  passing  theirs  to  them  for  that  purpose.  The  gunner  hangs 
the  pouches  upon  the  knob  of  the  cascable. 

TO  LEAVE  THE  BATTERY. 

115.  The  instructor  forms  the  detachment  in  rear  of  the  piece; 
and  marches  it  from  the  battery  as  prescribed  in  No.  12. 

TO    SERVE   THE   PIECE   WITH   REDUCED    NUMBERS. 

Executed  as  in  No.  34. 

CHARGES,    ETC. 

Wads.  • 

Rapid  ill/  of  Jirinrj. 
Penetration  of  shot. 
Sec  Nos.  37,  o9,  and  40. 


106 


MANUAL   FOR   HEAVY   ARTILLERY. 


LESSON  XII. 


Service  of  a  Gun  mounted  on  a  Casemate  Carriage. 

Five  men  are  necessary;    one  gunner  and  four  other  cannoneers. 

120.  The  piece  is  in  battery. 

The  implements,  etc.,  are  arranged  as  follows :  , 

r  One  on  each  side  of  the  carriage,  leaning 
I  against  the  wall,  in  line  with  the  can- 
(^      noneers. 

J  One  on  each  side   of  the  carriage,  leaning 
(      against  the  wall,  behind  Nos.  3  and  l"''- 
(  One  on   each  side   of   the  carriage,  leaning 
<      against  the  wall,  opposite  to  the  end  of  the 
(^      tongue. 

(  Leaning  against  the  wall,  behind  the  gunner, 
)  or  laid  down  in  the  alignment  on  his  right. 
f  About  one  yard  behhid  the  connoneers  of 
j  the  right,  the  sponge  uppermost,  the  sponge 
\  and  rammer-heads  turned  from  the  embra- 
j  sure,  inclined  slightly  from  the  piece,  and 
(^      supported  upon  a  proper  block. 

Behind  No.  4. 
f  Containing  friction   tubes,  and  the  lanyard, 
J       wound   in    St.    Andrew's    cross    upon    its 
1       handle.     Suspended  from  the  knob  of  the 
1^      cascable. 
Containing    the  gunner's  level,  breech-sight, 
finger-stall,     priming-wire,     gimlet,    vent- 
punch,   and    chalk-line,  and   chalk.     Sus- 
pended from  the  knob  of  the  cascable. 
One    on   each  side   of  the   carriage,  on   the 
front  transom  of  the  chassis,  handles  out- 
wards. 
Coverinoj  the  vent. 
In  the   muzzle. 


Truck-hand- 
spikes,    .     . 

Elevating-hand- 
spikes,    .     .     . 

Traversing- 
handspikes,  . 

Roller-hand- 
spike, .     .     . 


Sponge-rammer, 


Pass-bo: 


Tube-pouch, 


Gunners'-pouch, 


Chocks,  . 
Vent-cover, 

TOxMPION, 


■^^' These  are  manmuvring  handspikes  With  two  pieces  in  one  case- 
mate, or  where  tlje  pieces  are  not  separated  by  piers,  they  may  be  placed 
against  the  nearest  wall,  or  hiid  down  in  the  most  convenient  position. 


MANUAL   FOR   HEAVY   ARTILLERY.  107 

-^  (  Lcanino:  a<2rainst  the  scarp-wall,  on  the  left  of 

Broom,     •     •     •     |     the  piece. 

(  Containing    cartridges,    at    the    safest    and 
BuDGE-BARREL,       -!      most    convenient    place    in    rear   of    the 
(^      piece. 

When  several  guns  are  served  together,  there  will  be  only  one 
gunner's  level  and  two  vent-punches  to  each  battery,  not  ex- 
ceeding six  pieces.  To  the  same  battery  there  will  be  one  icorm, 
one  ladle,  and  one  lorench. 

The  balls  are  regularly  ^iled  against  the  wall,  behind  No.  2. 

The  wads  arc  placed  between  "the  wall  and  the  balls,  partly  rest- 
ing on  them. 

"121.  The  cannoneers  having  been  marched  to  their  posts,  the  in- 
structor explains  to  them  the  names  and  uses  of  the  implements, 
and  the  nomenclatures  of  the  gun,  its  carriage,  and  the  bat- 
tery. 

122.  To  cause  the  implements  to  be  distributed,  the  instructor 
commands : 

Take  Implements. 

The  gunner  mounts  upon  the  tongue;  takes  off  the  vent-cover, 
handing  it  to  No.  2  to  place  against  the  scarp ;  gives  the  tube- 
pouch  to  No.  3  ;  and  equips  himself  with  his  own  pouch  and  finger- 
stall, wearing  the  latter  on  the  second  finger  of  the  left  hand.  With 
the  assistance  of  No.  3  he  levels  the  piece,  and  applies  his  level  to 
ascertain  the  line  of  metal,  which,  with  the  assistance  of  No.  2,  he 
marks  with  the  chalk  line.  (If  the  gun  has  permanent  sights, 
this  is  only  necessary  for  instruction,  or  for  verifying  the  sight.) 
He  then  takes  the  roller-handspike,  and  resumes  his  post.  This 
handspike  is  held  vertically  with  the  right  hand,  the  lower  end 
upon  the  ground  in  line  with  the  toes,  the  arms  extended  naturally. 

No.  3  equips  himself  with  the  tube-pouch. 

Nos.  1  and  2  take  the  truck-handspikes  with  the  hand  farthest 
from  the  wall,  and  carry  them  to  that  side,  holding  them  vertically, 
the  lower  end  upon  the  ground  in  line  with  the  toes,  the  arms  ex- 
tended naturally. 

12:-{.  The  instructor  causes  the  service  of  the  piece  to  be  exe- 
cuted by  the  following  commands : 

1.  From  Battery. 
The  gunner  cmbars  in  the  left  mortise  of  the  roller. 


108  MANUAL    FOR   HEAVY    ARTILLERY. 

Nos.  1  and  2,  facing  from  the  scarp  wall,  embar  in  the  most  con- 
venient front  mortises  of  the  truck-wheels,  the  hand  farthest  from 
the  carriage  at  the  top  of  the  handspike,  the  other  hand  eight 
inches  lower. 

Nos.  3  and  4  go  to  the  assistance  of  Nos.  1  and  2,  and,  facing  to- 
wards them,  seize  the  handspikes  with  both  hands  between  those  of 
Nos.  1  and  2. 

Nos.  1,  2,  8,  and  4  in  applying  themselves  to  the  carriage  either 
to  run  it  from  or  to  battery,  break  to  the  rear  with  the  foot  nearest 
to  the  carriage.  .       ' 

All  being  ready,  the  gunner  presses  the  roller  under  the  rear 
transom  of  the  gun  carriage,  by  bearing  down  upon  his  handspike, 
and  gives  the  command,  Heave. 

Nos.  1,  2,  3,  and  4  act  together,  and  bea;r  upon  the  handspikes 
until  they  are  nearly  down  to  the  rails.  The  gunner  then  disen- 
gages the  roller  from  under  the  transom  by  raising  his  handspike, 
and  commands,  Unbar.  Nos.  1  and  2  let  go  the  handspikes  with 
the  hand  nearest  to  the  carriage,  and  chock  the  wheels.  Nos.  3  and  . 
4  withdraw  the  handspikes  and  pass  them  to  Nos.  1  and  2,  who  re- 
insert them  in  the  front  mortises. 

The  gunner  again  bearing  down  upon  his  handspike,  gives  the 
command.  Heave,  and  so  on,  until  the  face  of  the  piece  is  about 
one  yard  from  the  wall,  when,  raising  his  handspike,  he  commands. 
Halt,  and  shifts  it  into  the.  right  mortise  of  the  roller.  Nos.  1 
and  2  chock  the  wheels,  and  replace  their  handspikes  against  the 
wall.     All  resume  their  posts. 

2.   Load  hy  detail — Load. 

124.  Executed  as  in  Nos.  103  and  104,  with  the  following  modi- 
fication: No.  ^,  facing  towards  the  scarp,  embars  under  the  breech, 
and  maintains  the  piece  in  a  convenient  position  for  inserting  the 
sponge,  until  he  receives  a  signal  from  the  gunner  to  unbar. 

3.  Sponge. 

125.  Executed  as  in  No.  104. 

.^  4.  Ram. 

126.  Executed  as  in  No.  105. 


MANUAL  FOR    HEAVY    ARTILLERY.  109 


5.  In  Battery. 

127.  Nos.  1  and  2  unchock  the  wheels,  and,  facing  from  the 
scarp  wall  apply  their  hands  to  the  front  of  the  cheeks. 

Nos.  3  and  4,  facing  towards  the  scarp  wall,  lay  hold  of  the  han- 
dles. 

The  gunner  bears  down  carefully  upon  the  roller-handspike,  and 
the  piece  is  run  into  battery.  As  soon  as  the  wheels  touch  the 
hurters,  he  commands,  Halt.  Nos.  1,  2,  3,  and  4  resume  their 
posts. 

6.  Point. 

128.  Nos.  1  and  4  take  the  traversing  handspikes,  and,  facing 
towards  the  scarp  wall,  embar  under  the  ends  of  the  rear  transom 
of  the  chassis.  No.  1,  in  passing  to  and  from  his  post,  moves  on 
the  outside  of  No.  3. 

When  the  elevation  is  given  by  the  quoin,  No.  2  takes  an  eleva- 
ting handspike  and  embars  upon  the  left  check  under  the  rein- 
force. 

The  gunner  withdraws  the  priming-wire,  and,  aided  by  Nos.  1 
and  4,  gives  the  direction,  as  in  No.  107. 

Ho  then  applies  the  breech  sight,  if  necessary,  and  points  the 
piece ;  commanding  Lower,  or  Raise,  tapping  at  the  same  time 
on  the  upper  side  of  the  knob  of  the  cascable  with  the  left  hand, 
and  drawing  out  the  quoin  with  the  right,  in  order  to  elevate,  or 
tapping  upwards  on  the  lower  side  and  shoving  in  the  quoin,  in  or- 
der to  depress  the  piece. 

The  moment  the  piece  is  correctly  pointed,  he  rises  on  the  left 
leg  and  gives  the  word.  Ready,  making  a  signal  with  both  hands, 
at  which  Nos.  1,  2,  and  4  unbar,  replace  their  handspikes,  and  re- 
sume their  posts;  takes  the  breech-sight  with  the  lelt  hand,  the 
rollei -handspike  with  the  right,  and  disposes  himself  to  observe  the 
effect  of  the  shot. 

If  the  elevation  is  given  by  a  screw,  No.  3  turns  its  handle  by 
direction  of  the  gunner. 

No.  3,  having  pas^d  the  hook  of  the  lanyard  through  the  eye  of 
a  tube  from  front  to  rear,  inserts  it  in  the]  vent,  and  stretches  the 
lanyard  as  in  No.  107. 

At  the  word,  Ready,  Nos.  1  and  2  take  the  chocks,  and  breaking 
off  with  the  feet  farthest  from  the  wall,  stand  ready  to  chock  the 
wheels. 


110  MANUAL   FOR    HEAVY  ARTILLERY. 

7.  Numher  one  (or  the  like) — FiRE. 

129.  Executed  as  in  No.  108. 

What  is  prescribed  in  No.  109  will  apply  to  this  piece. 

130.  To  continue  the  exercise,  the  instructor  resumes  the  series 
of  commands,  beginning  with  From  Battery  : 

To  change  posts. 
To  load  for  action. 
To  cease  firing. 

To  secure  piece,  and  replace  implements. 
Executed  as  in  Nos.  111^  112,  113,  and  115. 

TO   LEAVE    THE   BATTERY. 

131.  The  instructor  forms  the  detachment  in  rear  of  the  piece, 
and  marches  it  from  the  battery  as  prescribed  in  No.  12. 

132.  Remark — The  service  of  a  gun  mounted  on  a  casemate 
carriage  of  the  old  pattern,  (which  is  without  the  eccentric  roller,) 
will  require  the  following  mod'fication  :  The  roller-handspike  is  dis- 
pensed with,  and  the  gunner,  at  the  command.  From  Battery, 
moves  two  paces  to  the  right. 

to  serve  the  piece  with  reduced  numbers. 
Executed  as  in  No,  34. 

CHARGES,   etc. 

133.  The  ordinary  service  charge  of  powder  for  heavy  guns  is 
one-fourth  the  weight  of  the  shot.     For  firing  double  shot  it  is  one-  ' 
sixth  that  weight. 

Range  of  a  42-pdr.,  at  an  elevation  of  i°    30'',  cliarge 

lOJBs.,         -  -  -  -  •     - 

Range    of  a  42-pdr.,  at    an     elevation    of    5°,   charge 

lO^llJs.,         ..-.-- 
Range  of   a   32-pdr.,  at  an  elevation  of    1°  30^,  charge 

8  lbs.,  -  -         '     - 

Range  of  a  32-pdr.,  at  an  elevation  of  5°,  charge  8  lbs. 
Proof  range  of  powder,      .  .  .  -  - 

Greatest  elevation  the  carriage  admits,      •  .      ?       . 

Greatest  depression  the  carriage  admits, 

Wads. 

Rapidity  of  firing. 
Penetration  of  shot. 
See  Nos.  37,  39,  and  40. 


860 

yards. 

1,955 

(( 

800 

<< 

1,922 

(( 

300 

(( 

8° 

4° 

8-Inch  Columbiad  on  a  Casement  Carriage. 


Page  111. 


MANUAL   FOR   HEAVY  ARTILLERY.  Ill 

LESSON  XIII. 

Service  of  an  S-inch  Columbiad  mounted  on  a  Casemate  Carriage. 

Five  men  are  necessary  :  one  gunner  and  four  other  cannoneers. 

134.  The  piece  is  in  battery. 

The  implements,  ect.,  and  their  arrangement,  are  the  same  as  pre- 
scribed for  the  casemate  gmi  in  No.  120,  substituting  haversack — 
worn  by  No.  4  from  the  right  shoulder  to  the  left  side— for  pass- 
box.  ( 

The  shells  are  at  the  magazine,  or  other  safe  position,  and  are 
brought,  as  required,  to  the  place  prescribed  for  the  budge-barrel. 

135.  The  instruction  for  this  piece  differs  in  no  material  respect 
from  that  prescribed  in  Lesson  XII. 

It  is  loaded  with  shell,  which  is  attached  to  a  sabot.  The  shell  is 
brought  up  by  No.  4  together  with  the  cartridge,  and  is  set  home 
in  the  same  manner  as  the  ball,  except  that  it  is  not  rammed. 


■CHARGES,  ETC. 


136. 


- 

10  lbs. 

- 

2  lbs.  9  oz, 

- 

1  lb. 

- 

4  oz. 

}: 

919  yards. 

1,813  yards. 

- 

3U0  yards. 

- 

50  lbs. 

Greatest  charge  of  powder,  ... 

Charge  of  the  shell  filled  with  powder, 
Bursting  charge  of  the  shell. 
Charge  to  blow  out  the  fuze, 

Range  at  an  angle  of  1°,  ch.  10  lbs.  1  Axis  of  the  piece  16  ft. 
Range  at  an  angle  of  5°,  ch.  10  lbs.  J       above  the  water. 
Proof  range  of  powder,  .... 

Weight  of  shell,  ..... 


LESSON  XIV. 

Service  of  a  li-pdr.  Howitzer  mounted  on  a  Flank  Casemate  Car 

riage. 


Three  men   are   necessary  :  one  gunner  and  two  other  cannon- 


eers. 


137.     The  piece  is  in  battery. 


112  MANUAL   FOR   HEAVY   ARTILLERY. 

The  implements,  etc.,  are  arranged  as  follows  : 

'     ]       No.  2. 

Sponge  &  rammer,    j  ^^""'"S  "S'^'"''  "/«  '."'"'P  7^""'  '^"'''"^  ^"^ 
'     (^      1,  the  rammer-head  on  the  grouna. 

Haversack,     -     -         Suspended  from  the  knob  of  the  cascable. 

f  Containing    the    finger-stall,  priming-wire, 

m  J       friction  tubes,  and  the  lanyard,  wound  in 

^     "     ~      I       St.  Andrew's  cross  upon  its  handle.  Sus- 

(      pended  from  the  knob  of  the  cascable. 
Yent-cover,     -     -         Covering  the  vent. 
,ToMPiON,      ...         In  the  muzzle. 
Broom,    -     -     -     -         On  the  left  of  the  piece. 

Bf  Containing-   cartridires,   at    the   safest  and 
UDGE-BARREL,       -        <  .  ^       •      *     i'^        •  r  ^^ 

'  (    n)ost  convenient  place  in  rear  oi  the  piece. 

The  rounds  of  canister  are  arranged  against  the  scarp  wall,  be- 
hind No.  2.  The  shells,  if  used,  are  at  the  magazine,  or  other  safe 
position,  and  are  brought,  as  required,  to  the  place  prescribed  for  the 
budge- barrel. 

138.  .The  cannoneers  having  been  inarched  to  their  posts,  the  in- 
structor explains  to  them  the  names  and  uses  of  the  implements, 
and  the  nomenclatures  of  the  howitzer,  its  carriage,  and  the  battery. 

139.  To  cause  the  implements  to  be  distributed,  the  instructor 
commands : 

Take  Implements. 

The  gunner  takes  the  priming-wire  and  finger-stall,  wearing  the 
latter  on  the  second  finger  of  the  right  hand  ;  gives  the  tube-pouch 
to  No.  1,  and  the  havers-ick  to  No.  2  ;  takes  off  the  vent-cover  and 
places  it  against  the  scarp  wall  outside  of  the  canisters ;  seizes  the 
roller-handspike  with  the  right  hand,  and  resumes  his  post ;  holding 
the  handspike  vertically  on  the  right  side,  its  lower  end  in  line  with 
the  toes,  the  arm  extended  naturally. 

No.  1  equips  himself  with  the  tube-pouch. 

No.  2  equips  himself  with  the  haversack,  which  he  wears  from 
the  right  shoulder  to  the  left  side. 

140.  The  instructor  causes  the  service  of  the  piece  to  be  execu- 
ted by  the  following  commands  : 

1.  Fro^i  Battery. 

The  gunner,  embarring  on  the  left  mortise,  presses  the  roller  un- 
der the  rear  transom,  and  seizes  the  left  handle  with  the  left  hand. 


MANUAL    FOR   HEAVY    ARTILLERY.  113 

Nos.  1  and  2  lay  hold  of  the  manoeuvring  rings  and  handles. 

All  being  ready,  the  gunner  gives  the  command,  Heave,  and  the 
carriage  is  run  to  the  rear  until  the  face  of  the  piece  is  about  one 
yard  I'rom  the  wall,  when,  disengaging  the  roller,  he  commands, 
PIalt.     All  resume  their  posts. 

2.  Load  hy  Deia'd — Load. 

141.  The  gunner  places  himself  at  the  breech;  breaks  the  rear 
with  the  right  loot ;  closes  the  vent  with  the  second  linger  of  the 
right  hand  j  and  njanages  the  elevating  screw  with  the  left. 

No.  1  seizing  the  sponge-staff  at  its  middle,  brings  it  across  his 
body ;  plants  the  left  foot  opposite  to  the  muzzle,  close  to  the  carriage, 
and  breaks  off  with  the  right  foot;  at  the  same  time  throwing  the 
sponge  staff  into  the  left  hand,  bagk  down*,  and  extending  both 
hands  towards  the  ends  of  the  staff,  so  as  to  enter  the  rammer-head 
into  the  embrasure  and  bring  the  sponge  opposite  to  the  muzzle. 
He  then  inserts  it,  and  presses  it  to  the  bottom  of  the  chamber  with 
three  motions. 

No.  2  goes  for  a  cartridge,  and  '/eturns  to  his  post.  If  shells  are 
used^  he  brings  a  shell  at  the  same  time. 

3.  Sponge. 

142.  No.  1,  using  both  hands,  sponges  the  chamber  carefully  ; 
withdraws  the  sponge,  pressing  it  against  the  bottom  of  the  bore; 
turns  it  over,  stepping  to  his  left  lor  this  purpose,  and  rosts  the 
ranimcr-head  against  the  right  side  of  the  face  of  the  piece. 

No.  2  introduces  the  cartridge,  bottom  foremost,  seams  downward. 
No.  1  sets  it  home  by  three  motions,  with  the  right  hand. 

4.  Ram. 

143.  No.  1,  drawins:  out  the  rammer  to  the  full  extent  of  his 
arm,  rams  once,  and  throws  out  the  rammer,  holding  it  as  before, 
the  rammer-head  against  the  riaht  side  of  the  face  of  the  piece. 

No.  2  introduces  the  canister  or  shell  home  with  care  ;  throws  out 
the  rammer;  replaces  it ;  and  resumes  his  post. 

The  gunner,  rising  upon  the  left  log,  pricks,  leaving  the  priming- 
wire  in  the  vent,  and  resumes  his  post. 


114  MANUAL   FOR   HEAVY   ARTILLEKY, 


5.  In  Battery. 

144.  All  apply  tlicmselves  to  tlic  carriage,  as  prescribed  in  No. 
140,  and  ease  the  j^iece  into  battery.  As  soon  as  it  touches  the 
hurters,  the  gunner  commands,  Halt.     All  resume  their  posts. 

G.    l^OINT. 

145.  No.  1  makes  read}^  a  tube,  as  prescribed  for  No.  3,  in  No.  24. 
No.  2  goes  to  the  rear  of  the  chassis,  and,  facing  to  the  front, 

applies  himself  to  it  by  hand,  in  order  to  traverse  it. 

The  gunner  \Yithdraws  the  priming-wire,  and,  having  pointed  the 
piece,  gives  the  word,  Eeady,  making  a  signal  with  both  hands,  at 
which  No.  2  resumesiiis  post;  takes  out  the  roller-handspike,  and 
resumes  his  post. 

No.  1  steps  to  the  vent  and  inserts  the  tube,  holding  the  lanyard 
slightly  stretched  with  the  right  hand,  the  cord  passing  between  the 
fingers,  back  of  the  hand  up,  and  breaks  to  his  rear  a  full  pace  with 
the  left  foot,  the  left  hand  against  the  thigh. 

7.  N'lmiher  one  (or  the  like) — Fire. 

146.  No.  1  fires  as  prescribed  for  No.  3,  in  No.  25. 

What  is  prescribed  in  No.  26  will  apply  to  this  piece,  substituting 
No.  1  for  No.  3. 

147.  To  continue  the  exercise,  the  instructor  resumes  the  series 
of  commands,  beginning  with  From  Battery. 

To  change  2>osts. 

To  load  for  action. 

lo  cease  firing. 

To  secure  piece)  and  replace  implements. 

To  leave  the  hattery. 

Executed  as  in  Nos.  Ill,  112,  113,  114,  and  115. 

CHARGES,  ETC. 
148. 

Charge  of  powder,       -  -  -  -  -      2  lbs. 

Range  at  an  angle  of  0°,  charge  2  lbs.,  shell,  -  -      295  yard.?. 

Range  at  an  angle  of  1°,  charge  2  lbs.,  shell,  -  -      516  yards* 


MANUAL   FOB   HEAVY  ARTILLERY. 


115 


Range  at  an  angle  of  5°,  charge  2  lbs.,  shell, 

Range  at  an  angle  of  2°,  charge  If  lbs.,  spher.-capc,  time  2''^, 

Range  at  an  angle  of  5°  30'',  charge  1|  lbs.,  spherical-case, 

time  4^^,  .  .  .  .  . 

Range  at  an  angle  of  3°  30^,  charge  2   lbs.,   spherical-case, 

time  3^^,  .  .  .  .  . 

Proof  range  of  powder,  -  -  .  . 

Weight  of  the  24-pdr.  shell,         .... 
Weight  of  the  round  of  canister,  -  -  P 

No.  of  bullets  in  a  round  of  canister. 


1,322 
600 


yards, 
yards. 


1,050  yardt 


880 

300 

17 

21 

■  48 


yards. 

yards. 

lbs. 

lbs. 

lbs. 


LESSON  XV. 

Service  of  an  Sinch   Oolumhiad,  mounted  on  a   Columhiad 

Carriage. 

Five  men  are  necessary:  one  gunner  and  four  other  cannoneers. 

149.  The  piece. is  in  battery. 

The  implements^  etc.,  are  arranged  as  follows: 

r  Two  on  each  side  of  the  carriage,  laid  on  the 
<  rails,  one  in  rear  of  each  front  truck-wheel, 
(^  and  one  in  rear  of  each  redr  truck-wheel. 
(  One  on  each  side  of  the  carriage,  laid  on  the 
J  ground  in  a  line  with  th«  cannoneers,  op- 
I  posite  to  the  traverse  wheels,  the  small  ends 
(^      towards  the  parapet, 

(  Laid  across  the  ties  at  the  junction  of  the 
(  braces,  handle  to  the  left, 
f  One  yard  behind  the  cannoneers  of  the  right, 
I  the  sponge  uppermost,  the  sponge  and  ram- 
•l  mer-heads  turned  from  the  parapet,  in- 
1  clined  slightly  from  the  piece,  and  sup- 
l^      ported  upon  a  prop. 

Suspended  from  the  knob  of  the  cascable. 

f  Cgntaining  friction  tubes,  and   the  lanyard, 

J       wound  in  St.  Andrew's  cross  upon  its  han- 

j       die.      Suspended  from   the   knob   of   the 

l^      cascable. 

[  Containing  the  gunner's  level,  breech-sight, 

GUNNER'S-POUCH,    I       ^^^f -^^'^IJ'  priming-wire,  gunner's  gimlet, 
'     I       vent-punch,  chalk-line,  and   chalk.      Sus- 
(      pendcd  from  the  knob  of  the  cascable. 


Truck-hand- 
spikes. 

Manceuvring- 
iiandspikes, 

Elevating-bar, 


Sponge-rammer, 

Haversack, 
Tube-pouch, 


116  MANUAL   FOR   HEAVY   ARTILLERY. 

Chocks      .     -     .    J  ^"^  ^^^  ^^^^  ^^'^^  ^^  ^^^^  piece,  laid  on  the 

'  I      front  of  the  ruiis. 

Vent-cover,     -     -     Covering  the  vent. 
ToMPiON,      -     -     -     In  the  muzzle. 
Tg  f  Leaning  against  the  parapet,  to  the  left  of  the 

'  1       piece. 

BuDGE-BARREL,  -  !  Containing  Cartridges,  at  the  safest  and  most 
(  convenient  place  in  rear  or  the  piece. 
When  several  columbiads  are  served  together,  there  will  be  only 
one  gunner's  level  and  two  vent-punches  to  each  battery,  not  ex- 
ceeding six  pieces.  To  the  same  battery  there  will  be  one  worm 
and  one  tci^cnch. 

The  shells  are  at  the  magazine,  or  other  safe  position,  and  are 
brought,  as  required,  to  the  phice  prescribed  for  the  budge-bairel. 

150.  The  cannoneers  having  been  marched  to  their  posts,  th:;  in- 
structor explains  to  them  the  names  and  uses  of  the  implements, 
and  the  nomenclatures  of  the  columbiad,  its  carriage,  and  the  battery. 

151.  To  cause  the  implements  to  be  distributed,  the  instructor 
commands: 

Take  Implements. 

The  gunner  s*"eps  to  the  knob  of  the  cascable  ;  takes  off  the  vent- 
cover,  handing  it  to  No.  2  to  place  against  the  parapet,  in  rear  of  his 
post ;  gives  the  tube-pouch  to  No.  8,  and  the  haversack  to  No.  4 ; 
equips  himself  with  his  own  pouch  and  the  finger-stall,  wearing  the 
latter  on  the  second  finger  of  the  left  hand  ;  takes  the  elevating  bar, 
and  stepping  between  the  rails,  levels  the  piece  conveniently  for 
loading;  applies  his  level  to  verify  theiine  of  sight  which  is  marked 
on  the  piece,  marking  it,  if  necessary,  with  the  chalk  line,  assisted 
by  No.  2;  and  resumes  his  post,  holding  the  elevating-bar  with  the 
right  hand. 

No.  3  equips  himself  with  the  tube-pouch. 

No.  4  equips  himself  with  the  haversack,  which  he  wears  from 
the  right  shoulder  to  the  left  side. 

Nos.  1,  2,  3,  and  4 'take  the  truck-handspikes  with  the  hand  fur- 
thest from  the  parapet,  and  carry  them  to  that  side,  holding  them 
vertically,  the  arm  extended  naturally. 

152.  The  instructor  causes  the  service  of  the  piece  to  be  executed 
by  the  following  commands  : 

1.  From  Battery. 

The  gunner  moves  two  paces  to  the  right  of  his  post. 


MANUAL    FOR    HEAVY   ARTILLERY.  117 

Nos.  1,  2,  3,  and  4,  f\icing  from  the  parapet,  place  the  wrenches 
on  the  ends  of  the  axle-trees,  the  handspikes  elevated  about  30°  to 
the  rear,  and  at  the  word  Heave  by  the  gunner,  bear  down  and 
throw  the  wheels  into  gear;  Nos.  3  and  4  immediately  after  laying 
their  handspikes  on  the  platform  in  front  of  their  posts. 

Nos.  1  and  2,  facing  IVom  the  parapet,  embar  in  the  most  conve- 
nient front  mortises  of  the  truck-wheels,  the  hand  furthest  from  the 
carriage  at  the  top  of  the  handspike,  the  other  hand  eight  inches 
lower. 

Nos.  3  and  4  go  to  the  assistance  of  Nos.  1  and  2,  and,  facing  to- 
wards them,  seize  the  handspikes  with  both  hands  between  those  of 
Nos.  1  and  2. 

Nos.  1,  2,  3,  and  4,  in  applying  themselves  to  the  carriage,  to  run 
it  fiom  or  to  battery,  break  to  the  rear  with  the  foot  nearest  to  the 
carriage. 

All  being  ready,  the  gunner  gives  the  command,  Heave. 

Nos.  1,  2,  3,.  and  4  act  togetiicr,  and  bear  upon  the  handspikes 
until  they  are  nea^'ly  down  to  the  rails,  when  the  gunner  commands, 
Unbar.  Nos.  1  and  2  let  go  the  handspikes  witli  the  hand  nearest 
to  the  carriage,  and  chock  the  wheels.  Nos.  3  and  4  withdraw  the 
hands] likes  and  pass  them  to  No.  1  and  2,  who  re-insert  them  in  the 
IVont  mortises. 

Tiie  gunner  again  gives  the  command,  Heave,  and  so  on,  until 
the  face  of  the  piece  is  about  one  yard  from  the  parapet,  when  he 
commands,  Halt."  Nos.  3  and  4  take  their  posts.  Nos.  1  and  2 
chock  the  wheels  as  before,  unbar,  and  place  the  wrench  of  their 
handspikes  on  the  ends  of  tlie  axle-tree  of  the  front  wheels.  At  the 
comniand  Out  of  Gkar  by  the  gunner,  they  throw  the  wheels  out 
of  licar;  lay  tl.eir  handspikes  on  the  rails  between  the  wheels;  and 
take  their  posts. 

2.   Loail  hy  Detail — LoAD. 

153.  Executed  as  in  Nos.  102  and  103.  The  gunner,  if  neces- 
s:^ry,  adjusts  the  piece  conveniently  for  loading  before  closing  the 
vent.     No.  4  brings  up  a  shell,  together  with  the  cartridge.       ^ 

3.  Sponge. 

15  L     Executed  as  in  No.  104. 


118  MANUAL   FOR   HEAVY   ARTILLERY. 


4.  Eam. 

155.  Executed  as  in  No.  105,  except  that  the  shell  is  set  care- 
fully home  without  being  rammed. 

5.  In  Battery. 

156.  Nos.  1  and  2  unchock  the  wheels,  and  place  the  chocks  on 
the  ties. 

Nos.  1,  2,  3,  and  4,  facing  towards  the  parapet,  apply  the  wrenches 
of  their  handspikes  to  the  ends  of  the  axle-trees;  Nos.  1  and  2  so  as 
to  throw  the  front  wheels  into  gear,  and  Nos.  3  and  4  so  as  to  throw 
the  rear  wheels  out  of  gear. 

The  gunner  commands,  Heave,  when  the  front  wheels  are  thrown 
into  gear. 

Should  the  carriage  run  too  easily  after  it  is  in  motion,  the  gun- 
ner will  command.  Rear  Wheels  out  of  Gear,  when  the  rear 
wheels  are  thrown  out  of  gear.  Nos.  3  and  4  each  take  a  chock 
and  hold  it  in  front  of  the  rear  wheels,  ready  to  apply  it  under  them 
if  necessary. 

When  the  head  of  the  cheeks  is  about  one  foot  from  the  end  of 
the  rails,  the  gunner  commands,  Chock,  when  Nos.  3  and  4  chock 
the  rear  wheels.  The  wheels  are  unchocked,  and  the  piece  is  run 
gently  into  battery,  by  Nos.  3  and  4  throwing  the  rear  wheels  alter- 
nately out  of  and  into  gear.  As  soon  as  the  head  of  the  carriage 
touches  the  hurters,  the  gunner  commands,  Out  of  Gear,  when 
the  front  wheels  are  thrown  out  of  gear  3  also  the  rear  wheels,  should 
they  be  in  gear.  Nos.  1,  2,  3,  and  4  take  their  posts,  and  lay  their 
handspikes  on  the  platform  just  in  front  of  them. 

*  6.  Point. 

157.  No.  3  passes  the  hook  of  the  lanyard  through  the  eye  of  a 
tube  from  front  to  rear;  holds  the  handle  of  the  lanyard  with  the 
rigljt  hand,  the  hook  between  the  thumb  and  forefinger;  and  stands 
ready  to  hand  it  to  the  gunner. 

Nos.  1  and  2,  passing  outside  of  the  other  cannoneers,  move  to 
the  rear  of  the  chassis,  and,  each  taking  one  of  the  manoeuvring 
handspikes,  embar  with  the  levelled  e,pd  under  the  traverse  wheels. 
For  traversing  large  angles,  Nos.  1,  2,  3,  and  4  apply  themselves  by 
hand  at  the  end  of  the  chassis. 


MANUAL   FOR   HEAVY   ARTILLERY.  119 

The  gunner  withdraws  the  priming-wire;  inserts  the  pawl  of  the 
elevating  machine  in  the  proper  notch  by  means  of  the  elevating 
bar,  and  with  the  breech  sight  gives  the  required  elevation  ;  No.  4 
turning  the  handle  of  the  screw  according  to  his  direction. 

The  moment  the  piece  is  correctly  pointed,  he  rises  on  the  left 
leg,  and  gives  the  word  Heady,  making  a  signal  with  both  hands, 
at  which  Nos.  1  and  2  unbar,  lay  down  the  handspikes,  and  resume 
their  post ;  receives  the  tube  from  No.  3,  which  he  inserts  in  the 
vent;  dismounts  from  the  chassis;  and  goes  to  the  windward  to  ob- 
serve the  effect  of  the  shot. 

No.  3  stretches  the  lanyard  as  in  No.  107. 

7.  Nmnher  one  (or  the  like) — FlRE. 

,   158.  Executed  as  in  No.  108. 
What  is  prescribed  in  No.  109  will  apply  to  this  piece. 

159.  Remark.— li'  the  piece  is  to  be  fired  at  high  angles,  it  is 
elevated  in  the  following  manner  : 

Nos.  1  and  2 — the  former  carrying  his  traversing  handspike  with 
him — move  to  the  mule ;  place  the  handspike  in  the  bore;  pass  the 
bight  of  a  truce-rope  over  it  ;  and  bear  down  slightly  on  the  hand- 
spike to  enable  the  gunner  to  frie  the  pawl  from  the  notch.  The 
gunner  draws  the  pawl  back  by  its  handle,  and  commands  Ease 
Away.  Nos.  1  and  2,  holding  the  ends  of  the  rope,  ease  down  the 
breech  steadily,  until  the  gunner  commands,  Steady,  when  he 
inserts  the  pawl  in  the  proper  notch. 

160.  To  continue  the  exercise,  the  instructor  resumes  the  series 
of  commands,  beginning  with  From  Battery  : 

To  change  2)osfs. 

To  load  for  action.  ^ 

To  cease  jiring. 

To  secure  piece,  and  replace  implements. 

To  leave  the  battery.  * 

Executed  as  in  Nos.  Ill,  112,  113, 114,  and  115. 


CHAPTER  V. 

AMMUNITION. 

Troops  in  the  field  should  not  only  be  supplied  with  a  sufficient 
quantity  of  ammunition,  but  the  men  of  the  command  should  be 
taught  how  to  prepare  it.  Cartridges  for  small  arms  are  made  of 
paper,  in  the  following  manner  :  Having  prepared  the  paper,  which 
should  be  strong,  but  not  too  thick,  by  cutting  it  first  into  strips 
eight  and  a  halt  inches  wide,  then  cutting  these  strips  crosswise  into 
smaller  strips  four  and  a  half  i.iches  in  width,  and  then  cutting  these 
last  diagonally,  so  that  the  pieces  will  be  three  inches  on  one  side 
and  five  and  a  half  on  the  other;  the  pieces  are  then  rolled  on  a 
small  cylindrical  stick  of  the  same  diameter  as  the  ball  to  be  used, 
about  six  inches  long,  having  a  spherical  cavity  at  one  end  and 
rounded  at  the  other.  The  paper  is  laid  on  a  table  with  the  side 
perpendicular  to  the  bavses  next  the  workman,  the  broad  end  to  the 
left;  the  stick  laid  on  it  v/ith  the  concave  end  half  an  inch  from 
the  broad  edge  of  the  paper,  and  enveloped  in  it  once.  The  right 
hand  is  then  laid  flat  on  the  stick,  and  all  the  paper  rolled  on  it. 
The  projecting  end  of  the  paper  is  now  neatly  folded  down  into  the 
concavity  of  the  stick,  pasted,  and  pressed  on  a  ball  imbedded  in 
the  table  for  the  purpose. 

Instead  of  being  pasted,  these  cylinders  may  be  closed  by  choking 
with  a  string,  tied  to  the  table,  and  having  at  i^he  other  end  a  stick 
by  wh*h  to  hold  it.  The  convex  end  of  the  former  is  placed  to  the 
left,  and  after  the  paper  is  rolled  on,  the  fo7vner  is  taken  in  the  left 
hand,  and  a  turn  made  around  it  with  the  choking  string  half  an 
inch  from  the  end  of  the  paper.  Whilst  the  string  is  drawn  tight 
with  the  right  hand,  the  former  is  held  in  the  left  with  the  fore- 
finger resting  on  the  end  of  the  cylinder,  folding  it  neatly  down 
upon  the  end  of  the  former.  The  choke  is  then  firmly  tied  with 
twine. 

For  ball  cartridges,  make  the  cylind%rs  and  choke  them  as  above 
described,  and  the  choke*^tied  without  cutting  the  twine.  The  for- 
mer is  then  withdrawn,  the  ball  put  in,  and  the  concave  end  of  the 


AMMUNITION.  121 

former  put  in  after  it.  Thye  half  hitches  are  made  a  little  above  the 
ball,  and  the  twine  cut  oiF. 

For  ball  and  buckshot  cartridges,  make  the  cylinder  as  before, 
insert  three  buckshot,  fasten  them  with  a  half  hitch,  and  insert  and 
secure  the  ball  as  before. 

For  buckshot  cartridges,  make  the  cylinder  as  before,  insert  four 
tiers  of  three  buckshot  each,  as  at  first,  making  a  half  hitch  between 
the  tiers,  and  ending  with  a  double  hitch. 

To  fill  the  cartridges,  the  cylinders  are  placed  upright  in  a  box, 
and  the  charge  poured  into  each  from  a  conical  charger  of  the 
appropriate  size ;  the  mouths  of  the  cylinders  are  now  folded  down 
on  the  powder  by  two  rectangular  folds,  and  the  cartridges  bundled 
in  packages  of  ten.  For  this  a  folding  box  is  necessary ;  it  is  made 
with  two  vertical  sides  at  a  distance  from  each  other  equal  to  five 
diameters  of  the  ball,  and  two  diameters  high. 

The  manner  of  preparing  ammunition  for  artillery  is  found  in  the 
Manual  of  Artillery  in  preceding  chapter. 


122 


AMMUNITION. 


TABLE. 

DIMENSIONS   OF    CARTRIDGE-BAGS. 


00 

GQ 

o> 

OQ 

•ut-8 

d 

to 

XO 

05 

x> 

00 

, 

.< 

O 

cc 

, 

s< 

O 

CO 

•ui-oi 

•rH 

00 

00 

'  OJ 

•9§0TS  -Ut-g 

c 

c^ 

rj5 

CJ 

J3 

T? 

CO 

o 
o 

•qoai-8 

^ 

CO 

00 

o 

d 

-<1 

.^- 

(M 

tH 

en 

(1> 

o 

CO 
CO 

OS 

o 

•qoui-oi; 

fl 

l> 

^ 

"^ 

00 

s 

U 

(>J 

T-l 

T-( 

^ 

o 

0) 

•ipd-si 

c* 

■^ 

OJ 

T— 1 

o 

CO 

CO 

^ 

IF. 

»o 

d 

CO 

<x> 

1> 

\o 

0) 

^ 

•jpd-8i 

.s 

"^ 

T-H 

T-H 

I> 

Tf 

O 

t— < 

\rs 

03 

C/2 

'iip^-fZ 

rj 

vo 

00* 

1— 1 

oi 

CO 

o 

CO 

i^ 

1 

t^ 

CO 

SJ 

-a:; 

UO 

T— 1 

vrt) 

• 

; 

O 

1— ^ 

•jpd-se 

.:: 

V-t 

»— 1 

CO 

<^ 

£ 

00 

rt 

cc 

. 

Oi 

VO 

yj 

# 

Mpd-st 

•  r^ 

CO 

00 

1— < 

o 

1—1 

CO 

5 

5 

<2 

en 

W) 

o  -rl 

bD 

^^ 

1 

o 
o 

W3 

rQ 

>-l 

o 

(*_ 
o 

■  o  i! 

o.  ro 
•^  c 

gee 
o  a 

■si 

C3 

o 

t 

1 

0) 
M 

fi 

<<-l 

(J3 

# 

4) 

c 

to 

J5 
O 

13 

ce 

C    ji, 

,:;j 

c 

s 

Q 

0) 

^ 

1=) 

X3Sr  D  EX. 


Field    Fortifications. 


. 

PAGK. 

PAGB. 

Abatis,     - 

-   - 

- 

26 

Interior  Slope  of  a  Parapet, 

- 

5 

Attack  on  Field  Works 

- 

40 

Inundations, 

- 

- 

28 

Attacking  Houses, 

- 

- 

42 

Intrenching  a  Village 

" 

- 

40 

"           Barricades, 

- 

- 

43 

Lunette, 

- 

- 

12 

Banquette, 

- 

- 

9 

Loopholes, 

- 

18 

37 

Berme, 

- 

9 

Lines, 

-     31, 

32 

34 

Blockhouse, 

- 

- 

19 

"      of  Tenailles, 

- 

32 

Bastioned  Lines, 

- 

- 

33 

"       with  Jnvervals 

or  Brok< 

in 

Broken  Lines, 

- 

34 

Lines,    - 

- 

. 

34 

Barricades, 

- 

- 

37 

Outlines  of  Field  Works, 

. 

10 

Caponniere, 

- 

- 

14 

Octagonal  Redoubt, 

- 

. 

17 

Constructions, 

- 

- 

16 

Star  Fort, 

- 

- 

17 

Chevaux-de-frise, 

- 

26 

Obstacles, 

. 

- 

25 

Crows  Feet, 

- 

- 

27 

Profi.le  of  an  Intrenchnient, 

- 

3 

CrfemailUre, 

- 

32 

-33 

Penetration  of  Shot, 

- 

- 

5 

Ditch,       -             -  ^ 

9,  14, 

18, 

24 

Parapet, 

- 

- 

5,8 

Double  Redans. 

•• 

- 

14 

Plongde, 

- 

- 

8 

Demi-Bastioned  Forts, 

- 

- 

18 

Pentagonal  Redoubt, 

- 

- 

16 

Defilading  of  Field  Works, 

- 

20 

Plane  of  Sight,    - 

- 

- 

20 

Distribution  of  Workin 

g  Party 

5 

23 

Defilade, 

- 

- 

20 

Dams, 

- 

28,, 

29 

Profiling, 

- 

- 

23 

Defence  of  Field  Worl^ 

s, 

35 

36 

Palisades, 

- 

- 

25 

Exterior  Slope  of  a  Parapet, 

r- 

5 

Pointed  Stakes,   - 

- 

- 

27 

Entanglement,     - 

- 

- 

27 

Revetment, 

- 

- 

6 

Field  Works, 

- 

3, 

40 

Redan, 

- 

11 

12 

Fascines;, 

- 

3,7 

Redoubt, 

-     12, 

16, 

17 

Fascine  Gads,     - 

- 

- 

7 

Reduits, 

30 

Forts  with  Bastions, 

- 

- 

17 

Sand  Bags, 

- 

- 

7 

Fraises,    - 

- 

- 

25 

Sods  of  Turf,       - 

- 

- 

8 

Fougasses, 

27 

28 

Superior  Slope  of  the 

Parapet 

> 

8 

Fortifying  House.-. 

- 

- 

38 

Star  Fort, 

14,  15, 

16, 

17 

Gabions, 

- 

- 

6 

Stockade  Work, 

19 

Gun  Batteries,     - 

- 

- 

8 

Thickness  of  Parapet 

- 

- 

5 

Gorges  of  Works, 

- 

- 

27 

Terreplein, 

- 

. 

9 

Hexagonal  Redoubt. 

- 

- 

17 

Triple  Redan, 

- 

. 

12 

'•            Star  Fort, 

- 

- 

17 

Tambour, 

- 

. 

19 

Intrenchmonts,    with 

Flanking 

Trous  fJe  loup,     - 

- 

- 

26 

Arranuetnents. 

- 

- 

4 

T^tes  do  Pont,     - 

- 

- 

30 

V24 


INDEX. 


Artillery, 

Calibre,    - 

Carcasses, 

Cominon  Case, 

Canister. 

Dispari,  •     - 

Guns, 

Grape  Shot, 

Gur)po^vder, 

Gun  Platform. 

Howitzers, 

Hand  Grenades, 

Mortars, 

Point-Blank, 


I'AGE. 

-  44  Powder,  -  ^ 

-  47  Portfire, 

-  48  Ricochet, 

-  48  Range  of  Gun.     - 

-  44   Rockets, 

44,  45  Round  Shot, 

-  48  Service  Charge  of  Powder, 

-  48  Shells, 

-  49  Shrapnells, 
^     46  Shell  Fuze, 

48  Trunnions,  -  » 

-  46  Tangent-Scale,    - 

45.  46!  Windage, 


Manual  for  Light  Artillery, 


50 


Attaching  Shafts. 

Coirnnands. 

Cannoneers, 

Changing  Posts, 

Coming  into  Action, 

Detachments, 

Duties  of  the  Cannoneers, 

Detaching  Shafts, 

Forming  the  Detachment, 


44 

PAGE. 

-  45 

-  48 

45,  49 

-  45 

-  47 

-  49 

-  45 

46,  47 

-  47 

-  48 

-  44 

-  44 

-  44 


56 


561  Locking  Rope,     - 

-  52i  Moving  the  Piece  by  Means  of 
52|       the  Cannoneers,  -  -     57 

-  55:  Posts  of  the  Detachments,  -     51 

-  60|  Packing,  -  -     60,  61,  62 
51,  58|  Service  of  the  Piece,      -  52,  55 

-  52j  "  several  Pieces,  -     58 

-  57|  Unhitching,  -  -  59,  60 

-  51  j  Unpacking,  -  -     60,  63,  64 

Manual  for  Heavy  Artillery,  -        65 


Battery,  -  -  66,  70] 

Colunibiad,  -  -  -     65 

Calibre,  -  -  -     66 

Casemate,  -  -  -     65 

Detachments,       -  -  66,  67 

Flank  Casemate,  -  -     65 

Garrison  Artillery.  -  -     65 

Guns,        -  -  -  -     65 

Howitzer,  -  -  -     65 

Heavy  Artillery,  -  -     66 

Implements,        -  -  68,  69 

Kinds  of  Ordnance.  -  -     66 

Mortar,    -  -  -  - 

Platform, 

Service  of  the  Piece, 
Siege  Artillery, 
Sea-Coast  Artillery, 
Service  of  a  Gun  moimted  on  a 

Siege  Carriage, 
Service  of  an  8-inch  Siege  How- 
itzer mounted  on  a  24-pouBd- 
iM-  Siege  Carriage, 

AMMUN'lTinx, 


65 
66 
65 
65 
65 

681 


78 


Service  of  a  lO-in#h  Siege  Mortar 

Service  of  an  8-incu  Siege  Mor- 
tar.       -  -       -,     . 

Service  of  a  Coehorn  Mortar,     - 

Service  of  a  10-inch  Sea-Coast 
Mortar, 

Service  of  a  13-inch  Sea-Coa?t 
Mortar, 

Service  of  a  Stone  Mortar, 

Service  of  a  Gun  mounted  on  a 
Barbette  Carriage, 

Service  of  a  Giin  inounted  on  a 
Casemate  Carriage, 

Service  of  an  8-inch  Colnmbiad 
mounted  on  a  Casemate  Car- 
riage,  - 

Service  of  a  24-pilr.  Howitzer 
mounted  on  a  Flank  Casemate 
Carriage, 

Service  of  an  8  inch  Columbiad 
mounted  on  a  Columbiad  Car 
riage.    - 

120 


87 

93 
95 

96 

97 
97 

98 

-   106 


-   Ill 


11] 


-115 


MILIT^VKY     BOOKS. 


Published  and   for  sale  by 

J.  W.  RANDOLPH,  Richmond,  Va. 

Al^o  for  sale  bv  Booksellers  "onerallv. 


INSTRUCTIONS 

For  Officers  and  Non-Commissioned  Officers  of  Cavnhy,  on  Outpost  Duty 

BY 

Lieut.  Col.  Von  ARENTSCIIILBT, 

First  Hussars  King's  German  Legion  : 
With  an  Abridgement  of  them  by 

Lieut.  Col..  Tjje  Hon.  F.  PONSONBY, 
Twelfth   Li^ht  Dragoons.  Price — 50  Cents. 

DIRECTIONS 

*  FOR 

COOKING  BY   TROOPS 

CAMP  AND  HOSPITAL. 

Prepared  for  the  Army.     With  Essays  on 

"TAKING  FOOD"  and  "WHAT  FOOD." 

BY 

FLORENCE   NIGHTINGALE. 

Price — '25  CeiMS. 

THE    HAND    BOOK 

OF 

V 

Br 

Captain   JOSEPH   ROBERTS, 

Priop — Iff   Cru<.<.  Fourth  RoLnnifMit  ArtilleiN.  I'.  S    Aiin\. 


SKIRMISH    DUILI^ 

FOR    , 

MOUNTED     TROOPS. 

By  Capt.  D.  H.  MAURY,  C.  S.  A. 

COOPER'S 

CAVALRY  TACTICS 

AND  A 

MANUAL  FOR  COLT^S  REVOLVER. 

Price — 65  Cents.  Willi  Plates. 


Capt.  VIELE'S 

H^ISTD   BOOK 

OF 

FIELD  FORTIFICATIONS  AND  ARTILLERY; 

ALSO  A 

M.41AL  FOR  LIGHT  Al  HEAVY  ARTILLERY, 

Price~$l  25.  •  With   Plates. 


SOIElSrOE   OIF"  "W^K/! 

TACTICS 

FOR 

OFFICERS 

OF 

INFANTRY,  CAVALRY  AND  ARTILLERY. 

Arranged  and  Compiled  by 

L.    V.    BUCKHOLTZ. 

One  Volume,  l:2mo.     Price — 75  Cents. 


INFANTRY  CAMP  DUTY,   FIELD   FORTIFICA- 
TION,  AND  COAST  DEFENSE. 

Prepared  and  Arranged  by 

Capt.    L.    v.    BUCKHOLTZ. 

With  Plates.      Ifimo..  mnslin.     Price — 50  Cent?. 


Will  be  Published  October  10th,  1861; 

E[A.]SrD    BOOK 


FOR 


CONTAINING 

Practical  Instructions  in  Campaign  Duties — The  Recruit — The  Company — 
The  Regiment — The  March — The  Camp — Guard  and  Guard-Mounting 
— Rations,  and  Mode  of  Cooking  Them.     With  Ilhistrations. 

By  EGBERT  L.  VIELE, 

LATE    U.  S.  A. 

Captain  Engineers,  Seventh  Regiment,  N.  G. 
Price —  75  Cents. 


«*If  this  be  Treason,  make  the  most  of  it.'> 


ANTICIPATIONS  OF  THE  FUTURE, 

TO   SERVE    AS 

LESSONS  FOR  THE  PRESENT  TIME. 

In  the  form  of  Extracts  op  Letters  from,  an  English  Resident  in  the 
United  Slates,  to  the  London  Times,  from  1864  to  1870. 

With  an  Appendix  on  the  Causes  and  Consequences  of  the  Independence 

of  the  South. 

By    EDMUND    RUFFIN. 

12mo.  muslin,  426  pages.     Price  $1 ;  or  $1   25  by  mail, 

FL^I^T_A.TION    BOOK. 

PLANTATION  AND  FARM  INSTRUCTION. 
REGULATION,  RECORD, 

INVENTORY  AND  ACCOUNT  BOOK. 

For  the  use  of  Managers  of  Estates,  and  for  the  better  ordering  and  man- 
agement of  plantation  and  iarm  business  in  many  particulars. 

BY  A  SOUTHERN  PLANTER. 

"  Order  is  Heaven's  first  law." 
New   and  improved  edition,  cap   folio,  half  calf;  price  $1   50.     Also  u 
larger  edition,  for  Cotton  Plantations;  price  $2.     Either  sent  by  mail, 
post  paid,  for  2ri  cent.s  extra. 


s  o  u  T  H  ]i;  n  ]sr 
BOOK   PUBLISHING   HOUSE, 

ESTJ^BIliISiaCEID    1833- 

J.  W.  RANDOLPH, 

BOOKSELLER,   PUBLISHEB,    STATIONER 

AND 

MXJSIO   DEA.1L,ER, 

Offers  on  the  best  terms  for  cash  or  approved  credit,  the  largest  assorimenl 
of  goods  in  his  line  to  be  found  south  of  Philadelphia. 

THE    STOCK   EMBRACES 

LAW,  MEDICINE,  THEOLOGY. 

HISTORY.  BIOGRAPHY,  POLITICS, 

SCHOOL,  CLASSICS,  JUVENILE,  NOVELS, 

POETRY,  and  MISCELLANEOT!rS  BOOKS, 

In  English  and  oiher  languages. 

Particular  attention  given  ta  the   collection   df  Rare  Work.^.     Book.'*  iiit- 
p(»rted  to  order. 

AMERICAN, 

ENGLISH 

AND 

FRENCH  STATIONERY, 

Of  the  be.~t  quality. 

A  large  stock  of  STANDARD  MUSIC,  and  all  the  New  Popular  Piece.< 
are  for  sale  soon  as  published. 

BLANK    BOOKS   made  to  order,  and  all  kinds  of 

BOOK-BINDING-  executed  in  good  style. 

CATALOGUES  will  be  mailed  to  all  who  send  five  cents  to  pay  the 
postage 

OLD     BOOKS 

'Taken  in  Exchange  for  New  Works. 

J.  W.  RANDOLPH, 

l-'l  MAIN  STREET,  RICHMOND.  VA, 


OFFERED  TO  THE  TRADE  AND  FOR  SALE  BY 

J.  W.  RANDOLPH, 

121  Main  street,  Kichmond,  Va. 

HALL'S  (EVERARD)  DIGESTED   INDEX    OF    THE  ' 

VIRGINIA  REPORTS,  containing  all  the  points  argued 
and  determined  in  the  Court  of  Appeals  of  Virginia,  from 
Washington  to  third  Leigh,  inclusive,  with  a  table  of  the 
names  of  cases  reported,  2  vols.  8vo,  sheep,  Richmond, 
1825  and  '35 P  00 

HENING&MUNFORD.  REPORTS  OF  CASES  argued 
and  determined  in  the  Supreme  Court  of  Appeals  of  Virginia, 
with  select  cases  relating  chiefly  to  points  of  practice  decided 
by  the  Superior  Court  of  Chancery  for  the  Richmond  Dis- 
trict, by  W.  W.  Hening  and  W.  Munford,  a  new  and  ojily 
complete  edition,  with  memoirs  of  the  Judges  whose  deci- 
sions are  reported  ;  the  present  rules  of  the  Court  of  Appeals, 
and  of  the  Chancery  Court  in  Richmond  ;  references  to  sub- 
sequent decisions  of  the  Court  of  Apj)eals,  and  to  existing 
statutes  in  paria  materia,  with  the  points  herein  reported, 
and  a  list  of  the  cases  overruled.  Edited  by  B.  B.  Minor, 
L.  B.,  4  vols.  Svo,  sheep,  Richmond,  1854 20  00 

JEFFERSON'S  (THOMAS)  REPORTS  OF  CASES  de- 
termined in  the  General  Court  of  Virginia  from  1730  to 
1740,  and  from  1768  to  1772,  half  calf,  Charlottesville,  1829,     2  50 

LAWYER'S  GUIDE.  THE  AMERICAN  PLEADER 
AND  LAWYER'S  GUIDE,  in  commencing,  prosecuting 
and  defending  actions  at  common  law  and  suits  in  equity, 
with  full  and  correct  precedents  of  pleadings  in  the  several 
cases  which  most  frequently  occur,  adapted  to  the  practice 
of  the  United  States,  by  W.  W.  Hening,  2  vols.  Svo,  sheep. 
New  York,  1811  and  '26 8  00 

MATTHEW'S  (J.  M.)  GUIDE  TO  COMMISSIONERS 
IN  CHANCERY,  with  practical  Forms  for  the  discharge 
of  their  duties,  adapted  to  the  new  Code  of  Virginia,  Svo, 
sheep,  Richmond,   1850 2  50 

MATTHEW'S  DIGEST  OF  THE  LAWS  OF  VIRGINIA, 
of  a  civil  nature  and  of  a  permanent  character,  and  a  general 
operation,   illustrated   by  judicial  decisions,  to  which  are 


\ 


prefixed  the  Constitutions  of  the  United  States  and  Virginia, 

by  J.  M.  Matthews,  2  vols.  8vo,  sheep,  Richmond,  1856-7,    12  00 

THE  SAME  INTERLEAVED  WITH  WRITING  PAPER 

FOR  NOTES,  2  vols 17  00 

MUNFORD'S  (WILLIAM)  REPORTS  OF  CASES  argued 
and  determined  in  the  Supreme  Court  of  Appeals  of  Vir- 
ginia, 6  vols.  Svo,  sheep,  Richmond  and  New  York,  1812, 
&c 36  00 

PATTON  &  HEATH.  A  GENERAL  INDEX  TO 
GRATTAN'S  REPORTS,  from  second  to  eleventh,  in- 
clusive, by  J.  M.  Patton  and  R.  B.  Heath,  Svo,  sheep, 
Richmond,  1856 3  50 

PATTON  &  HEATH.  REPORTS  OF  CASES  decided 
in  the  Special  Court  of  Appeals  of  Virginia,  held  at  Rich- 
mond, and  a  General  Index  to  Grattan's  Reports,  from  2d 
to  11th  vol.,  inclusive,  by  J.  M.  Patton  and  R  B.  Heath, 
vol.  1,  8vo,  sheep,   Richmond,   1856 6  00 

PATTON  &  HEATH.  REPORTS  OF  CASES  decided 
in  the  Special  Court  of  Appeals,  held  in  Richmond 
1855-6-7,  by  J.  M.  Patton  and  R.  B.  Heath,  2  vols.  8vo, 
sheep,  Richmond,   1855-7 7  00 

QUARTERLY  LAW  JOURNAL,  A.  B.  Guigon,  Editor, 
vol.  1,  1856,  vol.  2,  1857,  vol.  3,  1858,  vol.  4,  1859,  8vo, 
sheep,  Richmond,  per  volume 5  00 

RANDOLPH'S  (PEYTON)  REPORTS  OF  CASES  argued 
and  determined  in  the  Court  of  Appeals  of  Virginia,  6  vols. 
Svo,  sp.  Richmond,  Va.,  1823,  &c 24  00 

RITCHIE'S  (THOMAS,  Jr.)  TRIAL.  A  full  report, 
embracing  all  the  evidence  and  arguments  in  the  case  of 
the  Commonwealth  of  Virginia  vs.  T.  Ritchie,  Jr.,  for  the 
killing  of  John  Hampden  Pleasants,  to  which  is  added  an 
appendix  showing  the  action  of  the  Court  in  relation  to  the 
other  parties  connected  with  the  said  case,  Svo,  paper.  New 
York,  1846 25 

VIRGINIA.  PAY  AND  MUSTER  ROLLS  OF  THE 
VIRGINIA  MILITIA  IN  THE  WAR  OF  1812,  Svo 
half  calf,  Richmond,  1851-2 15  00 

VIRGINIA  CASES.  A  Collection  of  Cases  decided  by  the 
General  Court  of  Virginia,  chiefly  relating  to  the  Penal 
Laws  of  the  Commonwealth,  commencing  1789  and  ending 
1826,  copied  from  the  Records  of  the  said  Court,  with  ex- 
planatory notes,  by  Judges  Brockenbrough  and  Holmes, 
second  edition,  with  abstracts  prefixed  to  the  cases,  2  vols, 
in  1,  Svo,  sheep,  Richmond,  1826  and  1853  6  00 

VIRGINIA  LAW  OF  CORPORATIONS,  ACTS  OF 
THE  GENERAL  ASSEMBLY  compiled  from  the  code 
of  Virginia,  together  with  an  act  passed  in  1837,  relating 
to  Manufacturing  and  Mining  Companies,  Svo,  paper, 
Richmond,  1853 5;') 


WYTHE'S  (GEO.)  REPORTS.  Decisions  of  cases  in 
Virginia  of  (he  High  Court  of  Chancery,  with  remarks  upon 
Decrees  by  the  Court  of  Appeals,  reversing  some  of  those 
d'^cisions,  by  George  Wythe,  2d  and  only  complete  edition. 
With  a  Memoir  of  the  author.  Analysis  of  the  Cases,  and 
an  Index, by  t^.  B.  Minor,  L.  B.  And  with  an  Appendix, 
containing  references  to  cases  in  pari  materia,  an  essay  on 
lapse,  joint  tenants  and  tenants  in  common,  &,c.,  &.C.,  by 
VVm.  Green,  Esq.     8vo,  slieep.     Richmond,  1852 4  00 

WHIT'^.  ACRE  vs.  BLACK  ACRE,  a  Case  at  Law,  re- 
ported by  J.  G.,  Esq.,  a  retired  barrister  of  Lincolnshire, 
England,  18mo,  mus.,  Richmond,  18.^6 75 

VIRGINIA.  RULES  OF  THE  COURT  OF  APPEALS 
from  its  establislunent  to  the  present  time.  Also,  Rules  of 
tiie  District  Courts  of  Fredericksburg  and  Williamsburg. 
8vo.,  pa[?er.     Richmond 10 

GILMER'S   (F.  VV.)   VIRGINIA  REPORTS.     8vo.,  calf. 

Richmond.  1821 2  00 

GRAT TAN'S  (P.  R.)  VIRGINIA   REPORTS.     15  vols  , 

8vo,  call^.     Richmond,   1845-60.     Per  volume 4  00 

LEIGH'S   (B.  VV.)  VIRGINIA  REPORTS.     12  vols.,  Svo, 

calf.     Richmond,  1830-44.     Per  volume 4  00 

ROBINSON'S  (C.)  VIRGINIA   REPORTS.     2  vols.,  Svo, 

calf.     Richmond,  1843-4.     Per  volume 4  00 

HENING  (VV.  VV.)  &  SHEPHERD'S  (S.)  STATUTES 
OF  VIRGINIA  from  1619  to  1807.  16  vols.,  Svo,  sheep. 
Richmond,  1823-36 .    ...    13  00 

VIRGINIA  ACTS  OF  ASSEMBLY  from  1808  to  1860. 
Svo,  half  sheep.     Richmond 

SELECTIONS  OF  THE  MOST  IMPORTANT  POR- 
TIONS OF  THE  REPORTS  OF  THE  REVISOR'S 
OF  VIRGINIA  CODE.  With  notes  by  A.  H.  Sands. 
Svo,  sheep.     In  press 

:e»oil.itios. 

tucker's  (h  st.  george)  lectures  on  natu- 
RAL LAW,  also  Lectures  on  Government,  12mo,  muslin, 
Charlottesville,  1844 75 

ANTICIPATIONS  OF  THE  FUTURE,  TO  SERVE  AS 
LESSONS  FOR  THE  PRESENT  TIME.  Extracts 
from  letters  written  from  Washington  to  the  London  Times 
during  the  years  1864-5-6-7-8.  12mo,  mus.,  Richmond, 
I860 100 

TUCKER'S  (H.  ST.  GEORGE)  LECTURES  ON  CON- 
STITUTIONAL  LAW,  for  the  use  of  the  Law  Class  of 
the  University  of  Virginia,  12mo,  mus.,  Riclimond,  1843..  75 

VIRGINIA  POLITICS.  A  History  of  the  Political  Cam- 
paign in  Va.  in  1855,  to  which  is  added  a  review  of  the 
position  of  parties  in  the  Union,  and  a  statement  of  the 
political  issues  distinguishing  them  on  the  eve  of  the  Presi- 


dential  Campaig;n  of  1856,  by  J.  P.  Hambleton,  M.  D.,  8vo, 
mus.,  Richmond,  1856 2  50 

VIRGINIA  CONVENTION.  Proceeding  and  Debates  of 
the  Va.  State  Convention  of  1829-30,  to  which  are  sub- 
joined the  new  Constitution  of  Virginia,  and  the  votes  of 
the  people,  8vo,  calf,  Richmond,  1830 5  00 

VIRGINIA  STATISTICS.  Documents  containing  statis- 
tics ordered  to  be  printed  by  the  State  Convention  sitting 
in  the  city  of  Richmond,  1850-51,  8vo,  calf,  Richmond, 
1851 2  50 

VIRGINIA  CONVENTION.  Journal,  Acts  and  Proceed- 
ings of  a  General  Convention  of  the  State  of  Virginia  as- 
sembled at  Richmond  1850, 8vo,  half  calf,  Richmond,  1850.     5  00 

VIRGINIA  CONVENTION  1850-51.  Register  of  the  De- 
bates and  Proceedings  of  the  Virginia  Reform  Convention, 
(imperfect,)  8vo,  half  sheep,  Richmond,  1851 3  00 

VIRGINIA.  Journal  of  the  Senate  and  House  of  Delegates 
for  various  years.     Richmond. 

VIRGINIA.     Journal  of  the  Convention  of  1776.    4to,  half 

sheep.     Richmond,  1816 2  00 

ELLETT'S  ESSAYS  ON  THE  LAW  OF  TRADE,  in 
reference  to  the  Works  of  Internal  Improvement  in  the 
U.S.     8vo,  mus.,  Richmond,  1839 150 

LETTERS  OF  CURTIUS,  written  by  the  late  John  Thom- 
son, of  Petersburg;  to  which  is  added  a  Speech  delivered 
by  him  in  August,  '95,  on  the  British  Treaty ;  to  which  a 
short  Sketch  of  his  Life  is  prefixed.  12mo,  paper.  Rich- 
mond, 1804 1  00 

JEFFERSON.  Memoir,  Correspondence  and  Miscellanies 
from  the  Papers  of  Thomas  Jefferson.  Edited  by  Thomas 
Jefferson  Randolph.  4  vols,,  8vo,  boards,  Charlottesville, 
1829 5  00 

JEFFERSON.  Observations  on  the  Writings  of  Thomas 
Jefferson,  with  particular  reference  to  the  attack  they  con- 
tain on  the  Memory  of  the  late  Gen'l  Henry  Lee.  In 
series  of  letters,  by  H,  Lee.  2nd  edition.  With  an  Intro- 
duction and  Notes,  by  Charles  C.  Lee.  8vo,  mus.  Phila- 
delphia, 1839 1  75 

LONDON  (D.H.)  ON  THE  COMMERCIAL,  AGRICUL- 
TURAL AND  INTELLECTUAL  INDEPENDENCE 
OF  VIRGINIA  AND  THE  SOUTH.  8vo,  paper.  Rich- 
mond, 1860 25 

VIRGINIAN  (THE)  HISTORY  OF  THE  AFRICAN 
COLONIZATION.  (This  contains,  among  other  docu- 
ments, portions  of  the  Debate  on  Slavery  in  the  Virginia 
Legislature  of  1832.)  Edited  by  Rev.  P.  Slaughter.  8vo, 
mus.,  Richmond,  1855 1  00 

RUFFIN'S  (EDMUND)  AFRICAN  COLONIZATION 
UNVEILED.      Slavery  and   Free  Labor  described   and 


compared.  The  Political  Economy  of  Slatrery ;:  (Sr*,-  the' 
Institution  considered  in  regard  to  its  influence  oTii  public' 
wealth  and  the  general  welfare.  Two  Great  Evili*  of  Vir- 
ginia, and  their  one  Common  Remedy,  8vo,  pa,  Rich- 
mond, 1860.     The  lour  pamphlets,  each ,,....         10 

BEVERLY'S  (ROBERT)  HISTORY  OF  VIRGINIA.  In 
four  parts.  I.  The  history  of  the  settlement  of  Virginia, 
and  the  government  thereof,  to  the  year  1706.  II.  The 
natural  productions  and  conveniences  of  the  country,  suited 
to  trade  and  improvement.  III.  The  native  Indians,  their 
religion,  laws  and  customs,  in  war  and  peace.  IV.  The 
present  state  of  the  country,  as  to  the  polity  of  the  gov- 
ernment, and  the  improvements  of  the  land,  to  10th  of 
June,  1720.  By  Robert  Beverly,  a  native  of  the  place. 
Re-printed  from  the  author's  second  revised  London  edi- 
tion of  1792,  with  an  introduction  by  Charles  Campbell, 
author  of  the  "Colonial  History  of  Virginia."     14  plates, 

8vo,  mus.     Richmond,  1855 2  50 

AN  ACCOUNT  OF  DISCOVERIES  IN  THE  WEST 
until  1519,  and  of  Voyages  to  and  along  the  Atlantic  Coast 
of  North  America  from  1520  to  1573.  Prepared  for  the 
Virginia  Historical  and  Philosophical  Society,  by  Conway 
Robinson.  8vo,mus.  Richmond,  1848.  (Published  at  $5.)  2  50 
JEFFERSON'S  (THOMAS)  NOTES  ON  THE  STATE 
OF  VIRGINIA.  A  new  edition,  prepared  by  the  author, 
containing  many  new  notes  never  before  published. 

It  is  printed  from  President  Jetierson's  copy  (^tockdale's 
London  edition  of  1787)  of  the  Notes  on  Virginia,  with 
his  last  additions  (they  are  numerous)  and  corrections  in 
manuscript,  and  four  maps  of  Caves,  Mounds,  Fortifica- 
tions, he. 

Letters  from  Gen.  Dearborn  and  Judge  Gibson,  relating 
to  the  Murder  of  Logan,  &c. 

Fry  and  Jetierson's  Map  of  Virginia,  Maryland,  Dela- 
ware, and  Pennsylvania — very  valuable  on  account  of  the 
Public  Places  and  Private  Residences,  which  are  not  to  be 
found  on  any  other  Map. 

A  Topographical  Analysis  of  Virginia,  for  1790 — a  curi- 
ous and  useful  sheet  foi  historical  reference. 

Translations  of  all  Jefferson's  Notes  in  Foreign  Lan* 
guages,  by  Prof.  Scheie  de  Vere,  of  the  University  of 
Virginia. 

Svo,  mus.     Richmond,  1853 2  50 

SMITH'S  (M.)  GEOGRAPHICAL  VIEW  OF  THE 
BRITISH  POSSESSIONS  IN  NORTH  AMERICA. 
18mo,  sheep.     Baltimore,  1814 85 


6 

VIRGINIA  CONVENTION  OF  1776:  Historical  and  Bio- 
graphical.   By  H.  B.  Grip;sby.   8vo,  mns.    Richmond,  T855.     1  50 

OREGON,  OUR  RIGHT  AND  TITLE:  containing-  an 
account  of  the  condition  of  the  Ore^^on  Territory,  its  soil, 
climate  and  geo:2;raphiral  position  ;  together  with  a  state- 
ment of  the  claims  of  Russia,  Spain,  Great  Britain,  and 
the  United  States.  Accompanied  with  a  map  prepared  by 
the  author.  By  Wyndham  Robertson,  jr.,  of  Virginia. 
8vo,  paper.     Washington,  1846 50 

HOT  SPRINGS.  The  Invalid's  Guide  to  the  Virginia  Hot 
Springs,  with  cases  illustrative  of  their  effects.  By  Thos. 
Goode,  M.  D.     32mo,  cloth.     Richmond,  1846 25 

VIRGINIA.  Report  on  the  Soils  of  Powhatan  County.  By 
W.  Gilham,  Prof.  Va.  Military  Institute.  With  a  Map. 
8vo,  paper      Richmond.  1857 35 

BIRD.  WESTOVER  MANUSCRIPTS,  containing  the  his- 
tory of  the  dividing  line  betwixt  Virginia  and  North  Ca- 
rolina.    A  Journey  to  the  Land  of  Eden,  A.  D.  1733;  and 

^  A  Proo^ress  to  the  Mines,  written  from  1728-36,  and  now 
first  publislied.  By  W.  Bird,  of  Westover.  8vo,  boards. 
Petersburg,  1841.     New  edition  in  press 3  00 

BLAND  PAPERS,  being  a  selection  from  the  manuscripts 
of  Col.  T.  Bland,  jr.,  of  Prince  George  county,  Va.;  to 
which  are  prefixed  an  Introduction  and  Memoir  edited  by 
Charles  Campbell.  2  vols,  in  one,  8vo,  h'f  ro.  Peters- 
burg, 1840 3  00 

VIRGINIA  POLITICS.  A  History  of  the  Political  Cam- 
paign in  Virginia  in  1855;  to  which  is  added  a  review  of 
the  position  of  Parties  in  the  Union,  and  a  statement  of  the 
political  issues  distinguishing  them  on  the  eve  of  the  Pre- 
sidential Campaign  of  1856.  By  J.  P.  Hambleton,  M.  D. 
8vo,  mus.     Richmond,  1856 2  50 

VIRGINIA  CONVENTION.  Proceeding  and  Debates  of 
the  Virginia  State  Convention  of  1829-30,  to  which  are 
subjoined  the  New  Constitution  of  Virginia,  and  the  votes 
of  the  people.     8vo,  calf.     Richmond,  1830 5  00 

VIRGINIA.     Pay  and  Muster  Rolls  of  the  Virginia  Militia 

in  the  War  of  1812.     8vo,  half  calf.     Richmond,  1851-2.    15  00 

VIRGINIA  STATISTICS.  Documents  constaining  statis- 
tics ordered  to  be  printed  by  the  State  Convention  sitting 
in  the  city  of  Richmond,  1850-51.  8vo,  calf.  Richmond, 
1851 % 2  50 

VIRGINIA  CONVENTION.  Journal,  Acts  and  Proceed- 
ings of  a  General  Convention  of  the  State  of  Virginia,  as- 
sembled at  Richmond,  1850.  8vo,  half  calf.  Richmond, 
1850 5  00 

VIRGINIA  HISTORICAL  SOCIETY  COLLECTIONS, 
ADDRESSES,  &c.  (Contents:  Stuart's  Indian  Wars, 
1763  ;  Grace  Sherwood's  Trial,  1705  ;  Address  in  1833  by 


J.  p.  Gushing;  in  1851  by  W.  H.  Macfarland ;  in  1852  by 
H.  A.  Washington  ;  in  1853  by  H.  B.  Grigsby  ;  in  1856  by 
R.  M.  T.  Hunter;  in  1856  by  J  P.  Holcombe.)  8vo,  half 
turkey.     Richmond,  1833-56 5  00 

VIRGINIA  CONVENTION,  1850-51.  Register  of  the  De- 
bates and  Proceedings  of  the  Vir2:inia  Reform  Convention, 
(imperfect.)     8vo,  half  sheep.     Riclimond,  1851 3  00 

VIRGINIA.  A  Comprehensive  Description  of  Virginia  and 
the  District  of  Cohimbia,  containing  a  copious  collection 
of  geographical,  statistical,  political,  commercial,  reli- 
gious, moral  and  miscellaneous  information,  chiefly  from 
original  sources,  by  Joseph  Martin;  to  which  is  added  a 
History  of  Virginia,  from  its  first  settlement  to  the  year 
1754,  with  an  abstract  of  the  principal  events  from  that 
period  to  the  Independence  of  Virginia,  by  W.  H.  Brock- 
enbrough,  formerly  Librarian  at  the  University  of  Virgi- 
nia, and  afterwards  Judge  of  the  United  States  Court  of 
Florida,  8vo,  sp.     Richn)ond ^ , 2  00 

MAURY.     Paper  on  the  Gulf  Stream  and  Currents  of  the 
Sea,  read  before  the  National  Institute  at  its  annual  meet-         * 
ing  in  1844,  by  M.  F.  Maury,  Lieut.  U.  S.  Navy.     8vo, 
pa.     Richmond,  1844 13 

BURKE.  The  Virginia  Mineral  Springs,  with  remarks  on 
their  use,  the  Diseases  to  which  they  are  applicable,  an<l 
in  which  they  are  contra-indicated;  accompanied  by  a 
Map  of  Routes  and  Distances.  A  new  work — 2d  edition. 
Improved  and  enlarged.  By  W.  Burke,  M.D,  12mo, 
muslin.     Richmond,  1853 75 

COTTOM'S  EDITION  OF  RICHARDSON'S  ALMA- 
NAC. 24mo,  paper,  Gc.  Per  dozen,  25c  ;  per  gross, 
$2.50.  Containing,  besides  the  twelve  calendar  pages 
and  astronomical  calculations,  a  Jewish  Calendar,  Garden- 
er's Monthly  Instructor,  List  of  the  Virginia  Senators, 
Members  of  Congress,  Senate  and  House  of  Delegates; 
Virginia  and  North  Carolina  State  Governments;  State 
and  Federal  Courts  of  Virginia,  North  Carolina,  Maryland, 
and  the  District  of  Columbia;  Conjectures  of  the  Weather, 
Equation  or  Time  Tables,  Receipts,  Anecdotes,  &c. 
Published  annually. 

JEFFERSON  &  CABELL.  Early  history  of  the  Univer- 
sity of  Virginia,  as  contained  in  the  Letters  of  (during 
the  years  from  1810  to  1826)  Thos.  Jefferson  and  Joseph 
C.  Cabell,  hitherto  unpublished;  with  an  Appendix  con- 
sisting of  Mr.  Jelferson's  bill  lor  a  complete  system  of 
education,  and  other  illustrative  documents;  and  an  In- 
troduction, comprising  a  brief  historical  sketch  of  the 
University,  and  a  biographical  notice  of  Joseph  C.  Cabell. 

8vo,  muslin.     Richmond,  1856 2  50 

JUBILEE  AT  JAMESTOWN,  VA.  Report  of  Proceed- 
ings in  Commemoration  of  the  13lh  of  May,  the  Second 


8 

Centesimal  Anniversary  of  the  Settlement  of  Virp;inia, 
containing  the  Order  of  Procession,  the  Prayer  of  Bishop 
Madison,  the  Orations,  the  Odes  and  Toasts;  together 
with  the  Proceedings  at  Williamsburg  on  the  15th,  the 
day  when  the  Convention  of  Virginia  assembled  in  the  old 
Capitol,  declared  her  Independent,  and  recommended  a 
similar  procedure  to  Congress,  and  to  the  other  States. 
8vo,  paper.     Petersburg,  1807 1  00 

VIRGINIA.  Journal  of  the  Senate  and  House  of  Delegates 
for  various  years,     Richmond. 

VIRGINIA.     Journal  of  the  Convention  of  1776.     4to,  half 

sheep.     Richmond,  1816 2  00 

JEFFERSON.  Memoir,  Correspondence  and  Miscellanies 
from  the  Papers  of  Thos.  Jetferson.  Edited  by  Thos. 
Jetferson  Randolph.  4  vols.,  8v,  boards.  Charlottesville, 
1829 5  00 

JEFFERSON.  Observations  on  the  Writings  of  Thomas 
Jefferson,  with  particular  reference  to  the  attack  they 
contain  on  the  Memory  of  the  late  Gen'l  Henry  Lee.     In 

♦series  of  letters  by  H.  Lee.  2nd  edition.  With  an. Intro- 
duction and  Notes,  by  Chas.  C.  Lee.  8vo,  mus.  Phila- 
delphia, 1839 1  75 

-A.a-PJ,IOTJX.T-Cri^E. 

RUFFIN'S   (EDMUND)  FARMER'S  REGISTER.     10 

vols.,  8vo,  half  roan 30  00 

RUFFIN'S  (EDMUND)  PRIZE  ESSAY  ON  AGRICUL- 
TURAL EDUCATION.     2nd  edition,  8vo,  paper 10 

RUFFIN'S  (EDMUND)  AGRICULTURAL  ESSAYS: 
Containing  articles  on' the  theory  and  practice  of  draining 
(in  all  its  branches:)  advantages  of  ploughing  flat  land 
in  wide  beds;  on  clover  culture  and  the  use  and  value  of 
the  products;  management  of  wheat  harvests  ;  harvesting 
corn  fodder;  on  the  manner  of  propagation  and  habits  of 
the  moth  or  weevil,  and  means  to  prevent  its  ravages ; 
inquiry  into  the  causes  of  the  existence  of  prairies,  savan- 
nas and  deserts,  and  the  peculiar  condition  of  soils  which 
favor  or  prevent  the  growth  of  trees  ;  depressed  condition 
of  lower  Virginia;  apology  for  "book  farmers;"  fallow; 
usefulness  of  snakes  ;  embanked  tide  marshes  and  mill 
ponds  as  causes  of  disease ;  on  the  sources  of  malaria,  or 
of  autumnal  diseases,  and  means  of  prevention ;  on  the 
culture,  uses  and  value  of  the  southern  pea,  (Ruffin's  Prize 
Essay  of  November,  1854,)  and  especially  as  a  manuring 
crop.'     12mo,  half  bound.     Richmond,  1855 125 

RUFFIN.  A.n  Essay  on  Calcareous  Manures.  By  Edmund 
Ruffin,  a  practical  farmer  of  Virginia  from  1812;  founder 
and  sole  editor  of  the  Farmer's  Register;  Member  and 


9 

Secretary  of  the  former  State  Board  of  Agriculture  ;  for- 
merly Agricultural  Surveyor  of  the  State  of  South  Caro- 
lina: and  President  of  the  Virginia  State  Agricultural 
Society.  5th  edition,  amended  and  enlarged,  with  plates. 
Fine  edition,  8vo,  library  style,  $2;  cheap  edition,  l2mo, 

half  roan  or  mus.     Richmond,  1852 1  2a 

PLANTATION  AND  FARM  INSTRUCTION,  Regula- 
tion, Record,  Inventory,  and  Account  Book,  and  for  the 
better  Ordering  and  Management  of  Plantation  and  Farm 
Business  in  every  particular.  By  a  Southern  Planter. 
"  Order  is  Heaven's  First  Law."     New  edition  printing. 

THE  O  H.  O  a-^2' _ 

MAGRUDER  8c  ORVIS'  DEBATE  on  the  Punishment  of 
the  Wicked,  and  on  the  Kingdom  of  God.  12mo,  muslin. 
Richmond,  1855 •    •':■■'         ^^ 

WALSH'S  (  REV.  J.  T.)  NATURE  AND  DURATION 
OF  FUTURE  PUNISHMENT.  12mo,  muslin.  Rich- 
mond. 1857.. '. ••;••;•/;;;       ^^ 

MEMOIR  AND  SERMONS  OF  THE  REV.  WILLIAM 

DUVALL,  City   Missionary.     By  the   Rev.  C.  Walker. 

With  a  portrait.     12mo,  mus.     Richmond,  1854 50 

STRINGFELLOW'S    (  T.,  D-D. )    STATISTICAL    AND 

SCRIPTURAL   VIEW   OF    SLAVERY.      4th   edition, 

l2mo,  mus.     Richmond,  1856 50 

FAMILY  CHRISTIAN  ALBUM.     Edited  by  Mrs.  E   P. 

Elam.     8vo,  mus.     Richmond,  1855 150 

FLAVEL'S  WORKS.     Balm  of  the   Covenant.     View  of 

the  Soul  of  Man,  &c.  8vo,  half  roan.  Richmond,  1828..  60 
BLAIR.     Sermons  of  Rev.  John  D.  Blair,  collected  from  his 

manuscripts.     8vo,  sheep.     Richmond,  1825 50 

BARTLEY'S  (J.  AVIS)  POEMS.  Lays  of  Ancient  Vir- 
ginia, &.c.     12mo,  mus.     Richmond,  1855 ■. 75 

MOCK  (THE)  AUCTION.  Ossawatamie  Sold !  A  Mock 
Heroic  Poem  ;  with  Portraits  and  Tableaux,  illustrative  of 
the  character  and  actions  of  the  world-renowned  Order  of 
Peter  Funks.  By  a  Virginian.  12mo,  mus.  10  tinted 
plates.     Richmond,  1860 •         75 

CARTER.  Mugffi,  by  Nugator;  or  Pieces  in  Prose  and 
Verse.  By  St.  Ledger  L.  Carter.  24mo,  half  roan.  Bal- 
timore, 1844 :••••/•••.••;••,        ^^ 

BETHEL  HYMNS.  A  Collection  of  Original  Spiritual 
Songs.  By  Mrs  Elizabeth  Sowers,  of  Clark  county,  Va. 
48mo,  sheep.     Richmond,  1849. . •••"•".         ^^ 

FARMER'S   (C.  M.)  FAIRY  OF  THE    STREAM,  and 

other  Poems.     12mo,  boards.     Richmond,  1847 50 


10 

COURTNEY'S   (REV    J.)   SELECTION   OF   HYMNS. 

24mo,  sheep.     Richmond,  1831 35 

SOUOOL. 

VAUGHAN'S  (S.  A.)  ABECEDARIAN;  OR,  FIRST 
BOOK  FOR  CHILDREN.  Designed  to  render  the  learn- 
ing of  the  Alphabet,  and  of  Elementary  Spelling  and  Defin- 
ing, pleasing  and  intellectual;  and  to  fix  in  the  mind  habits 
of  attention  to  the  force  of  letters  in  the  formation  of 
words,  and  to  the  meaning  of  words,  and  through  their  ap- 
plication to  their  appropriate  objects,  to  inculcate  the  love 
of  Nature  and  reverence  of  Nature's  God.  12mo,  roan 
back.     Richmond 1.5 

YOUNG   (THE)   AMERICAN'S   PRIMER,  OR  FIRST 

BOOK.     24mo,  paper.     Richmond,  per  dozen 25 

SCHOOLER'S  (SAMUEL)  ELEMENTS  OF  DESCRIP- 
TIVE GEOMETRY,  the  Point,  the   Straight  Line,  and 

the  Plane.     4to,  mus,     Richmond,  1853 2  00 

The  paper,  type,  and  plates,  are  in  the  finest  style  of  the 
arts  ;  and  the  book,  altogether,  has  been  pronounced  equal, 
if  not  superior,  to  any  English,  French,  or  American  work 
on  the  subject. 

GARNETT'S  (JAMES  M.)  LECTURES  ON  FEMALE 
EDUCATION,  AND  THE  GOSSIP'S  MANUAL.  3rd 
edition,  18mo,  sheep.     Richmond,  1825 50 

C^SAR,  with  English  Notes.  By  Samuel  Schooler.  In 
preparation. 

STRINGFELLOW'S  ( T.,  D.D.)  STATISTICAL  AND 
SCRIPTURAL  VIEW  OF  SLAVERY.  Fourth  edition, 
12mo,  mus.     Richmond,  1856 50 

FLETCHER'S  (JOHN)  STUDIES  ON  SLAVERY.   8vo, 

sheep.     Natchez,  1852 2  00 

DEW.  An  Essay  on  Slavery.  By  T.  R.  Dew,  late  Presi- 
dent of  William  and  Mary  College.  2d  edition,  8vo,  pa- 
per.    Richmond,  1849 50 

RUFFIN'S  (EDMUND)  AFRICAN  COLONIZATION 
UNVEILED.  Slavery  and  Free  Labor  described  and 
compared.  The  political  Economy  of  Slavery  ;  or  the  In- 
stitution considered  in  regard  to  its  influence  on  public 
w^ealth  and  the  general  welfare.  Two  Great  Evils  of  Vir- 
ginia, and  their  one  Common  Remedy.  8vo,  pa.  Rich- 
mond, 1860.     Each 10 

UNCLE  ROBIN  IN  HIS  CABIN  IN  VIRGINIA,  AND 
TOM  WITHOUT  ONE  IN  BOSTON.  By  J.  W.  Page. 
2nd  edition,  plates,  12mo,  muslin.     Richmond,  1853 75 

WHITE  ACRE  vs.  BLACK  ACRE,  a  Case  at  Law,  re- 
ported by  J.  G.,  Esq.,  a  retired  barrister  of  Lincolnshire, 
England,  18mo,  mus.     Richmond,  1856 75 


11 

ONJiu^SOTsriO. 

DOVE'S  (JOHN)  VIRGINIA  TEXT  BOOK  OF  ROYAL 

ARCH  MASONRY.  Plates,  12tno,  nius.   Richmond,  1853,     1  25 

DOVE'S  (JOHN)  HISTORY  OF  THE  GRAND  LODGE 
OF  VIRGINIA,  AND  ANCIENT  CONSTITUTIONS 
OF  MASONRY.     ISmo,  muslin.     Richmond,  1804 75    ' 

DOVE'S  (JOHN,  M.D.)  MASONIC  TEXT  BOOK.     2nd 

edition.     Plates,  12mo,  mus.     Richmond,  1854 1  25 

REMINISCENCES  OF  A  VIRGINIA  PHYSICIAN.    By 

Prof.  P.  S.  Rnter.     2  vols.,  r2mo.  paper.     Lonisville,  1849,         50 

SOUTHERN  AND  SOUTH-WESTERN  SKETCHES. 
Fun,  Sentiment  and  Adventure  !  Edited  by  a  Gentleman 
of  Richmond.     18mo,  mus.     Richmond 60 

TUCKER.  Gertrude.  A  Novel.  By  Judge  Tucker,  Pro- 
fessor of  William  and  Mary  College.  8vo,  paper.  Rich- 
mond, 1845 35 

UNCLE  ROBIN  IN   HIS  CABIN  IN  VIRGINIA.  AND 

TOM  WITHOUT  ONE  IN  BOSTON.     By  J.  W.  Page.  ,     , 

2nd  edition,  plates,  r2mo,  mus.     Richmond,  1853 75  n*  # 

SKETCHES  OF  CHARACTER,  (  Randolph,  Wirt,  Ken- 
ton, &c.)  AND  TALES  FOUNDED  ON  FACT.  By 
F.W.Thomas.     8vo,  boards.     Louisville,  1849 25 

MICHAEL  BONHAM,  OR  THE  FALL  OF  BEXAR. 
A  Tale  of  Texas.  In  five  parts.  By  a  Southerner.  8vo, 
paper.     Richmond,  1852 25 

EDITH  ALLEN,  OR  SKETCHES  OF  LIFE  IN  VIR- 
GINIA, By  Lawrence  Neville,  l2mo,raus.  Richmond, 
1855 1   00 

JVCXJSIO- 

EVERETT'S  (Dr.  A,  B.)  ELEMENTS  OF  VOCAL 
MUSIC  ;  including  a  Treatise  on  Harmony,  and  a  Chapter 
on  Versification.  Designed  as  a  text-book  for  teachers 
and  pupils  in  Female  Seminaries,  Male  Academies,  Sing- 
ing Classes,  etc.,  etc.,  and  for  private  study  and  reference. 
2nd  and  enlarged  edition.     ISmo,  mus.     Richmond,  1860,         50 

EVERETT'S  (L.  C.  &  Dr.  A.  B.)  NEW  THESAURUS 
MUSICUS,  OR  U.  S.  COLLECTION  OF  CHURCH 
MUSIC;  constituting  the  most  complete  variety  of  new 
Psalm  and  Hymn  Tunes,  Sentences,  Anthems,  Chants,  &c. 
for  the  use  of  the  Choir,  the  Congregation  and  the  Singing 
School,  ever  ofl'ored  to  the  American  people.  Comprising 
also  all  the  popular  old  choir  and  congregational  tunes  in 
general  use.     Music,  8vo,  boards,     Richmond,  1S60.. ... .     1  00 


•  >' 


'■  si^/^^  '"^-krJUi^s 


12 


WINKLER'S  HINTS   TO   PIANO-FORTE    PLAYERS. 

12mo,  boards.     Richmond,  1847 25 

LUMBER  (THE)  DEALER'S  ASSISTANT,  OR  COM- 
PLETE TABLES  OF  THE  MEASUREMENTS  OF 
TIMBER,  Sec. — showing  the  quantity  in  feet  and  inches 
in  any  number  of  plank  or  scantling,  from  one  to  fifty  ;  of 
any  length  in  feet  or  half  feet,  from  eight  to  twenty-two 
feet  long;  of  any  width  in  inches  and  half  inches,  from 
three  to  twenty  inches  wide.  By  George  S.  Sutherlin. 
l2mo,  half  sheep.     Richmond,  1849 50 

VIRGINIA  JUSTICE'S  RECORD  BOOK  OF  JUDG- 
MENTS.    Cap  size,  half  bound 150 

PAJOT'S  OBSTETRIC  TABLES,  translated  from  the 
French,  and  arranged  by  O.  A.  Grenshaw,  M.  D.,  und  J. 
B.  McCaw,  M.  D.     4to,  boards.     Richmond,  1856 125 

PHYSICIAN'S  TABULATED  DIARY,  designed  to  facili- 
tate the  study  of  Disease  at  the  Bedside.  By  a  Physician 
of  Virginia.     Pocket  size.     Muslin.     Richmond,  1856.. . .         50 

SOUTHERN  LITERARY  MESSENGER.    29  vols.,  8vo, 

in  numbers.     Richmond,  1834-59 100  00 

Ocf^Most  of  the  volumes  or  numbers  are  for  sale  separate. 

RANDOLPH'S  POCKET  DIARY  AND  DAILY  MEMO- 
DANDUM  BOOK.  Richmond,  186— .  18mo,  half  bound, 
35c.;  tucks 60 

RANDOLPH'S  POCKET  DIARY,  DAILY  MEMORAN- 
DUM AND  ACCOUNT  BOOK.  Richmond,  186-.  Half 
bound,  75c.;  tucks 1  00 

LIBRARY  CASES,  OR  BOXES,  in  neat  book  form,  very 
convenient  and  useful  for  j)reserving  valuable  pamphlets 
and  magazines.     8vo.  roan  back 60 

SKETCHES  OF  CHARACTER,  (  Randolph,  Wirt,  Ken- 
ton, &c.,)  AND  TALES  FOUNDED  ON  FACT,  ^y 
F.  W.  Thomas.     Svo,  boards.     Louisville,  1849 25 

EDGAR'S   SPORTSMAN'S  HERALD  &  STUD  BOOK 

Svo,  sp.     New  York,  1833 150 

WATER  CURE.  By  Dr.  J.  B.  Williams,  and  others.  With 
comments  and  explanatory  remarks  on  bathing  for  invalids, 
&,c.,  by  J.  Timberlake.     18mo,  paper.    Richmond,  1853. .         25 

THE  PRACTICAL  MINER'S  OWN  BOOK  8c  GUIDE. 
By  J.  Budge.  With  additions  by  J.  Atkins.  Plates,  12mo, 
muslin.     Richmond,  1860. 2  00 

THE  CARPENTER'S  GUIDE  IN  STAIR-BUILDING 
AND  HAND-RAILING,  based  upon  Plain  and  Practical 
Principles,  with  sufficient  explanations  to  inform  without 
confusing  the  learner.  By  Patrick  O'Neill,  Practical 
Stair-Builder.    Folio,  mus.     Richmond 2  00 


>>1 


MILITARY  BOOKS, 

PUBLISHED  BY 

J.   W.   RANDOLPH 


COOPER  &  MAURY'S 

Pfice,.  65  Cts. 

: ii.«>»»     


BTJCKHOLTZ'S 

PriC3  75  Cts. 


a 


BUCKHOLTZ'S 
CAMP  DUTY,  FIELD  FOETIFICATION 

COAST   DEFENCE. 


Price  50  Cts. 

— >«qi>»» 


COOEIN&  BY  TEOOPS, 


Price  26  Cts. 


ox 


OUT-P 


FOR 


TY, 


'  Price  50  Qts. 


TiX, 


Pries  75  Cts. 


.  •A^IJT.Lli 


Tl   3 


Price  75  Cts. 


■r^ 


